JP6697650B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning drum game machine (slot machine).

  Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the game balls falling in the game area of the game board, as well as winning openings, starting openings, variable winning openings, etc. that allow the game balls to win. It is common. When a game ball is won in these, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, in such a gaming machine, one provided with a notice means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the notice means.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of a notice means.

The gaming table of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned object,
A notice means that can execute a notice,
Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern variable display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One type of mini-game among the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game,
One type of mini-game among the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different types of mini-games,
The certain notice is a notice regarding the result of the decorative pattern variable display,
The certain notice is a notice displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first display aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second display aspect,
The first mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying a result suggesting a display mode of the certain notice (hereinafter, referred to as “some result”),
The second mini game is a mini game capable of displaying the certain result,
When the first mini game is successful, a result indicating that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode is displayed as the certain result,
When the second mini game is successful, a result indicating that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode is displayed as the certain result,
Before the first mini game is started, it is notified that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode as the certain result when the first mini game is successful ,
The display mode of the certain result displayed when the first mini game is successful is different from the display mode of the certain result displayed when the second mini game is successful,
There is a case where the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode during the display of the first mini game (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, when the first mini-game succeeds, the certain notice being displayed changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
When the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode than when the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode, the result of the final big hit in the decorative pattern variable display Is easy to display,
It is characterized by

According to the game table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in advance notifying means.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|generation of another case following FIG. 15 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize|stored in RAM408, (c) is a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 31 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 33 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is the figure which shows the production example where the notice icon changes in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the display example at the time of a power failure/power recovery, while displaying a notice icon. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 41 in steps. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 46 in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing in stages about an example of production using a movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be performed in decorative pattern display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to an advance notice item. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production and digest production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 62 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production and digest production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 64 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the production|generation effector 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a change change notice production as a look-ahead notice production by a reservation icon applicable to an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 76 step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the production shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of a suspension change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the symbol variation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the extended production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-9 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the production|generation of the mini game applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the production|generation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of a stop display design of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub-control part performs. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, (b) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a display in the menu screen shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo continuous production. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in production. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation change notice. It is the figure which explains one example of the production which uses production movable body. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is the figure which shows the state where the reservation change announcement is done during production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that a continuous hitting operation is performed in the production by long-pressing the production button. It is a figure showing an example of a concrete example of a production in a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a concrete example of a production in a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a concrete example of a production in a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which operates the production button according to the rhythm. It is a figure showing an example of a concrete example of a production in a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the concrete production example which uses the two production buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is the figure which shows one example of the selective production which is executed during the design fluctuation indication. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is a figure explaining an example of a back button effect. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is a figure showing an example of a concrete example of a production in a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining the other example of a display of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initial setting of the production movable object is performed. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 1000 as a game table according to a modified example of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home-use television set provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a game table according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray-equipped door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened/closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and an effect button 136 built in the effect button 136. A chance button lamp 138 for illuminating, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. It fires toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while it is being operated may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150 are provided at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to performance, and a payout control section 600 (control processing related to payout of game balls). (See FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop staff, and a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure combined). "Holding" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state until the start of the big hit game after the power is turned on, and thereafter, not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any state of a normal state, a time saving state (electric power support state), and a probability variation state, and a state with a special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no change in the special figure.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, description will be made using a word that refers to a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the term "control state" includes a so-called game state concept.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning port 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate is used. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to the variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering the game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that enter the game area 124, the second ball that is the variable starting area is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning a prize port 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a static state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning a prize mouth 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. In addition, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the gaming ball passes or enters to win the gaming ball. The door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol by winning the special figure variation game. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to reach the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or the starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or by simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210 Display control of a drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing the above, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is similarly latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 controls the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. VDP (video) for displaying the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 by reading the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 and using the work area of the VRAM 436. -Display processor) 434 is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500 fire. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure Floating game). Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special maps, “Special map A” to “Special map I”, are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments where the light is turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments where the light is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable variation big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins, the remaining rounds cannot be expected to win coins, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. While you can expect to win balls in the rounds, you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a symbol, which is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, in which it cannot be expected to win a payout in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by a player in such a manner as to make it difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected will continue at the start of a big hit. This is a jackpot that creates a form that encourages the player whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes or the ninth round) are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure probability variation” or simply “probability variation”), and the state in which the probability is low is a special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probable probability variation"), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric power support state" is a state where the general map is concerned, and the "time saving state" is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure fluctuation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one time opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the electric power open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered chewing increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for one winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls and the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in a power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, while the special map variation game is played 100 times, the electric power support state is maintained, and the non-powered game is played on the 101st time. It shifts to the support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when the "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 5(a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing mode (opening of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, and for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5(b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot symbols (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. e"). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that you can expect to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

  FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The special starting point 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 has a ball winning, that is, the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball enters the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  In order to notify the actual 5R probability variation big hit (“special drawing B”), 5R normal big hit (“special drawing F”), 2R normal big hit (“special drawing e”), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration” A combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns of the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 1"). Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit ("special drawing A" and "special drawing a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of "decoration 7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described above (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 5(d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 causes all seven segments to light up and one segment in the center to light up. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value for special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win/fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special figures stores a plurality of types of start information as one set, and the start information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and when the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and the register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, the power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value updating processing, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in a signal state storage area that is provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). Information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals of the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the following processing associated with winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before two times, no detection signal before, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the general symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for changing/stopping the symbol display on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating/stopping display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 234 and 226 and the starting holes 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each prize hole or each starting hole is set. It is read and incremented by 1 and set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of start-up information acquired here are stored as a set of start-up information in an empty area of the start-up information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. This public figure state update processing performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the public figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode. The 7-segment LED is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is made in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (universal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing the drive of 2321 and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure inactive is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value, the universal figure display device 210 receives the common figure display device 210 from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One of the time periods during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time period is stored in the normal period variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal period variation display time period. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is performed. The details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processing is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinction drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is ON and the universal figure probability variation flag is also ON, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so as to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( Any one of the special symbols f) is confirmed and displayed.

  Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the saving time storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening/closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is to be ended. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Also, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the universal variation game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time for one pair of opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric channel extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability Change, Phenomenon Change Short, and Den Chu Extension is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of variable prize holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is ON, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 1 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games concerning the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is prioritized over the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a big hit (judgment judgment) by using the hit/miss judgment table stored in. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit/miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, then deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started prior to the special advantage 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started It may be a change in the starting mouth winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is eight regardless of special figure 1 and special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority variation that the upper limit number of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 respectively. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update The special process and the special figure-related lottery process may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed at the same time. Further, in the case of simultaneously changing a plurality of special maps in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display the respective lottery results, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, final effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a pattern variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a prize at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and whether or not there is a prize at the variable winning port 234 or 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

  Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figures stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag are included. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag are included. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproval determining process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is erased every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by one, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is deleted and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is reduced each time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased by one. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is equal to the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning/judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success/failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. It is performed by comparing with the number of pre-readings of special figure 1 stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prereading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/losing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). Note that this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination, instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during electric power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable special figure 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Delay) is stored, "special figure A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area "hold 1" stores "special drawing f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (fluctuation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special drawing high probability state, when the special figure high probability state is determined, the high probability table for judgment accuracy shown in FIG. , And refer to the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of the special decision high probability state shown in FIG. 2, when the special figure high probability state is obtained, the special figure low probability state is obtained by referring to the high probability table for determination of odds or hits shown in FIG. In that case, the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the big hit judgment is out of order, the table for small hit judgment shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the table for small hit judgment referred to and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning/judgment determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the winning/disapproval judgment result, and the loss is generated with the probability of 63536/65536. However, if the result of the determination whether or not the special figure per lottery is successful (lottery result) is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning/decision determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the hit result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the winning/discharging result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu A to Toku-G is selected, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is lost, toku-zu I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the hit result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the depression of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in the present embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705, If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), If not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, update processing of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 14, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. The background here is not displayed, but a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during symbol change of special figure 2. While the pattern of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit up and displayed, but during the change of the pattern of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the figure 1 special figure, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

  The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218 as well as the number of holding icons of special figure 1, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become hold icons with older winnings. In the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

  In FIG. 14A, two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are shown. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. It should be noted that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device→starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking→starting or erasing the hold icon moving animation→changing the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

  In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 14C, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the subject of this pattern change) starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 14D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 14(g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the production button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position not overlapping the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14(h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14(i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 14(j), the reachable state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero.

  In FIG. 14(k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that although the reach state entry notice image 207 may be displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 14(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 14(n). , Has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach). An image of an enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(n), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(o), a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  FIG. 15: is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps.

  In FIG. 15(p) continuing from FIG. 14(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15(s). In FIG. 15(s), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 15(t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from the previous one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15(v), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" that is confirmed for the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15(v) is lit. In FIG. 15(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15(w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable variation big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached by a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 14(l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 15(t) In 15(u′), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed, and in FIG. 15(v′) following FIG. 15(u′), “decoration 6-decoration The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15(w′) subsequent to FIG. 15(v′), a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 15(q).

  In FIG. 16(a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14(o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16(b). In FIG. 16(b), the main character is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 16(c), like FIG. 15(t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16D, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(e), the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special figure 1 is turned on, and the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of Toku-zu 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In (f) of the figure, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in (g) of the figure, and the varying icon h0 completely disappears in the (h) of FIG. It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating a notice icon display region information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of the notice icon being consumed, and FIG. 9D is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of increasing the notice icon. 18A is a diagram illustrating an example of the pre-change notice icon, and FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating an example of the post-change notice icon.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the number of noticeable icons and the number of holdable icons that can be displayed may be the same. The number of areas forming the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 17(a), a notice icon I6 of a hat having a hat pattern is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice icon second display area YA2 shows a thousand box. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes made up of a design is displayed, the notice icon I10 of a fan made up of a design of a fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is shown. A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is indicated. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 17B. It is determined. In this embodiment, one advance notice icon is displayed for each area, but two or more advance notice icons may be displayed for each area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 17C, for example. Controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, 8 seconds after the variation display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. A corresponding effect may be executed. After that, when the variation ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the variation icon display area 280, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 17A, the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) is moved toward the change icon display area 280. Along with the start of, when the variation display of the decorative design (the design variation corresponding to the hold 2) is started, 4 seconds after the design variation is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and thereafter, The effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, 10 seconds after the SP reach is started, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds elapse after all the decorative patterns are in the temporarily stopped state, the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the exhausted fan advance notice icon I10 may be executed. . In this way, it can be said that the completion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 have, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17(a) was started, the lord appearance appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the notice effect is increased. To be done. In this lord's presentation, the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, the DJ effect that the DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the hall production is executed and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be set to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of sync may be set to one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the effect contents corresponding to the types of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the notice icons include those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 18(b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, the notice icon (the notice icon before change) for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear is, for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord. There is a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first notice icon I1 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in white, and the reliability of the big hit is weak. Further, the second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in green, and the jackpot reliability is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the lord's face silhouette is represented in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either weak to strong. When the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, and the third notice icon I3 arrive at a predetermined change display timing (for example, the increase display timing of the notice icon), It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 18(b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136. It should be noted that the first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136.

  In this way, the first reminder notice icon I1, the second reminder notice icon I2, the third reminder notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start the symbol variation, which is the target of prefetching. It may be displayed before it is displayed, and it may function as a prefetch notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed together, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I1 When the second palace's notice icon I2 and the third lord's notice icon I3 are displayed, a "question mark" may be additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the notice icon (the notice icon after change) whose content of the corresponding effect is clear is, for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I7 for a shuriken, and a ribbon notice icon. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by a Bancho character, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gasse pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo continuous production, for example, as described later, a character of a length appears when the pseudo continuous production starts, but the display mode of the character of the length is different from usual (for example, the length becomes aura). The display mode is wrapped) to notify that the degree of reliability is strong. Note that, for example, in spite of the second pseudo-reproduction, the third-time pseudo-reproduction may be informed to indicate that the reliability is strong. In addition, the pseudo pattern production of the weak pattern notifies that the degree of reliability is weak by displaying the appearing character of the length in a normal display mode. Further, the pseudo continuous effect of the gasse pattern is an effect of performing a false display while pretending that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, as described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed as “continuation” in red or black. There are cases where Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black characters with “continuation” or “question mark”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates a shuriken thrown by the Oniwaban (ninja) character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When one shuriken's notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice effect being executed may be changed to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the big hit is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the shuriken notice icon I7, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the reliability is high. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as “Cham”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon that imitates a ribbon worn by a princess Chibi character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, there is a case where the effect of shifting the background to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the variation notice mode is executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed in which the displayed background is changed to one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (stage change weak. Production). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “STETCHEN”. There is a case. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “STETCHEN”. Alternatively, the “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  Thousands of boxes' notice icon I9 is a notice icon that imitates a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character toward the farmer, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed to be a big hit, strong or weak. If the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed, and the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed during the execution of the weak reach production with low reliability, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach transfer effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is digested after execution of the weak cut-in notification with low reliability, and then the strong cut-in notification with high reliability is executed (advance notification promotion). Production). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, if the big hit is confirmed, the pattern A may be displayed as “large board behavior”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is high, the pattern A may be displayed in red or black as “promotion”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “promotion”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, any one of the finalized effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed as a big hit. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the big hit is finalized or a premier reach in which the big hit is finalized is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after the out-of-reach is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed in association with the fan advance notice icon I10, “Blessing” may be displayed. When the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, but the exhaustion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon that imitates the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either the weakest or the big hit confirmed. When one of the second button notice icons I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation acceptance period is started, and the production button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. There is a case where any one of the notice icon I8, the thousand notice box notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 is changed to a digested display, and a corresponding effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing any of the notice icons.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the change notice of the notice icon is performed when the above-mentioned notice icon before change is changed to the notice icon after change, but via the change display of the notice icon from the change notice icon before change. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (“No” notice icon shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: deletion effect). In this effect, it is notified that the change is out of alignment. In other words, it is a preliminary announcement indicating that the pattern is a loss confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erase effect is executed, a big hit may occur.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 19, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a general figure. The figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and, for example, displays the display result of the fourth symbol by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the game board 200, and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a symbol variation in-progress notification area of the general figure, a symbol variation in-progress area of special figure 1, a symbol variation in-progress area of special figure 2. The LED in the area where the quadrangle figure is displayed is lit while the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, but is blinked or extinguished during the variation of the symbol of the regular figure. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, it is blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, it is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 19(1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display regions 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19(1), the first special map display device 212 displays the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative pattern display device 208 accordingly displays the variable display of the decorative symbols. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In addition, in FIG. 19(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 in FIG. 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode). In addition, in this effect example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19(2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lights in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is increased by 1 to 3 and is held. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as described later. For convenience of explanation, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1. The display mode is a round, non-patterned, white display mode. The same applies to the following description.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19C, the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 19(4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19(5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of the prefetch. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19(7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 19(8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 19(9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to give a notice that the pseudo-relation effect will be executed in the future.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 19(11) to 12(12), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 20(14) continuing from FIG. 19(13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, there is no change in the hold icon or the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 20(15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20(16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(17), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. The fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in YA3, and is displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19(10) to 19(12) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20(22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. Note that, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, such as when two notice icons I6 of a hat are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the displayed notice icon, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20(24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 20(25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good. Further, when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed when the hold icon is displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 20(26), and then, as shown in FIG. 20(27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step.

  In FIG. 21(28) continued from FIG. 20(27), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the end of the hat notice icon I6, and is displayed in a stopped right state. The effect display that pushes up the design is performed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, " It is also possible to form the reach state as decoration 1”) and start the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo continuous symbol representing the lord's character is displayed. The display is moving slowly from top to bottom.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-repetition will be executed. In addition, if the pseudo-relational pattern is not stopped and displayed, and the frame is framed out downward, the pseudo-repetition is not started, and the combination of decorative symbols that are out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the reach effect has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34) to consume the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. That is, a display is made in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21(35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 21(36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), and then, in FIG. In response to the end of the notice icon I6 of No. 6, the bancho character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo continuous effect. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the game will be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from "decoration 1" to " The decoration is changed to "2", a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is displayed. At this time, while the pseudo continuous symbols are displayed, the character information of “pseudo×2” is erased, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo×2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo×2” may be changed while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. In this example of effect, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed to inform that the pseudo-link is executed. In this embodiment, as the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted in one symbol variation display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed and the pseudo continuous effect is performed once, and when the two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo consecutive effect is performed twice, the hat is used. It is easier to get a big hit when the two notice icons I6 are digested, and when only two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed. It can be said that when the pseudo continuous production is performed three times, it is more likely to be a big hit if the three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

  In FIG. 22 (43) continued from FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbols of “decoration 1” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, the reach effect is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44 ), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduced. Is displayed. An image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(44), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(45), the main character and the enemy swordsman duel. The animation display of the scene starts.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display is started in which the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, a display is made in which the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand box is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47), and above the notice icon I9 of the thousand box enlarged. A character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing of FIG. 22 (48), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is erased together with the character display of “promotion”, and then the figure. The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 22 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed is slightly darkened, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, A display for cutting off the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (50 ), the background turns dark.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect) is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51 ), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 22 (52 ). At the timing shown in, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 22(55), as shown in FIG. 22(56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 23 (58) which continues from FIG. 22 (57), all are temporarily hidden including the advance notice icon display area 285. Then, in FIG. 23 (59 ), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (61). At this time, for example, under the enlarged fan notification icon I10, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit is set may be added. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward at the timing of FIG. 23 (62). Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols, which have been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is restarted and re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23(64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23(65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", which is confirmed as a big hit, is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan advance icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is exhausted to execute the re-fluctuation effect and become a big hit. However, the advance notice icon I10 for the fan is displayed in the advance notice icon display area. If it is not displayed in 285, the re-variation effect may not be performed and the display result of the outlier may be derived. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is not performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. In other words, when one notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols is displayed. It can be said that is out of range. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is described that the notice icon is consumed only while the pattern variation display, which is the subject of the read-ahead notice, is executed, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Even in the variable display of symbols executed before the variable display of symbols, the notice icon may be consumed and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons exhausted in the pattern variation display subject to the prefetching notice and the number of notice icons consumed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the readahead notice are made different. Or they may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding device. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  24(8a) to FIG. 24(10a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(10). That is, in FIG. 24(8a), not the notice icon I6 of the hat but the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, and an effect display is displayed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9a-1), the thrown first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(9a-2), after the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 24(10a). Then, the exploding first lord's notice icon I1 is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icons and makes a happy expression is displayed. Even with this example of effect, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  24(8b) to FIG. 24(9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(9). That is, in FIG. 24(8b), the effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 24(9b). When the effect button 136 is operated during the period from the display of the first button notice icon I4 in the notice icon display area 285 to the exhaustion of the first button notice icon I4, the first button notice icon It changes to either the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, or the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the big hit indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the big hit. May work, and the staging effect may be enhanced. The period from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be disabled during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the notice effect of the notice icon was extinguished. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the effect button 136 is operated when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice that was scheduled to be displayed. The effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Also, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 was operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

  24(8c) to FIG. 24(9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(9). That is, in FIG. 24(8c), as in the case of FIG. 19(8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24(9c), the state in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area is shown. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute an increase effect that fails to increase the number of notice icons. It should be noted that a gall increase effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, a notice icon having a higher reliability of a big hit may be less likely to be executed.

  FIG. 24(7d) to FIG. 24(9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(7) to 19(9). That is, in FIG. 24(7d), similar to FIG. 19(7), a state in which the lord's character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position is shown. After that, in FIG. 24(8d), not only one notice icon I6 of hats but also notice icons I6 of three hats are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three caps thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of the notice icons at once improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed, and it may be possible to enhance the effect. Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, thereby quasi-linking. It may be possible to give an advance notice that the big hit is settled because the effect is guaranteed to be executed three times. The notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 d ′), some or all of the three hated notice icons I6 of the hats have not reached the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gall increase effect or the all gall increase effect which makes a frame out.

  24(7e) to FIG. 24(9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(7) to 19(9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7 e ), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7 ), the lord's character YM having the notice icon I 6 of one hat, the notice icon I 9 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I 10 of a fan in addition to the notice icon I 6 of one hat. Is displayed to be moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 24 (8 e ), an effect display in which the hat notice icon I 6, the thousand box notice icon I 9 and the fan notice icon I 10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24(9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed respectively. As described above, also in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of types of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, since the number of notice icons increases at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. There are cases.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame out from the left side of the area.

  24(12f-1) to FIG. 24(12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19(12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 19 (12), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed with the notice icon I6 of the hat being displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

  FIG. 25(8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19(8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 25(8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19(8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is set at a predetermined position on the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), so that the number of holdings is displayed. The effect holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default lighting mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading warning light is emitted. Drive control can be performed according to the mode (for example, lighting while switching between 7 colors). Note that, in FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emitting mode.

  FIG. 25(8i) to FIG. 25(9i-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(9). That is, in FIG. 25(8i), as in the case of FIG. 19(8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the prefetching notice. The effect display that changes to (holding change effect) is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat notice icon I6 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. The hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2′), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are held using the effect holding lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat drops below the display area, the light emitting mode of the first holding lamp of the special figure 1 may be changed to the light emitting mode of the prefetching notice.

  FIG. 25(8j) to FIG. 25(9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 19(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25(8j), it differs from FIG. 19(8). It is shown that the character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area, not the character YM of the lord, (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 25(8j), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I6 of the hat. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 j ), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and displays the hat notice icon I 6 on the notice icon first display area YA 1 in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is left on is displayed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). With the configuration, the production may be diversified to enhance the production effect.

  FIG. 25(8k) to FIG. 25(9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 19(8) to 19(9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. Character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, the presentation display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes that he has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k′), the DJ character is placed in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 so that the DJ character passes behind the notice icon. You may display as if you are doing. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a thousand boxes so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. You may make it perform the effect display which puts the notice icon I9 in the notice icon 1st display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect.

  FIG. 25 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 25 (12l), the character notations corresponding to the respective notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with each other. For example, the caption notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the word "Continue", and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. "Promotion" is additionally displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is additionally displayed with "blessing" and the notice icon fourth display. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 is "STETCHEN". The letters are additionally displayed, and the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is additionally indicated with the letters "question mark" as well as "continue." This may make it easier to understand the contents of the notice effect that is subsequently announced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25 (12l′) and FIG. 25 (12l″), some or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon will be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the effect display in which the big hit is determined by the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed is executed, for example, FIG. As shown in (12l″″), when three notice icons I6 of a hat with the character notation “continuation” added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit is confirmed four times. It may be possible to give an advance notice that an effect display including a continuous effect will be performed. In addition, when the character additionally displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character "promotion" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for announcing that the result of the symbol variation display when "is exhausted" is a big hit confirmation (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the above-described production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord's character YM or the DJ character BY, but in the production example shown in FIG. 26, the notice icon is increased by displaying the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 26(A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, the notice icon pattern imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 26(A2). In the example illustrated in FIG. 26(A2), the hat notice icon pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon pattern of this hat, the word "stock" is added, and when the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is informed that the notice icons are increased and displayed. is doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative pattern of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 26(B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26(A1), the decorative pattern of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c to form a reach state. , Normal reach production is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 26(B2), the first paltry's notice icon pattern imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 26(B2), the notice icon “Stock” is added to the notice icon design of the first lord, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that the notice icon is displayed in an increased number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(B3), the notice icon design of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B4), the decorative design of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result is a display defect. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It goes without saying that the changed notice icon is not limited to the hat notice icon I6 and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing of changing the notice icon is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, and for example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol variation display from the next time onward, or the notice may be changed. The icon may not be changed until it is exhausted. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. Here, FIG. 27 to FIG. 30 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  27(38m) to (40m-3) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 21(38) to 21(40). 27(38m) to (39m), the same effect as that of FIG. 21(38) to (39) is performed, but in FIG. 27(40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at a low speed. Although the pseudo-relational pattern appears in a variably displayed manner, after that, as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-relational pattern comes to the stop display position of the decorative pattern, the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-relational pattern. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and fluctuations are displayed. , It is informed that it is the result of the stop display. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  27(23n) to FIG. 27(24n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20(23) to 20(24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27(23n), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat being started is started, but as shown in FIG. 27(24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIG. 27(23o) to FIG. 27(24o-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 20(23) to FIG. 20(24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 of is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), a combination of decorative patterns that are not included in the pseudo continuous effect does not start (in FIG. 27 (24o-2), "decoration 1-decoration 2 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2") is displayed temporarily to display the fluctuation of fluctuation, and then the stop display is performed to notify that the result is a deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 27(22p) to FIG. 27(23p) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 20(22) to FIG. 20(23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27(22p), when, for example, 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon is displayed in FIG. 27(23p). Instead of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1), another notice icon may be displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be sequentially consumed from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are consumed in the order in which they are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons that are stocked later are consumed first. There may be cases. For example, when the previously-stocked notice icon is first consumed, the big hit may be easily made, or conversely, the big hit may be made difficult to be made. In addition, regardless of the stock order, the order of digesting the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the order of notice of the notice icons. You may do so. In addition, it may be possible to give a notice that the jackpot is settled by digesting the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order. For example, the notice icon I6 for a hat and a shuriken A rule may be set such that when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order, the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, the player may be given an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icons that are a big hit, which may improve the player's motivation.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested to the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy has occurred, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left side, respectively. You can At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as when the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

  28(Aa) to FIG. 28(Ae) show effect examples in the case where the notice effect of the notice icon is increased and then the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 28(Aa), after the shuriken's notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is exhausted, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 28(Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 28(Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon by the lord's character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28(Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted to leave a blank notice icon third. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, the increasing number of the notice icons may be displayed in the notice icon display area that is blank due to the notice icon being consumed.

  FIG. 28B shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks appearing in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are consumed, the lord's character YM is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, the display of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas in which the increasing notice icons are displayed is not limited to the order described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Also, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, in the case where the increasing number of the notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the rightmost side of the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. It may be suggested to be displayed in the display area 285, or may be suggested to have the highest reliability of the big hit.

  FIG. 28C shows an example of an effect when the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during one execution of the symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28C, while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, It is displayed that the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 when the notice YI icon is increased by the character YM. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. As described above, the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during one execution of the symbol variable display. At this time, the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap with the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the notice effect of the notice icon is started, the digest effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digesting effect of and the increasing effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the time of starting the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. The area may be blank before the start.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the digest effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inspiring whether or not the notice icon is consumed is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon, which is the target of the digest, starts shaking and fluctuates to determine whether or not the notice icon is digested. I am trying to fuel it. After that, as shown in FIG. 23(60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the notice icon may be suspended. In the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is erased without being consumed, thereafter, a stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative decorations, which is the display result of the deviation. You may notify that.

  FIG. 28 (59 s) to FIG. 28 (60 s) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 23 (59) to FIG. 23 (60 ). That is, in FIG. 28 (59 s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand-box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Of these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan is displayed. When I10 is digested, it gives a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when another notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is digested, it is left as it is. The combination of the decorative patterns may be used to notify that the display will be stopped and not displayed.

  FIG. 28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this example of presentation, the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (25t), when the digestion effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 28 (28t) to FIG. 28 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. Note that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice-during-advance icon display area YA0 may be after the notice effect of the notice icon is started or before the notice effect of the notice icon is started. It may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the notice effect of the notice icon ends or before the notice effect of the notice icon ends. Good, it may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. May be the same as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts, or to the digested notice icon. It may be performed at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or may be erased at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is erased (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion. 22 is deleted at the timing (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the notice-in-digestion icon display area YA0 are deleted in FIG. 22(44), or only the notice-icon-in-digestion display area YA0 is deleted). You may. In addition, when a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one pattern change display, the notice icon a in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been digested first is the notice icon A. The effect may be erased after or at the same time as the end of the effect, and no notice icon may be displayed in the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be deleted at the same time as or after being started, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digesting notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. Alternatively, the notice icon a may be left as a history even during the production of the notice icon B, or at the end of the symbol variation in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are consumed (for example, It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice is being consumed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 29(Aa) to FIG. 29(Ae) show effect examples in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29(Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are used respectively. The production is started. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the order of digesting the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 29(Ab), they are enlarged and additionally displayed with a character display. .. Specifically, the character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stetchen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started corresponding to the completion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(Ac), the shoji closes, and after Chibihime's character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens and the moon opens as shown in FIG. 29(Ad). The display of the background (moon surface) showing how the universe is viewed from the surface starts. In addition, during execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and the thumbnail is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29(Ae), the decorative design that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the notice of the hat notice icon I6, the Bancho character BC. Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. ..

  In this example of effect, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are different, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the big hit game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for notifying that the probability variation big hit is confirmed). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted during execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icon is consumed, for example, it may have a meaning indicating that it may be promoted. In this way, even with the same notice icon, when it is exhausted during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the variable display, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. .

  FIG. 29(Ba) to FIG. 29(Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29(Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the hold is exhausted and symbol variation. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29(Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29(Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage is changed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be erased without fail, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be erased, or the notice icon may not be erased. Good.

  FIG. 29(22v-1) to FIG. 23(23v) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 20(22) to 20(23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), a lord's character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. Notify in advance the type of notice icon that will be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (23 v ), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I 6 of the hat) is consumed is started. Even when the type of the notice icon to be digested is announced in advance, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon that was announced in advance is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon given in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the variable display of the symbols is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the notice icon's digestion. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and other effects are not executed. Although the production corresponding to is executed and the other productions are not executed, for example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the bancho character BC does not appear, and the princess character appears. The big hit may be settled when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (a so-called big break is set) (so-called breaking the law).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is set and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is displayed again after the probability variation state or the time saving state is finished. May be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured so as not to be carried over even after the probability variation state or the time saving state is completed.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect that gives advance notice of the content of the reach effect that is to be subsequently transferred depending on the type of the notice icon that is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 30(Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30(Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 has been digested, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30(Ac-1), the enlarged character length character BC2 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach that corresponds to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30(Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30(Ac-2), the enlarged lord's character YM3 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord's reach corresponding to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30(Ab-3), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, thereafter, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 30(Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to Princess Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, in this example of performance, it corresponds to the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach effects is configured in the order of princess reach> lord's reach> bancho reach. There is. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a lord's character enlarged and displayed after the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested) appears (when a so-called law break occurs). May be configured so that a jackpot is confirmed. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the notice icons so that the combined notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (dedicated effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are consumed rather than one notice icon. May be configured to have high reliability.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30(Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the pattern variation display is started, At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of consuming the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 30(Bc), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter and the effect button 136 is displayed. The player is informed that the operation can be accepted, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30(Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the above-mentioned button reach effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Then, at the timing of FIG. 30(Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 30(Cc). As described above, the projected button image 136b is changed to the projected button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button has been promoted to a button reach effect with higher reliability of the big hit.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34.

  Note that in FIGS. 31(1) to 32(14), the notice icon I6 of the hat was used as the notice icon used in the effect of increasing the notice icon, but the notice icon I1 of the first lord has been changed. Since it is the same as FIG. 19(1) to FIG. 20(14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. 32(14) and 32(20), all the notice icons used in the notice effect increase production are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 20(15) to (19) except for.

  In FIG. 32(20), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 32(21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 32(22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 32(23), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the icon in the notice icon first display area YA1. In addition, the display that the first notice icon I1 of the Lord is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as shown in FIG. 32 (23 ), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I 1 of the first lord are displayed, Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is not limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 32 (25), a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time that the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or performed after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(26), the character display of "continuation" added to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. It should be noted that when the digested notice icon is re-displayed in the original position, it may be displayed so that it can be recognized that it has been digested, for example, by displaying a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed. The display may be grayed out, or the character information “done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  32(27) to FIG. 33(33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. 20(27) to 21(33), except that the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, so here Is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is consumed. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 33 (36), the character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the word "Continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  33(38) to (45), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. 21(38) to FIG. 22( except that the notice icon displayed in the third icon display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as that of (45), the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46) so that the first icon of the first person's notice displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, a display is made in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first hall moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (47). Above the warning icon I9 of the displayed 1000-box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a production with higher reliability. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "promotion" added to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (48). The display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  After that, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 34 (49 ). In the present production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display such as the occurrence of the power failure and then the highly reliable reach. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), after the character display "Is it a chance?" is displayed on the dark background in the decorative pattern display device 208. , (50-2), the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (51 ), the character display “Is it too hot?” is displayed, and then the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52 ). After that, as shown in FIG. 34(53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 34(55), as shown in FIG. 34(56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  In FIG. 34 (58 ), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59 ), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "Blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to inform that the big hit is settled. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the fan notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. A display for moving to YA4 is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols that have been swinging and varying in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is restarted, and the revariation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-changing effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35(65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66 ), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, "Special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing stepwise other effect examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIG. 36(8a) to FIG. 36(9a) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 31(8) to FIG. 31(9). That is, in FIG. 36(8a), the effect display in which the notice icon I3 of the third palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed. Note that the same can be done for the second palace's notice icon I2. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(9a), the thrown third palace's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIG. 36(8b) to FIG. 36(9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31(8) to 31(9). That is, in FIG. 36(8b), as in the case of FIG. 31(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36(9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of use of the announcement icon of the lord.

  FIG. 36(8c) to FIG. 36(9c) show another effect example of the effects shown in FIG. 31(8) to FIG. 31(9). That is, in FIG. 36(8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. ing. The effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36(9c), the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of the notice icons at once improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed, and it may be possible to enhance the effect. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is hard to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and has a low reliability (for example, the first lord's notice). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (prone to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of performance, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first hall) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different degrees of reliability may be increased at the same time. The notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

  In addition, in this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9 c ′), some or all of the thrown notice icons I1 of the first hall do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame-out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 36(8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(8). That is, in FIG. 36(8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM gives the first notice of the lord's notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 36(8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8f), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. Note that, in FIG. 36 (8f), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emitting mode.

  FIG. 36(8g) to FIG. 36(9g-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 31(8) to FIG. 31(9). That is, in FIG. 36(8g), as in the case of FIG. 31(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to read the advance notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first palace's notice icon I1 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as an opportunity to start the prefetch notice with the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first person, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), as in the case of FIG. 31 (12), the decorative pattern in the state where the first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The fluctuation display of is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

  FIGS. 37(8i) to (9i) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31(8) to 31(9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37(8i), it differs from FIG. 31(8). , The character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 on the flying carpet instead of the lord's character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 37(8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, as shown in FIG. 37(9i), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and changes the notice icon I1 of the first lord's possession to the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in one production of increase in the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). Depending on the configuration, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIG. 37(8j) to FIG. 37(9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 31(8) to FIG. 31(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37(8j), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37(8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37(9j), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 he/she has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon front side. Here, as shown in FIG. 37(9j′), the character BY of DJ is arranged in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as passing.

  FIGS. 37(8k) to 37(9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31(8) to 31(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37(8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37(8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third lord's notice icon I3. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37(9k), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display in which the DJ character BY places the third palace's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. That is, an effect of promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon having a low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon having a high reliability of the big hit. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relational effect is performed.

  FIG. 37(12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 37(12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with the character notation "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second visitor is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area is displayed. The notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed on YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is shown on the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of “question mark” is added to each notice. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give an expectation to the changed notice icon.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12 l ′), for some of the pre-change pre-notification icons, the type of post-change pre-notification icon may be pre-announced in text. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second palace's notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 is marked with the "question mark" character notation and the changed notice icon cannot be recognized, but the notice icon third display area is displayed. The first palace's notice icon I1 displayed on YA3 is annotated to be changed to a shuriken notice icon I7 by adding the character notation "Chan eyes", and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord, who is displayed, is annotated to be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "continuation", and is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6. The notice icon I1 of the No. 1 lord is annotated with the letter notation of "question mark" together with "continuation", and the notice icon I6 of the hat is changed. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to change notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. You may make it add the corresponding character notation only about things.

  38(8m-1) to FIG. 38(9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31(8) to 31(9). That is, in the example of the production shown in FIG. 31(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38(8m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), after the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9 m ), the character BY of DJ is thrown toward the upper left corner and the notice icon I 9 of a thousand boxes is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  38(8n-1) to FIG. 38(9n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 31(8) to 31(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38(8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38(8n-2), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown by the lord's character YM, and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the thousand-box notice icon I9 displayed in YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is consumed, the notice icon after change becomes the notice icon before overwriting (for example, notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is higher when the notice icon after overwriting is consumed, or the reliability of the jackpot is lower than when the notice icon before overwriting is consumed. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may not change.

  Next, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is being performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon first display area YA1 displays the notice icon I1 of the first visitor, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39(A), a lord's character YM2 holding a placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is given the character notation "I'll be changing" to announce that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

  After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39(B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39(B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was displayed in the default display mode is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change. In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Further, as shown in 39(C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable of the decorative symbol, but the variable symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon first display area YA1 displays the notice icon I1 of the first visitor, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39C, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Chibihime chance production is performed. The Chibihime chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned universal figure variation game is executed. The Chibihime chance production is a production that imitates an Amida lottery, in which the Chibihime character selects one of five start points, moves from the selected start point along the Amida route, and reaches the goal point. It is foretold that the effect corresponding to the icon shown will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 will be opened for a long time. When reaching the goal point indicated by the letter notation, it is highly possible that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon Indicates that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

  Furthermore, in this example of performance, when the player has reached the goal point where the lord's notice icon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 39(D1), among the pre-change notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. At least one of them changes to the changed notice icon. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39(D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the character Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39(D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39(D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the prefetch advance notification display mode. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change.

  In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case where the notice icon is displayed and the power is cut off/restored will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 40(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is being performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol fluctuations is held. ing. Note that, of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is a mode. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 includes a thousand box box. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40(B), the power is cut off for some reason, and FIG. 40(C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C) has a character display of "restore, please wait for a while" which is a return display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding device. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40(D), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed "Special figure I" which is the display result of the deviation. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are erased. In addition, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which was the display mode of the prefetch notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the prefetch result information stored in the special diagram 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special diagram 2 preread result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undetermined” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undetermined” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The pre-reading notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved reservations have been consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice will not be given for the newly increased hold (holding that the pre-reading result was saved) after the power interruption/recovery, but the pre-reading notice will be given after all the holdings including "undetermined" information have been exhausted. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be given before the suspension including the “undetermined” information is exhausted for the suspension that is newly increased after the power interruption/recovery.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise other effect examples of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 41. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 41(1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 19(5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the center of the display screen, a large decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, A second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281, and the third decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 19(5). The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the variation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to vary until the fixed stop.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, unlike the case of FIG. 19(6), the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I21 of "house" in which the letters "house" are circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41(3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 41(4), the notice icon I21 of the possessed “house” is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 41(5), and then as shown in FIG. 41(6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 41(7) to 41(8), a display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41(9), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41(10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41(11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM has a notice icon I22 of "monkey" in which the characters of "monkey" are circled.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41(12), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” possessed is foretold at the timing shown in FIG. 41(13). An effect display that is thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41(14), the thrown "montle" notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 41(6) is performed, and thereafter, the same effect display as in FIG. 41(7) to FIG. 41(8) is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41(16), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41(17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42(19) following FIG. 41(18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” have been consumed. The timing for deleting the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may start at the same time, or the notice icon I21 of the “house” starts to move is a notice icon I22 of “crest”. May be earlier than the start of the movement, or the movement of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be earlier than the movement of the notice icon I21 of the “house”.

  After that, when the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 42(22), the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. It should be noted that the effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, when the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") are consumed, a corresponding notice effect (decline for crest fall) is performed. Is configured. Even if these notice icons are consumed, the family crest fall effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or there may be a case of a loss. In addition, the case where the crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the crest fall effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a big hit. In addition, it is easier to consume the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") in the symbol variation display which is a big hit than in the symbol variation display which is a loss. May be configured.

  43 and 44 are diagrams showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon digesting effect. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In FIG. 43(a1), unlike FIG. 41(5), the notice icon I22 of “Crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 43(a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43(a3), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by "decoration 1" is formed and the reach effect is started.

  After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43(a4-1). It At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the “house” and the “crest” are arranged) instead of the order in which the “crest” and the “house” are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 43(a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “monk” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be enlarged and displayed in the order of arrangement of “monk” and “house”. In this example of effect, the above-mentioned family crest fall effect is performed after that, regardless of the case shown in FIG. 43(a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43(a4-2). For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the "house" and the "crest" (that is, the correct arrangement order), the family crest falling effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the "crest" and the "house" (that is, When the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the family crest fall production is more likely to be started than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured as.

  FIG. 43(b1) to FIG. 43(b6) show another effect form of the crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is being consumed without waiting for it to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and vertically while overlapping part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is operating (stirring) as if it is vibrating in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "preparing for family crest" indicating that there is a possibility that the crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the director's production has started. At this time, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I22 of "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 43( b 4 ), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I 22 of “crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display region 285, the notice icon display region 285. The notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43(b5), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest monument 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol is definitely stopped. However, it is not retracted to the initial position and the flapping motion is continued. Good. On the other hand, the character display of "preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43(b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the family crest monument 224B that has been retracted descends again, and the tilting operation is restarted. In this example of performance, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest cast 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. It is possible that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest fall effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 43(b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed later is consumed. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 43(c1) to FIG. 43(c2-3) show another example of the notice icon digestion effect. In this example of performance, a background notice in which the background is changed is shown by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 43(c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of "donor" in which the letters "donor" are circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of "Princess", which circles the characters of "Princess", is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa," which circles the characters of "Grandpa" is a notice. It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

  In FIG. 43(c2-1), the state of the background display is shown after the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" have been consumed. ing. As shown in FIG. 43(c2-1), when these three notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the grandfather's face up from the left side of the display screen and the lord's face. A background display in which the updated image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to be displayed as a background display indicating that is the highest. Further, the three notice icons may be simultaneously digested, or may be digested one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are consumed one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons that are consumed. For example, the notice icon I31 of “Den”> “Hime” It is possible that the highest degree of reliability is achieved when the notice icon I32 of ">" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are digested in this order, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set appropriately. .

  In addition, in FIG. 43(c2-2), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" has been consumed is shown. As shown in FIG. 43(c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the princess's face up from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are consumed is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “Princess” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” have been digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, “Denshi” The notice icon I31 of “No” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be consumed, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” may be consumed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are consumed, "donor" The notice icon I31 of "Grandpa" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" have higher jackpot reliability than when they are consumed, and the notice icon I31 of "Den" When the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. These can be set appropriately.

  In addition, in FIG. 43(c2-3), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is shown. The state of the background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43(c2-3), when this one notice icon is consumed, the background display in which the image with the face of the grandfather is displayed on the entire display screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the two notice icons are exhausted. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the "grandpa" notice icon I33 of the three notice icons is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the "donor" notice icon I31 is consumed. The notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or the notice of "grandpa" is announced. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is consumed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is consumed than when the notice icon I33 of the "grandpa" is consumed. However, these can be set appropriately.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Denjo" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or "grandpa" is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "is displayed", and when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is greater than when the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is displayed. May be set high, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, and the "donor" notice icon I31 and the "grandparent" notice icon I33 are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be set higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, but these can be set appropriately.

  In addition, in this production example, the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is configured to be displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, a so-called breaking of the law may be used to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

  Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. You can In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Further, in this example of performance, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" has been digested, the character of the lord appears and lord reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is consumed, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the grandpa character may appear and the grand reach is started. In addition, when the "grandpa" notice icon I33 and the "princess" notice icon I32 are exhausted, the grandfather character and the princess character appear and the grandfather & princess reach are started, and the "donor" notice icon. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the character of the lord and the princess character appear and the lord & princess reach is started, and the notice icon I31 of the lord and the notice icon of the grandfather When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "lord", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are exhausted, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather will appear. Hime & Grand Reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  Further, what these notice icons are displayed after being digested is not limited to the notice of the reach effect and the background display described above, and for example, the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, another notice (for example, various notices such as a character increasing the notice icon) may be given. In addition, the production performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (for example, a music piece) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. You may make it produce by the corresponding light emission pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, regarding an example in which effects may be performed for each of when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed and when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed explain.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms the reach state by “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44(d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the "house" notice icon I21 of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(d3), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to the chance symbol which is the special symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44(d4-1), the effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance pattern, or as shown in FIG. 44(d4-2), the family crest together with the effect image is displayed. There is a case where a crest fall effect for dropping the accessory 224B is performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be moved to. In addition, you may make it move to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image. Alternatively, the effect image may be changed to the swordsman reach without dropping the family crest actor 224B. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 44(d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, at the timing shown in FIG. 44(d4-4). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the family crest challenge has been reached is displayed. The first decorative pattern is shaken and changed while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance pattern-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lord's character YM pulls the notice icon I22 of the "crest" with a rope, and the notice of the "crest" is shown. This suggests that the attraction of the icon I22 increases the expectation for a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 44(d6-4), when the lord's character YM succeeds in attracting the notice icon I22 of "Crest", as shown in FIG. 44(d7-4), the family crest actor 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “crest” has been successfully digested. It should be noted that, after the crest dropping effect is performed, for example, the above-mentioned swordsman reach is transitioned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the lord's character YM may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the "monkey". In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be shifted to. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is successfully drawn. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord's character YM is broken and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” fails, the result is shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is first consumed. In addition, it may be configured such that the family crest fall effect is more likely to occur when the "monger" notice icon I22 is consumed than when the "house" notice icon I21 is consumed. The reverse is also possible.

  In addition to the "house" notice icon I21, the "crest" notice icon I22, the "lord" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "grandfather" notice icon I33, There may be a gaze notice icon that resembles the icon, such as a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "subject" notice icon, or an "aunt" A notice icon or the like of “” may be prepared. For example, even if the “house” notice icon and the “shark” notice icon are consumed, the crest fall effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “crest” notice icon may be consumed. The crest dropping effect may be performed less frequently when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are consumed than when it is performed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as “shark” may be changed to the notice icon such as “crest”.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "mon", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three characters or more may be used to apply to this effect example. The pseudo-relational effect may be performed when the three icons, namely the icons, are consumed.

  Further, in this example of performance, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”, and there is only one available stock in the notice icon display area 285, Alternatively, neither the "house" notice icon I21 nor the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. In addition, only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the one that could not be displayed is displayed as the notice icon. If there is a space in the area 285, the increase display may be performed. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the displayed notice icon may not be consumed in the first place. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and the notice icon may be used as it is.

  Further, in the case where there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 until at least one of the notice icon I21 for the “house” and the notice icon I22 for the “crest” is consumed and at least one of them is not displayed, for example, “house” When the notice icon I21 of “No” is consumed, the effect that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is also consumed may be performed, or the notice icon I21 of “house” alone may be performed.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in stages. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 45(e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed in a larger size than the hold icon h11), which is a display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is largely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In addition, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, various parts are added to the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and is shown in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 45(e1). The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. The first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. It carries the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45(e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket put on the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45(e3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 45(e4) after the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45(e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts forming the hold icon. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out as described above with reference to FIGS. 41(6) to 41(8).

  FIG. 45(e6) shows that the display result of the loss is derived, one pending variable display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45(e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the read-ahead notice display mode, or that the display mode of the hold icon that is already the read-ahead notice display mode is more reliable. For example, the fact that the display mode is changed frequently is notified. In addition, the big hit announcement display is also performed in the symbol variation display being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45(e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is being consumed. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen is shown. The DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45(e9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model of the head forming the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. Of the DJ, the character BY of the DJ flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the DJ character BY is displayed on the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon No. The effect display to be placed in the 2 display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of symbols is still displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(e10), the display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is informed that the fifth notice part P5 will be displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45(e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the body part of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 45(e11′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, but the third notice icon P3 is once displayed, and the notice icon first area of the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily displayed. You may make it display once (stock) in the display area YA1. In this case, instead of displaying in the first notice icon display area YA1, it may be displayed in another display area (for example, the third notice icon area YA3 in advance).

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of effect, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45(e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45(e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is being digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 45(e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variation icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the snowman). ) Is completed. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is the hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the variation is high.

  In addition, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted, for example, when the super reach effect is being performed, and for example, FIG. 45 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 45, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the variation icon h0 in the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may do it. Here, since the variable icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example of performance, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. In addition, when the displayed advance notice part is consumed, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of read ahead, functions as another read ahead notice of hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of read ahead. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestive production in steps, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 46 in steps. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46(1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. As shown in FIG. 46(1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46(2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A according to the appearance of the lord's character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and even if it is notified that the notice icon can be stocked. Of course, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord's character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. In the case where the lord's character YM possesses one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is displayed when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. It may be increased only by this, or all four displayable remaining display areas may be displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four displayable areas may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the notice icon display area including the four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed (first notice) (The icon display area) is reduced and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) consisting of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. A new stock icon may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is reduced or displayed, and the notice icon display area 285 is replaced with the notice icon stock number. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give the prefetching notice by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46(3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, it may be arranged so as not to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, the first decorative symbol display device. The notice icon entered in the predetermined warp entrance displayed in 208A may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing in the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 46(5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(6). On the first decorative pattern display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Accordingly, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby giving a notice that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed in the future. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 46(7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the variable display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 46(8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6 -The display is stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is still continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46(9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 46(10), the first icon of the previous icon in the previous icon display area 285A of the second decorative pattern display device 208B is displayed. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to extend over the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(12). To be done. It should be noted that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is such that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46(11) is the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing of moving to the center of the device 208A, or may be the timing of displaying the notice icon in an enlarged manner as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 47(13) continued from FIG. 46(12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat. The timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 47 (14), and the notice is displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208B. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative pattern is displayed across the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative pattern is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 appears, and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped is displayed. The player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the length-long character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47(16), the length-long character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "display across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be integrally displayed. Further, display may be performed by moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), a pseudo continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed in which it moves slowly downward. At this time, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47(19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47(19). After that, for example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG.

  48 and 49 are diagrams showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestive effect in steps. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding device. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to facilitate understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  48(a1) to (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, When the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 48(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. Since the content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 45, the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48(a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps with the substantial center of the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. The advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48(a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 46(2) and described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48(a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display region 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B moves up and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 48(a5-1), the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends and the display is stopped with the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. In addition, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of losing is displayed only in the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the first decorative pattern is displayed, and even in this first decorative pattern. The result of loss may be displayed. In this example of performance, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption, regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(a5-2), even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A may be maintained in the overlapping state. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the pattern variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is finished, but at any timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative pattern display device 208B can be set appropriately. At the timing shown in FIG. 48(a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative design is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, and the second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48(a6-2) shows that after that, the two reservations are exhausted and the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative design is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative design. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily visible to the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

  48(b1) to FIG. 48(b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, a predetermined number of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208), the notice icon display number display An example is shown in which a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) of the notice icons displayed.

  48(b1) to FIG. 48(b3) have the same effect contents as in FIG. 20(17) to FIG. 20(19), but the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example is It is shown that the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 48(b1), since only one hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. There is. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(b2), the lord's character YM throws three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the lord's character YM throws these notice icons. In addition, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called gasse is displayed). Then, when the three notice icons described above are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48(b3), the value is updated and "04" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48(b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is exhausted, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of notice icons displayed is reduced by one, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "03". The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is reduced may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or the notice icon may be displayed. It may be the timing after being digested. It should be noted that, as shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is exhausted, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this example of performance, the number of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7-segment. However, for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, voice, or a decorative pattern display device (a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or other) The display number of the notice icon may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 49(c1) to (c9) use two display devices (the first decorative pattern display device 208C and the second decorative pattern display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. However, they are different in that they use the same size display device. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49(c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the variable pattern display, which is the target of prefetching. The mode is a default display mode, like the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49(c1). At the timing shown by, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the chance roulette display area 287 described above is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 49(c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Further, the background display is also greatly displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  When the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 as shown in FIG. 49(c1), as shown in FIG. 49(c2), the second decorative pattern display device 208D displays the first decorative pattern. It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C, which was performing the background display, is switched to a display including the notice icon display area 285B, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode at the time of displaying the notice icon is changed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes small and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49(c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon I7 for shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 49(c3), since the number of reservations is one, the special reservation 1 second reservation number display H1 displays "1" to that effect.

  FIG. 49(c4) shows a state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance eye is given by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is consumed is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 49(c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is notified that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 49(c6) shows a state where the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 has started. That is, it announces that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat is consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49(c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49(c8), the decorative design is displayed from the first decorative design display 208C to the second decorative design display 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative design display 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49(c9), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C in response to the completion of the second hat notice icon I6, and the stop display is displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right pattern is performed, and the player is informed that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the length character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49(c9), when the decorative design is displayed large, for example, a large design in which the numerical design and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When the decorative design is displayed small, the small design consisting of only the numerical design is displayed, and the large design and the small design are displayed in different display modes, but the large design and the small design are displayed. It is also possible to make the display modes the same by changing only the size.

  In addition, in this example of performance, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. The first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may both be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in respective directions in which they are separated from each other, and in this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that the character objects arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized, and further, the character objects can be moved so as to project forward. You may. You may make it maintain such a state until all the notice icons are exhausted.

  FIG. 49(d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49(d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but their widths are slightly smaller. The three decorative pattern display devices may have the same size.

  The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49D, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and particularly, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed in is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F and the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol column. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described so far as well as the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 50, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , And the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with the frame portions projecting from the upper end side, the lower end side, and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side, and the right end side. A frame portion is provided so as to project from each of them. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are respectively configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are at positions closest to each other, It is possible to perform display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

  Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50(e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22(47) and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 50(e1), while the swordsman reach is being executed, the 1,000-box icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed, and a notice is given that the production will shift to a more reliable production. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50(e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the directions in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50(e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been executed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J becomes slightly darker, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect being performed. The display is cut. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative pattern and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e3) to FIG. 50 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50(e6), a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified that the player can operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

  After that, when the production button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50(e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2- The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50(e8) to (e9), all are once hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the directions away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 50(e10). Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of shaking fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is displayed as a result of the loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed starts at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2). That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is consumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208H and the third decorative pattern display device 208J, and the variable display is performed again. The combination of decorative patterns of "1-decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50(e7′) shows an example in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 50(e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the player operates the effect button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of production when it is performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50(e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate together with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, or separately. It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in (e6) of the figure is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third. The decorative pattern display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths of the respective display screens are aligned.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 51, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is made in each of the transmission regions of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the panel of the first layer arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the panel of the first layer. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that, in FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Moreover, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two layers, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, in the case of being configured by one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different by changing the pattern of lens cut. Further, in FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 51, the hold icon in the hold icon display area 281 which is the target of the prefetching notice is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51(f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed while the decorative symbol variable display is being performed, and the variable icon display region 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed on the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51(f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51(f2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a dark display is displayed. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 51(f2-1), a dark display and a stock effect of the notice icon by the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (lights off), and the dark display in the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. ..

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the state of moving toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, thereby performing the stock production of the notice icon. You may be allowed to.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and guidance is performed. Stock production of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated to rotate the first layer panel. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated together with the second layer panel.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 51(f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 to thereby simulate the future. It announces that continuous production will be executed.

  FIG. 51G shows a state where the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 51(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, at that timing. The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  In FIG. 51(h), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows the situation of giving advance notice. As shown in FIG. 51(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variable display of the symbols in the chance roulette display area 287, Of the notice icon I6 is announced.

  FIG. 51(i) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51(i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing, the light guide plate. A pattern imitating the effect image is formed by illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat and also illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer. The notice icon is being digested as well. At this time, when the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are made different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel and the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 51(j) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The screen is enlarged and displayed, and at that timing, the notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 52(1) to (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 for the fan and changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink. 22(44) to (54), only the parts different from the above description with reference to FIG. 22 will be described in detail, and the description of the common parts will be omitted. Further, in this example of effect, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52(1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 for this drink is a notice icon for giving a notice that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52(11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52(12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52(14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display of sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52(15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52(16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a protrusion button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protrusion position is displayed. At this time, the state is before the start of operation reception of the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 52(17), after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 52(18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52(16), or the protruding button image 136b. The timing may be before the display of, or the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. Moreover, in this example of production, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. In addition, during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it lights up in a mode of notifying that it is a period other than the operation reception period (for example, lights in blue). You may make it light in the mode which notifies that (for example, it lights in red).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect using the movable means applicable to this embodiment.

  53(a1) to (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 53(a1) shows the same display as FIG. 41(1), but the production movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the production device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

  FIG. 53(a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a notice is given that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, or a notification may be given by voice or a lamp. A plurality of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared according to the type of the notice icon, and the type of the notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the stocked notice icon. In FIG. 53(a3), the manner in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked is shown.

  In FIG. 53(b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable around the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224Da with the character "large", the fifth effect movable body 224De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable bodies 224Db to which the characters are attached are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and in the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable bodies 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df marked with an asterisk and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd marked with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the rotation of the produced movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of produced movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the notice icons stocked may be rotated. Good.

  FIG. 53(c1) to FIG. 53(c6) show a state of notifying that the prefetch mode has been entered by operating the production movable body 224. In this example of performance, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode informing that the variable display of the special map which is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53(c1) shows a state in which the special notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production movable body 224 is configured by an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the production device 206 via the rotation axis ax1. . Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the prefetch mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53(c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text “Special training in preparation” on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. Is scrolled from to the left. As a result, the player is notified of the shift to the prefetch mode. On the other hand, in the production movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position (first position) that covers the front surface side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A reciprocating operation (prefetch operation) is performed between the two. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is made to return to the initial position once during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during execution of the prefetch operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate. However, in addition to the upper arm 224a, the forearm 224b may operate, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm does not operate. Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53(c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by aligning two "decorations 1" during the pattern variation display of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching. The look-ahead operation is also continued here.

  FIG. 53(c4) shows that special training reach as a super reach effect has started. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the character display of "starting special training" indicating that special training reach has been started is displayed. In addition, after the production movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 53(c5), and then as shown in FIG. 53(c6). Then, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. Is. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is the target of the prefetching notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  Since FIG. 54(1) shows the same display as FIG. 41(1), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  In this effect example, the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54(3), but the notice icon I6 of the hat he is carrying has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 54(4) is displayed. As shown in, while the character YM of the lord is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54(5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The lord's character YM is still waiting at the throwing position.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 54(6), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the notice icon is announced during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notice icon is not stocked. Instead, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variable display ends and the next symbol variable display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, a notice is displayed that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but a so-called gaze notice that does not display the notice icon is given. You may. In this case, for example, the lord's character YM may be terminated before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead starts, for example, one symbol before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the lord's character YM may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is terminated, for example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. The display of the lord's character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the lord's character YM may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. Also, in the state where the character of Tonosama is on standby, when the big hit occurs in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation is being displayed), the lord's character may continue the standby display with the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, after that, the effects shown in FIGS. 54(7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 54(7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 54(12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 54(13), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 55(a1) to FIG. 55(a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 55(a1) shows a state in which the boring effect that is performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed is started when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the strike is obtained in the bowling game, the character display of "Strike item Get" indicates that the item can be obtained as the reward. In this example of performance, when a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, bowling effect by the lord's character is started. The contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the notice item, for example, the pending display is related to the change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and It may be related to a notice about the symbol variable display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this example of production, it can be said that the advance notice of stocking of the advance notice icon is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 55(a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a special effect that is provided only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used in the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display that is being executed, or may be used as another prefetch advance notice. You may be asked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and the character display of "following the next change" is displayed, which indicates that it is continuously performed in the symbol change display to be executed next. It is to be noted that “Strike item Get” indicating the mission and its reward is also displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord's character rolls on the lane toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Is fueling the expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a4), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike has been taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, and as shown in FIG. 55(a5). As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is reported that stock has been made. In this way, in this effect example, the notice item is not displayed (stock) and the notice item is displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Has been announced.

  As shown in FIG. 55(b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55(c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped to the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285C that displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed to perform the above-described bowling effect in the wipe display area WP2 and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed on the screen.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during fluctuation display). Background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 55(a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55(b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55(c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, in stages, another modified example of the effect of increasing the number of advance notice icons applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the one in which the special display of the special figure 2 is preferentially displayed over the special figure 1 has been described, but in this example of performance, the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game is prioritized. Nonetheless, the special figure variation game according to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the variation of the starting mouth winning order in which the starting mouth winning order is started. It should be noted that this production example can also be applied to the case where the special figure 2 priority variation is performed. Further, in FIG. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22 are the holding icons showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and held, and the second special figure starting port 232 has been won and held. It is a hold icon showing a variable display of special figure 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of the Midaduji and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) for acquiring a notice item.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-1), the character SB of the sabotani is placed at one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. And a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and an icon IX for a loss are placed for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, a number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set appropriately, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of holdings at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves along the line according to the rule of Mida and, as a result, the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan reaches the end point, the notice icon is stocked. Then, when the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Then, every time the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of the sabotani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of the sabotani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-repeating is performed. You may do the same. Further, it is also possible to proceed to a vertical line two or more ahead for each symbol variation display. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 55(c) and 55(d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the mami production even during execution of the super reach. Then, for example, in some cases, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons during the super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56(a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 56(a2-1), when the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the starting point of the horizontal line in the upper row of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke that hides the vertical line is erased, and a state in which the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle row are connected by the vertical line is displayed, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 56(a2-1), the middle horizontal line has been reached.

  After that, when the variable display of the special map 1 ends, the variable display of the special map 2 continues, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by moving animations. To be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(a3-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the horizontal line in the middle row to the horizontal line in the lower row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle row. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variable display of the special map 2 ends, the variable display of the special map 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the moving animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 56(a4-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line connects the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the Sabohani character SB follows the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line according to the Amida Lottery rule. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 56(a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect is terminated, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 56(a6). To be done.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-1) and described above, one of the plurality of different types of notice icons is selected, but, for example, FIG. 56(a1-) As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 56(a1-3). Good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-3), the fan advance notice icon I10 is, as described above, the advance notice icon indicating that the effect of giving an advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so the player It may be possible to further increase the expectation for a big hit. The effect shown in FIG. 56(a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-4), the icon IX for losing is not arranged, but the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I10 for the fan, and the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes are arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production at ease.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-5), the sabotani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the hat notice icon I6 and the fan notice icon I10) arranged at the end points of the respective horizontal lines. Alternatively, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 56(a1-5), since the fan advance notice icon I10 is included, it is assured that the effect of giving an advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so that the player makes a big hit. It may be possible to further increase the expectation of.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-6), the notice icon of the lord whose type of notice icon is not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, The notice icon I3) of the Lord of 3 may be arranged. In this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Further, the notice icon of the lord has different colors depending on the types as described above, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the third palace's notice icon I3, which is the red lord's notice icon, is more likely to be changed to the "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon than the "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of, can be changed to the notice icon in which "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56(a3-1) and as described above, the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani, but for example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, and thus may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the character SB of the sabotani is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 56(a2-1), the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56(a2-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the areas where the notice icons respectively placed at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed are hidden by smoke, and then, shown in FIG. 56(a2-2a). ), the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56(a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the contents of the Amida effect are promoted. Note that, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of the horizontal lines are changed to the missing icon IX or the notice icon having a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida production are demoted. You can

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56(a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke that hides part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during the execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 may be acquired. Then, the third vertical line is erased, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56(a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut midway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 56(a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, and therefore, the icon IX with the loss is selected, and after the Amida effect is finished, FIG. 56(a4-3a). As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  It should be noted that in the above-mentioned Amida effect, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice for the symbol variable display which is the target of the pre-reading, depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a figure showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. is there. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetch, and the hold display is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the hold icon of Sabohani). The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment in that

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 57(1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 57(1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display is performed, and accordingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The variable display of the symbols is being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 57(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of the special figure 1 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 57(2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. It is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode of Sabohani) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57(3), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57(4), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1. It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 57(5) shows that the symbol variable display is being continued.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57(6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. In this way, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stock) in the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The production of a certain lord has started.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 57(7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 57(8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57(9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 57(11) to 57(12), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. ..

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has passed, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is lost. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the movement animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the symbols that have been prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 57(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to say that the prefetching notice by the notice icon and the prefetching notice by the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and step by step other effect examples of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect. FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 58(a1) to FIG. 58(a3-1) show a situation in which a notice effect is given in advance that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of order. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58(a2-1), it is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is held at the display position of the first holding icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special drawing 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 58(a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "at the next change", and further, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following this, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. Warns that the product will always be stocked during the next symbol fluctuation display.

  After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display is ended, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variable display, As shown in 58 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. This allows the player to recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 will be stocked, which may allow the player to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described production example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58(a2-2) is displayed. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "In the next fluctuation", and further, "ga stock" is displayed following this, but the question mark is added. In this case, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no production is performed regarding the stock of the notice icon, as shown in FIG. 58(a3-2). It should be noted that a production related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, a hall effect, etc.) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gasse stock production in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

  FIGS. 58(b1) to (b3) show that the prefetch mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is being performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58(b1), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetch is suspended, and the prefetch notice is displayed as the display mode of the third suspension icon h13. The hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special figure 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variable display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "intense heat approaching" scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

  After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display is ended, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 58(b3), during the execution of the symbol variable display. The lord's presentation is performed, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice by changing the background display, in addition to the pre-reading notice by the stock of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58(c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the lord's effect or the like is performed and the notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

  FIG. 58(d1) to FIG. 58(d3) show that stocking of the notice icon and digestion are performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the stocking and digesting of the notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the variable display of the symbol can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 58(d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as the notice icon I6 as shown in FIG. 58(d2). It is temporarily stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 58(e1) to 58(e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by the production of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do it.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of stepwise. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 59(a1) to FIG. 59(a3) show that the notice icon display area is also used as the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display.

  As shown in FIG. 59(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or explanation of the appearing characters may be performed, or the notice may be displayed. Good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as the explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned hall effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59(a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the notice of "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59(a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

  As shown in FIG. 59(b1) to FIG. 59(b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the lord's effect is not stocked and is kept as it is. It may be digested. As a result, it is possible to perform the digesting effect of the notice icon relating to the notice that is being displayed in the symbol variation display.

  59(c1) to FIG. 59(c2) show that a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59(c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAL1, a notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon third display area YAL3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is shown in the notice icon third display area YAL3. It is displayed. Further, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAR1, a notice icon second display area YAR2, a notice icon third display area YAR3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59(c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this example of performance, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. That is, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when the number is smaller than that. Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot may be different. Well, for example, the larger the number of the second button notice icons I11 in stock, the more likely it is to be a big hit. It should be noted that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be consumed, and for example, four button notice icons I11 may be displayed or only two may be consumed. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being consumed. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of the notice items stocked.

  59(d1) to FIG. 59(d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59(d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed as the first hold. It is displayed in a small size overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the notice icon is included in the hold icon and may be displayed is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59(d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced-size hat displayed in the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the word "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. To be done. In addition, in this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed in the change icon h0 is performed every time the suspension of the variable display of the symbol is exhausted, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59(e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the variation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the variation icons or the hold icons.

  59(f1) to FIG. 59(f3) show an example in which the advance notice icon may not be stocked even though the advance notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

  59(f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59(d1), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, thereafter, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing at which the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59(f2), and then, as shown in FIG. 59(f3), the variation icon. Although h0 is deleted, at this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also deleted together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  59(g1) to FIG. 59(g3) show that, when a certain notice icon is consumed, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are consumed is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 59(g1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bouquet notice icon I51 as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more icons of the plurality of types of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18B. Regarding which notice icon is included, It is difficult to identify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59(g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is consumed, the bouquet notice icon I51 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then is enlarged and displayed. It

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the kind of the notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is changed. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included, while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the notice icon may be continuously displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed, and for example, the variable display of symbols is suspended. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the variable display of the symbol is not held, the stock state even during the demo display May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked, regardless of whether the variable display of symbols is held or not.

  Further, it may be possible to give a notice of the time until the notice icon is displayed.

  Also, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of chances while the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (downgraded).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The production may be changed to the fan advance notice icon I10 while it is being performed, or the pseudo continuous production number may be increased in the pseudo continuous production executed by digesting the hat advance notice icon I6. Good. In addition, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  Further, depending on the length of the symbol variation display time, whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon may be determined.

  The length of the variable display time may be the same or different when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not given to the symbol variation display which is a big hit and the symbol variation display which is a loss.

  Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set not to give the notice of stocking the notice icon.

  Further, in the case where the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 2 is executed, it is possible to select the variation time of the length of stocking the notice icon. Here, the stocked notice icon may be consumed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be consumed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  When the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of special figure 1, the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of special figure 1 before the interruption is stocked in the symbol variation display. The notice icon may be kept in stock and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the types of the notice icons are not limited to those described above or those described below, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as the notice icon, and when this item for customization is consumed, for example, the number of selectable BGMs, the number of selectable backgrounds, and the selection by the player are made. The number of possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode) may be increased.

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is consumed, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume can be set, and the like. The brightness may be settable.

  Also, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is exhausted, for example, the user setting may be made clear, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do it.

  Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is consumed, for example, it is possible to end the look-ahead mode or the effect mode. Alternatively, the end of the prefetch mode or the end of the effect mode may be confirmed before the end.

  In addition, for example, points-acquiring items and level-up gift items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points may be gifted or the level may be increased. You can

  Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and, for example, when the lord's icon is consumed, the lord's VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Further, for example, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is exhausted, the icon of "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the island simultaneous production when it is consumed. For example, the countdown to the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production is started may be displayed, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized by the store when it is consumed. For example, even if it is possible to set a setting for producing an effect associated with the area of the installed game shop (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game shop. Good. For example, depending on the setting, a group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) can be different from a group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Sachihoko group). There are cases.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the tutorial display is started when it is consumed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the roulette effect is started when it is consumed. In the roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variable display is given, and the like are displayed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is consumed.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in stages, and FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to the notice item. Is.

  FIG. 60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure holding lamp 218, and a second special figure holding lamp 220. It should be noted that the universal figure display device 210, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60(a), the reserved icon display area 281A of special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of special figure 2 are adjacent to each other below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 60A, the number of reservations is 0 in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. Although the notice icons are displayed in the left-justified manner in the notice icon display area 285A, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In FIG. 60(b), a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230 is shown. In the hold icon display area 281A of special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side in the left alignment. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 60(c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of Toku-zu 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. This hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 60(d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 60(e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. It That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, the princess character HI accompanied by the balloons of "Atari" and "Question mark" is displayed. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60(g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which means that the result is out of alignment. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, so at the timing shown in FIG. 60(h), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is started. It In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the notice icon Will not be digested and the notice icon will not be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, it is possible not to display the notice icon and increase the display, or to display the notice icon and increase the display. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, or any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60(i), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the variable display of symbols of special figure 2 is out of alignment. ..

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60(j), after the suspended variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is consumed and the "Atari" and "Question mark" are displayed. A lord's character YI appears with a balloon of character notation. The appearance of the lord's character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Further, in FIG. 60(j), the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed. Here, the timing of additionally displaying the notice icon Id of the evil officer may be before or after the display display of the notice icon It of the lord is started, or at the same time. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess and the notice icon of the evil officer are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil protagonist character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol. Further, the timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the evil proxy character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 60(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. , It is reported that the big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table relating to the notice icon for determining whether to execute the increase display and the exhaustion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the pending of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 50/50 chance of displaying the increase of the lord's notice icon, a 3/50 chance of increasing the princess notice icon, and a 2/50 chance of increasing the evil substitute notice icon. .. On the other hand, 40/50 has a probability of executing the notice display of the Lord's notice icon, 35/50 has a probability of executing the princess notice icon, and has a probability of 25/50 the evil prominent notice icon. Perform the digest display of. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the exhaustion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or when the digest display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

  Further, when the result of the big hit determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of alignment, as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. 1, when the symbol variation display of the big hit is suspended Has a 3/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Princess notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the evil prominent notice icon. Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 10/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 15/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61(B), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1 , With a probability of 25/50, increase the notice icon of Tonosama, with a probability of 20/50, increase the notice icon of Hime, and with a probability of 7/50, increase the notice icon of evil officer. Run. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 probability that the Lord's notice icon will be consumed and displayed, a 15/50 probability that the Princess notice icon will be consumed, and a 5/50 probability that the evil representative notice icon will be displayed. Perform the digest display of. In addition, for example, in a normal game state (non-electric power support state), in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win the second special figure starting port 232, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, It is also possible not to increase the display of the notice icon of No. and not display the notice of any notice icon.

  Further, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of special figure 1, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons. Not performed, and the notice display is not performed for any of the notice icons.

  Note that, for example, when the electric power support state is terminated and one or more suspensions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 are left, the notice icon is not displayed as a prefetch notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, the notice display may be increased and the display may be reduced in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 74.

  62 to 74 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 62 to 74, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 62 to 74 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are combined as the effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 74, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 62 to 72 and 74, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 62: is a figure which shows step by step the other example of the notice icon increase production|generation and digestion production which can be applied to this embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 62 stepwise. Is.

  As shown in FIG. 62(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, various information regarding games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62(a), "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the lord's character is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when the stage moves to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display rather than a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not so hot compared with the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 62(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

  In addition, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. In addition, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(b), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pong" to notify that the prefetching notice is displayed by the hold display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62D, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character sets a bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that, when thrown by the lord's character, has various effects on the effect. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed as an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing or may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, there is an animation related to the notice icon with high jackpot expectation when digested (high expectation notice icon) and an animation related to the notice icon with lower expectation of jackpot when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The animation display modes may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62(f), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. In this way, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation display may be displayed in one symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62(i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice to shift to the swordsman reach, as described later. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(k), the character's character throws the bomb icon I61. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize that it is more difficult to visually recognize than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1. To put it another way, by making the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it is easy for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future.
The position of the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged not only at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 but also at a position near the tutorial display section TT1. Sometimes you can get. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content not related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at all. The content may be the content related to the current performance, or the content not related to the current performance. In FIG. 62(j), although the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed. Although it is not displayed in connection with, but is related to the content of the explanation by chance, the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 is digested in the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, as described later. Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be exhausted in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is resolved before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. It should be noted that, in this production example, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display section ST1.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(l), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 62(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "the notice icon is exhausted..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the lord's character and the panda character is explained. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started with the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. If the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 is earlier than the timing at which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanatory displays in one symbol variable display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62(m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 62(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro moves..." It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb operate.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62(n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62(n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62(o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. To be done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be consumed. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player long for the notice icon to be used soon. At this time, the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be able to be focused on.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 62(q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 may be resolved, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 63(a) subsequent to FIG. 62(q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed. That is, in this example of performance, the development of the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63(c) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63(c), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may frame out after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may frame out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are erased at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

  In FIG. 63(d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63(e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation accepting state. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(f), as shown in FIG. 63(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with "Iku". The cut-in image to which the character display of "ze" is added is displayed over the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(h), the protagonist's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 63(i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The combination of decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first decorative pattern displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative pattern display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 63(j). -Decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the off is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon for displaying a lost image and then performing a revival (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) is stocked, the background display is changed from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is a normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  64: is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the notice icon increase production|generation and digestion production which can be applied to this embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 64 in stages. Is. Since FIGS. 64(a) to 64(l) are the same as FIGS. 62(a) to 62(l), the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 64(m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64(m), the notice icon pattern CS (may be referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". When this notice icon pattern CS is displayed in a derived manner, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon design CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon design CS may include an image (including the enlarged/reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of increasing the chance, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the pattern may be any noticeable display of the notice icon. In addition, there may be some that do not correspond, such as the notice icon design CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be larger or smaller than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of the notice icon displayed at the moment of the animation related to the lord's character (for example, throwing animation) is the notice displayed at the moment of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A certain notice icon may be displayed as both a design and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two triggers, and two fluctuations may be stocked at different triggers with one change, or may not be displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. The variable icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves...".

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64(n), the chance up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon design CS, and FIG. ), it is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and arranged (stock). Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, there is no particular notification by voice output. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chances of being stocked is derived by deriving the advance notice icon design CS, but it is also possible to give a notification by voice. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 by using the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. In addition, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have different triggers for stocking. Therefore, the contents of the production until stocking differ from each other.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64(p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 64(q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64(q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(a) following FIG. 64(q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. 65(b). At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. In some cases, it can be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this production example, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is consumed, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is on the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and in some cases, the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63 can also draw attention.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65( d ), the first decorative symbol display device 208</b>L gives a display notifying that the swordsman reach will be developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65(e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested by the time the super-reach (swordsman reach) transitioned, and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65(e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative pattern display device, it is possible to avoid the overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player, In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easily visible.

  FIG. 65(f) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65(f), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward, but the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is not affected by it and the display position is changed. Not changed.

  In FIG. 65(g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65(h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts oscillating, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the advance icon I63 of the chance up.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65(i), as shown in FIG. 65(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the “up The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display of “ze” is added is displayed in an overlapping manner on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swaying chance advance notice icon I63 moves upward and is shown to be digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65(l), the second cut-in image in which the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed in an overlapping manner on the first cut-in image because the angle of the lord's face is different, and the big hit occurs. It has been announced that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image for display. May be. When another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the second cut-in image may overlap the notice icon that is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. In the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. Further, in this example of performance, the notice icon overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but is displayed when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. However, they do not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed, and may overlap with another image at one trigger, but may not overlap with another image at one trigger. You can When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for the promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 65(h), the notice icon is consumed and disappeared before the start of the cut-in display which is another promotion target. It may or may not disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(m), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 65(n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative patterns is derived and the fluctuation of the swing is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 65(o). -Decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so that the displayed notice icon is conveyed to the stock position. It shows how they are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 66(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 66(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 66(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there is a case where an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is displayed as "Due to announcement of notice icon...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and a state in which the bomb icon I61 jumps out downward is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Due to the announcement of the notice icon..." to "Swordsman is your nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or may be the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or may be at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66(a3), the bomb icon I6 that pops out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. This burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66(a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" to notify that effect, indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66(a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 66(a6), a state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66(a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66(b1) to 66(b8), another example of the notice icon increasing effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 66(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In addition, in this example of production, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the explanation display "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 66(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be displayed. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 66(b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and a state in which the bomb icon I61 jumps out upward is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66(b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR is changed to a magnified swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(b4). Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "PAKINE" for notifying that, and notifies that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of voice output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or more than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, the timing later than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure box image TR is deleted, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66(b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66(b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is heading toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 66(b6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Even after that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66(b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player is The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66(b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 66(b5′), for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b5′), the heights of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at least the first decorative symbol display device. When the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide movement is performed with, it may be possible to see the effect by the third decorative symbol display device 208N while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 66, when the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1, after sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the notice icon is displayed as the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be overlapped with each other, and an effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

  As shown in FIG. 67(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 67(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 67(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 67(a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 67(a3). The tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at a timing, and "Torama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 at a timing shown in FIG. 67(a4).

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67(a5) to (a6), and the first decorative pattern. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation for frame-out starts, may be deleted at the timing when the animation for frame-out starts, or frame-out. It may be deleted at a timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 67(a7), for example, after the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the same manner as shown in FIG. 62(e) to FIG. 62(j) and then shown in FIG. 67(a8). As shown, the dropping animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67(a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is restarted from below the right side frame of the display screen, and then, in FIG. 67(a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67(a11), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the explanation display "Due to the completion of the notice icon...", but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, which makes it difficult to visually recognize.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display section TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(a12), the tutorial display section by the swordsman's notice icon I62. The overlap condition with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Further, also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 67(b1) to FIG. 67(b2), even if the notice icon is consumed and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapped state on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 67(b1) to FIG. 67(b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 62(p) to 62(q), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 68, in addition to the tutorial display on the tutorial display unit TT1, the tutorial display is also shown in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 68(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68(a1) displays that "Tonosama is a Yatsushiro shogun". In this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon CH TT2 as a second tutorial display section (explanation display section) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (explanation display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(a1), the balloon section TT2 displays the explanation that “gold is hotter than red”, and the explanation about the advance notice to be given in the pachinko machine 100 is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The blowing portion TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern in some cases, but may be arranged at a position where they do not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed in the balloon section TT2 or the balloon section TT3 described later. Further, the same display as the display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a character font larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The fonts may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is configured not to overlap in the display area for performing other description display, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than that in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 68(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb. Are arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibihime character CH. Also, the decorative pattern is still in variable display. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. The balloon section TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result is out of alignment. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". The tutorial display section TT1 still displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68(a4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68(a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(a5), an explanation display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon portion TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing at which the throwing animation is started, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. It may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a6), a state in which the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 68(a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon GTT1 and the balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) are displayed on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when the conversation effect (or the dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(a6), the explanation display "When the panda rushes in" is displayed in the balloon unit TT3, and the notice effect is explained. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position that does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. The conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a7), the bomb icon I61 is at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the front surface side of the balloon section TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the front surface side of the balloon section TT3. The timing may be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the front surface side of the blowing portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech bubble section TT2 and speech bubble section TT3) is overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68(a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with the plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

  68(a1) to FIG. 68(a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed in the balloon (the balloon section TT2 and the balloon section TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is changed to red), and the word "intense heat" is displayed. In some cases, such as displaying, the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  68(c1) to 68(c3) show another example of the contents displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68(c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has started rocking. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68(c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of lord's master" to "Development into swordsman reach", and an explanation display of the phenomenon that will occur (live commentary) Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 68(c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  It should be noted that, in the above-described production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of performing an explanation display of the production, but for example, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. While changing (for example, making the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 red) and displaying the character "intense heat", a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed. Good.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 69, it is shown that the UI unit is displayed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L with the variable icon display region, the hold icon display region, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 being integrated. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone.

  As shown in FIG. 69(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 69(a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI section, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on a frame formed by the UI section. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 69(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Note that the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69(a1) displays "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...", and the stage name display section ST2 displays "Castle town stage". It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor symbol. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon (third hold icon h13) of the special figure 1 in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 69(a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 69(a4), the throwing animation is performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is similar to the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62(e) to 62(k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69(a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character ruptures, the blasted bomb icon I61 changes to a princess's notice icon I64, which is displayed in reduced size and moves to the stage name display portion ST2. 69(a5), although it overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 at the timing shown in FIG. 69(a5), it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, since the princess' notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon design CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is erased based on the opportunity of acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display being erased before overlapping the stage name display portion ST2. May be erased at different timings. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may not pass through the stage name display portion ST2 and the notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, in the case of a gasse pattern, the explanation display is not erased. In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. In the case where the UI part is hidden during the darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gaze are executed when the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, when the blackout effect starts after the bomb icon I61 throwing animation is started and the blackout effect ends and the UI unit is redisplayed, a notice is given. The icon may be acquired (a state in which the explanation display is disappeared from a state in which the explanation display is displayed), in which case at least one of sound and lamp effect is performed. It may be in a state of being performed, or in a state of not performing both.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display of “Stage” is deleted, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed above the stage name display portion ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Note that the scene in which the notice icon is consumed and the execution of the above-described darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or configured to overlap with at least a part of the previously-obtained notice icons (at least one of the plurality of notice icons, the whole notice icon, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. Further, the movable means is moved so as to move during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the bombing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 69(a7), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69(a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69(a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 69(a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is displayed. No display is made. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed for a predetermined time on the stage name display portion ST2, and then the stage name may be erased and the notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69(a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 69(a9), first, the stage name display portion ST2 is stocked with the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, and then the tutorial display portion. In TT4, a swordsman's notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In addition, in the example of the effect, for example, when the notice icons are consumed from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the consumed notice icons may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69(a9), when the princess's notice icon I64 is exhausted, the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the chance up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved instantaneously so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

  Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are exhausted, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4 and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are consumed. In this case, the display of the stage name is restarted on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display and the display of the stage name may not be restarted. The restart of the explanation display may be restarted within the same variable display as the symbol variable display in which the notice icon has been exhausted (for example, restarting after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is restarted, the exact same display may be restarted, or the telop type (scroll type) display may be resumed from a different part.

  Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is consumed, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  The execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be changed to hold. It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the number of stocked icons is three, the notice icon to be stocked afterwards is displayed in the tutorial display section. It is configured that up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, but when the number of stocks is initially 3 in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured such that up to three can be stocked.

  In addition, in this example of performance, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4. In the (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely set in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting the upward movement when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, and immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display is displayed. You may not be allowed to.

  Further, in this example of production, the above-mentioned thing shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is also possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be consumed, such as a variable icon display area.

  In addition, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are consumed, and for example, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in a toothless manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to fill the empty space. You don't have to move.

  In addition, a so-called MAX8 machine (8 which can be assigned to the first special prize winning opening and the second special prize winning opening per starting opening and can hold eight symbol variation displays in a normal gaming state (8 (Although it may be called a maintenance order machine), the hold icon display area has a display area for four reservations in advance, and when there are four reservations, the display area expands to five. It may be enlarged or expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display portion ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 69(b1) to FIG. 69(b2) show a situation where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 69(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being variably displayed.

  Then, after that, at the timing when the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is consumed, as shown in FIG. 68(b2), the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is moving upward. In this example of performance, even when the chance-up notice icon I63 is moved from the display position in the stage name display portion ST2, at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2, an explanation is displayed. The display of stage names has not resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the advance notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display portion ST2.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 70(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70(a1) displays “Due to the announcement of the notice icon... ”. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 70(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  FIG. 70(a1) to FIG. 70(a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70(a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. Note that the display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 62(a), so description will be omitted.

  FIG. 70(a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. Note that the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage shown in FIG. 62 and described above. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70(a2), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage, and in the default display mode, for example, The white pentagonal display mode, and the look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70(a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Is becoming In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is master of master" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display region TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice icon does not overlap the tutorial display region TT1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70(a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70(a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation display is performed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 70(a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. Note that the explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), if the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  70(b1) to 70(b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, and when the notice icon is stocked, the tutorial display area TT1 is erased. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 70(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 70(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 70(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and it is displayed as "Due to the end of notice icon...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the third The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked, and, for example, is an icon that gives advance notice of the number of times the effect of operating a button during a particular effect is generated, and for example, the number of times of the button operation effect is high. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the big hit is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the easier it is to win the big hit.

  In this way, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that another display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 71, another example of effect using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is shown.

  FIGS. 71(a1) to 71(a6) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 71(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch notice display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71(a1) displays that "Dono is the Yatsushiro Shogun". Further, as shown in FIG. 71(a1), the notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stock) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called gasse. May also function as a notice icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 71(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 71(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(a3), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to Swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 71(a6), what was displayed as "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." is changed to "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or may be changed from the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. May be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change production of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 71(b1) to 71(b3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. 71(b1) is the same as FIG. 71(a4), and FIG. 71(b3) is the same as FIG. 71(a6), and therefore description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display portion TT1 in FIG. 71(b3), "Due to announcement of notice icon..." is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71(b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71(b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front surface of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display portion TT1 are difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71(a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change production of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 71(c1) to 71(c3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. 71(c1) is the same as FIG. 71(b1) and FIG. 71(c2) is the same as FIG. 71(b2), and therefore description of these drawings will be omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 71(c2), as shown in FIG. 71(c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 informs the swordsman. The icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have changed. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the production of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking the new notice icon.

  71(d1) to 71(d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71(d1) is the same as FIG. 71(a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71(d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71(d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character becomes a second hold icon h12 which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second holding icon h12, and at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )is doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 72(a1) to FIG. 72(a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and by displaying that fact, notification that the mission has been achieved is shown. Since FIG. 72(a1) to FIG. 72(a3) are the same as FIG. 62(h) to FIG. 62(j), a description of these drawings will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 72(a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72(a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 72(a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, above the tutorial display section TT1, there is an achievement display section KM1 as an explanation display section for notifying that a specific effect has been performed. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Swordsman Stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when the mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, and if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed in the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 may be displayed to explicitly notify that the swordsman's notification icon I62 for predicting that a performance with a high expectation for a big hit will be performed. Good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, the timing before the end of the throwing animation, or the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, the achievement display section KM1 may be noticeable in some cases. The stocked notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap the achievement display section KM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". The variable icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72(a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 indicating a chance up from the notice icon design CS is displayed. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72(a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1 difficult to see.

  In this example of performance, if the display position of the notice icon is preset depending on the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display section KM1 is determined according to the type of the notice icon to be consumed. May be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the notice icons are exhausted to move the remaining notice icons so that they are arranged at predetermined intervals, among the notice icons, When the predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display portion KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 72(b1) to FIG. 72(b3), for example, an example of an operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operates when developing into a super reach or when a big hit occurs It is shown.

  FIG. 72(b1) shows a state in which super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of super reach is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. . As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than that when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of special diagrams 1 and 2 and the special symbols 1 and 2 of FIG. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 72(b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, it may be possible to focus on the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72(b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. In addition, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end portion of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. The image in which the character "Holiday" is given in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display portion 208N, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 72(b3), the family crest accessory 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The 8th character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L are moved downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro Actor 224Fa or the general officer 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to focus the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 72(c1) to FIG. 72(c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. It is shown that the state is notified.

  FIG. 72(c1) shows the animation of the duel scene in Swordsman Reach. FIG. 72(c1) corresponds to FIG. 63(d), but the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period of time. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 72(c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 72(c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button reception time meter and the button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the player to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation acceptance state is set.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 72(c3), as shown in FIG. 72(c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with "Iku". The cut-in image to which the character display of "ze" is added is displayed over the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this example of performance, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) is enabled, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72D shows an example of the notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-reminder icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, pending promotion notice icon I67, chance chance notice icon I68. , Panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that gives a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode having a higher degree of reliability with respect to the big hit when it is consumed. Further, the pseudo-reminder icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-representation will be performed when it is consumed. In addition, the notice icon I68 of the chance eye is an icon that gives a notice that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when it is consumed. In addition, the princess's notice icon is an icon for notifying that the player will move to the look-ahead zone when digested. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for notifying that, when digested, an effect that pandas intrude is performed, and that a big hit (win) is surely made.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIG. 73(a1) to FIG. 73(a7) show that the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” display) displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scroll-displayed. The left side of the tutorial display area TT1 shown in FIG. 73 is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  FIG. 73(a1) shows a state before the scroll display of the explanation display is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73(a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73(a2), only the "Swordsman is" portion is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73(a3), only the "Swordsman is your lord" portion is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since neither character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable in some cases.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73(a4), the entire text "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In this case, at least a part of the character “Swordsman” is overlapped with the notification icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 73(a5), the "Swordsman" part scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the "I'm Lord's nemesis" part is displayed in the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of "Denso-sama" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 73(a6), the "Swordsman is the Lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the "Nemesis" section is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the character "I'm a nemesis" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, when the timing shown in FIG. 73(a7) comes, the scroll of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this example of performance, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are continuously changed by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the notice display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the scroll of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIGS. 73(b1) to 73(b7) show that while the scrolling display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis”) is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, A state in which a display (for example, a notice display of "intense heat") is performed is shown. 73(b1) to FIG. 73(b3), FIG. 73(b6) to FIG. 73(b7), and FIG. 73(a1) to FIG. 73(a3) and FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (a7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73(b3), the preview display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 as shown in FIGS. 73(b4) to 73(b5). As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "intense heat" is displayed, thereby performing the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to visually recognize, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 73(b6), the scroll display of the explanation display restarts. The scroll display of the explanation display is proceeding in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the explanation display is restarted is the display after proceeding in the background. It is a mode. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is restarted may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73(b7) comes, the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display is described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 73(c1) to FIG. 73(c5) show the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when multiple notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as part of the notice icons are exhausted.

  In FIG. 73(c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the notice icon to be first digested, and the swordsman's notice icon I62, which is the notice icon to be secondly digested, are the notice-up icon I63. , Which are arranged side by side on the right side of, and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is shown overlapping on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c2), when the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is consumed, as shown in FIGS. 73(c3) to (c5), the notice icon I62 for the swordsman increases the chance. The notice icon moving animation of moving to the position where the notice icon I63 of 6 is displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easy to see. May be. That is, in this example of performance, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display section TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap with each other.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 74, when the notice icon is stocked, the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In this UI unit UI1, a hold icon display area in which four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are displayed in the substantially square display frame on the upper right side. The notice icon display area that can be displayed in is displayed in the upper right, and the tutorial display area TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 and at a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 74(a), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 74(a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed. Further, in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 74(a), two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 are stocked, and both of them are in the normal display mode (in this effect example, the "first display mode"). In some cases.) is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon in the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located apart from the display area of the decorative design, it is not overlapped with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also included. Do not overlap. The notice icon in the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 74(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. It should be noted that this button image 136a may be always displayed or may be displayed for a period of time. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor symbol. 224Fb is arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 74(b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(c), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(d), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the display frame where the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and explodes. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 bursts overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed frame is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, a notice is given that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 74(e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 or the display frame of the suspended display area where the bomb icon I61 bursts. When the display frame and the notice icon are stocked in this display frame, they overlap the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(f), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode changes to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and the tutorial display unit TT5 are difficult to be visually recognized together with the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be in a non-display state, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI portion UI1 and make at least a part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display portion TT5 visible, or the notice icon display area. It may be difficult to see only.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(g), the notice icon enlargement animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI portion UI1 is the flame effect. A state of appearing from inside EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. A swordsman's notice icon I62 is newly displayed in the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is , Are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This may allow the player to easily recognize that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is further enlarged and displayed to display the first notice. Part of the left side of the display frame where the icons are stocked and part of the right side of the display frame where the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-announcement icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to visually recognize. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, it may be easier to understand that the notice icon is stocked. In other words, it can be said that the enlarged and displayed notice icon may overlap the decorative pattern. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, in this example of performance, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, notice display) (overlap). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon in which the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed is stocked is displayed at approximately the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman notice icon I62 and the already-stocked pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display mode (in this rendering example, the “first Second display mode"). At this time, part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are , Each of which is displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. In other words, it can be said that a part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 that has already been stocked can be visually recognized in a state where the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. Since the entire display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-reminder icon I65 that is present is hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(j), the notice icon reduction animation is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and at the position where the notice icon display area formed in the UI portion UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed and is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked becomes part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo link displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this effect example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of visible notice icons is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced and at the position where the notice icon display area formed in the UI portion UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 and All swordsman notice icons I62) are visible. That is, it can be said that the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, but all of them are visible.

  Then, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 74(l). That is, as shown in FIG. 74(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 overlapping the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. , The UI unit UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in the notice icon display area, in addition to the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, a state in which a swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked is shown. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Panda is the master of the lord". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be deleted after the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, or the notice icon display frame YF may be deleted after the flame effect EF1 is deleted. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be deleted at the same time. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be performed before the flame effect EF1 is erased, or after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT5 may not be changed. Further, the variable icon or the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 74(k) and the timing shown in FIG. 74(l). In this case, it may be configured so that an increase in the number of holdings is reflected properly.

  It should be noted that, in this example of performance, a case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described, but for example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-mentioned notice icon expansion animation is finished, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon that is difficult to view does not occur.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. However, for example, the flame effect EF1 is displayed. 74(i), the preview icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 74(i) without performing the preview icon enlargement animation. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74(l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. You may make it displayed.

  Further, in this effect example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduction animation after being enlarged and displayed, but, for example, the notice icon is consumed in the enlarged display state. There may be a case, and in this case, the notice icon may be consumed without being displayed in the normal display mode.

  Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to enlarge the notice icon that has been stocked. The notice icon to be consumed may be displayed after being enlarged (displayed in the second display mode), or may be enlarged when displayed (displayed in the second display mode). You may do it.

  Further, in this example of performance, some of the notice icon expansion animations performed when the notice icons are stocked may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character, etc.), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part is canceled (for example, the second half part). May be canceled), or, for example, in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo continuous symbol, it may not be canceled.

  Also, the enlarged display mode may be different depending on the number of the notice icons already stocked or the number of the notice icons stocked. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the number of holdings increases while the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting port) blinks, and the effect sound is output. And so on. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increasing the number of holdings to be pre-read at the time of winning the start prize. Further, even if the notice icon is enlarged and the number of holdings is increased, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting opening) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. It is possible that the display mode of the hold icon is changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is finished without performing the above, and by doing so, the player becomes aware of the change of the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be easier.

  Further, when the notice icon is enlarged, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged. In this case, the hold increase animation may not be performed if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon.

  Further, in the above description, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ren” etc.), it may be referred to as a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. Here, FIG. 75 is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 75(a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protection member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and has a rib RB formed at the upper end thereof, and is provided so as to protrude forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. By this rib RB, the game ball jumping into the stage 244 is prevented from jumping over the transparent protection member CL and deviating backward, and the decorative symbol display device 208, or between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a problem from being caused by a collision with the effect movable body or the like arranged in.

  FIG. 75(a-2) shows that the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 75(a-1) is applied and effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 75, a family crest accessory 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208, and is located between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL. It can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 75(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed as a square with a rectangular display. It is displayed in a state of being accommodated in the frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 75(a-2), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode and is displayed in blinking. It is a display mode of a notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 75(a-2) is in a non-display state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(a-2), the Chibihime character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the grandfather character GY1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon TT3 is displayed. A speech line "Where is my grandfather" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT2, and a speech phrase "here" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT3. The balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is not overlapped. Further, a part of the UI portion (the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11, h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the Chibihime character CH1 overlap the transparent protection member CL and are transparent. The visibility may be reduced as compared with the case where the protection member CL does not overlap.

  In FIG. 75(a-3), the state in which the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 has its range enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 75(a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75(a-4), the family crest monument 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlap state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(a-4), the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction in the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. Has been done. Note that the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an extended manner and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it does not overlap the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an extended manner. Since the balloon section TT3 is displayed above the reserved display frame FL1, it does not overlap. Further, the decorative pattern in the variable display is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part of the decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the pending display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the pending display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 75(b-1) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 75(a-2), and FIG. 75(b-1a) shows the section AA of FIG. 75(b-1). The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 75(b-1a), between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL, other than the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E, the size of the decorative pattern display device 208 is approximately the same as that of the decorative pattern display device 208. A light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side (that is, the player side) of the family crest monument 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 75(b-1), the family crest monument 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, part of the decorative pattern display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part is viewed through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. Note that the configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 51, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 75(b-2) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 75(a-3), and FIG. 75(b-2a) shows the BB cross section of FIG. 75(b-2). The situation is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 75(b-2a), the family crest actor 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest actor 224E has the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative pattern display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not interposed.

  FIG. 75(b-3) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 75(a-4), and FIG. 75(b-3a) shows a section taken along the line CC of FIG. 75(b-3). The situation is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 75(b-3a), since the family crest actor 224E has moved to the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the player has the family crest actor 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. As compared with the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  75(c-1) and FIG. 75(c-2) are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 75(c-1), the hold display frame FL1 described above is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 75(c-2), the upwardly expanded portion (expanded portion) of the reserved display frame FL1 is the second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged in the layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the pending display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in each of the two layers forming the reserved display frame FL1, and, for example, a serif notice, a decorative design, or a notice display (for example, an arrow fly display). ), etc. can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that the parts do not extend over two or more layers and are configured as one image data. You can

  The display mode of the UI unit may be configured differently depending on the effect stage and the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage etc.”) corresponding to each game state, or may be common.

  Further, at least a part of the effect stage or the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may be changed according to the progress of the game (for example, every number of changes). Good.

  In addition, the operation of "the extended display of the hold display frame FL1", which is a characteristic operation of the present invention, is at least a part of the production stage (for example, the production stage in the non-electric support state, or the design. It may be performed on a part of the production stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being changed, or may be performed on all the production stages or the like.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 91.

  76 to 91 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 76 to 91, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 76 to 87, 89 and 91 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and are also slightly shorter in height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are combined as the effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 76 to 91, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of the light irradiation plate. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 76 to 87 and 89 to 91 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a hold change notice effect as a look-ahead notice effect using the hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 77 shows a stepwise continuation of the example effect shown in FIG. 76. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being accommodated in a rectangular hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal for the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 76(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is displayed, and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 76(a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the character of the Lord is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when the stage moves to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display rather than a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not so hot compared with the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 76(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. It should be noted that this button image 136a may be always displayed or may be displayed for a period. Also, the UI unit may be always displayed or may be displayed for a period. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

  Further, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the content of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the production movable bodies, are arranged, and can be moved vertically depending on the production contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(b), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 76(b).

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 76C, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode blinking in white). At this time, a voice output of "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice by the hold display has been given. The voice output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before the voice output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (description display part) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. Princess Chibi's character CH1 and speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 76(c), an explanation display "This fluctuation is..." is made in the balloon TT2, and a suggestion is given regarding the advance notice to be made in the pachinko machine 100. Although the blowing portion TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern, the blowing portion TT2 may be arranged at a position where it is not overlapped. Further, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon TT2 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, or the balloon TT2 may be displayed. After being displayed, the Chibihime character CH1 may be displayed. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of arrows are shown descending from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern in the variable display. In addition, the balloon section TT2 is changed to the explanation display "Maybe...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases. Further, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped with a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. The tutorial display section TT1 is hidden. The timing at which the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the display on the balloon section TT2 is changed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the left symbol is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6". The left symbol stopped and displayed in "decoration 6" is displayed so as to partially overlap the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. It should be noted that the plurality of arrows and the Chibihime character CH1 have been deleted. The timing at which the plurality of arrows are erased may be after the Chibi-hime character CH1 has been erased, before the Chibi-hime character CH1 is erased, or may be erased by the Chibi-hime character CH1. It may be the same timing as the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2", a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is combined. After the shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, at the timing of the fixed stop display of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 may be deleted or may remain displayed. Further, it may be configured to be erased before the swinging fluctuation state of the decorative pattern is started.

  FIG. 77(a) shows a state in which the symbol stop display is being continued from FIG. 76(g).

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is stored in the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77(b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. The timing may be before the start of display. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (description display portion) is provided on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. It is displayed. The speech display "Where is the grandpa" is displayed on the balloon TT2, and the conversation announcement is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of arrows are shown again falling from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the display screen. In this way, the plurality of arrows may function as continuous notices that are continuously displayed in the symbol variation display a plurality of times. In addition, in this effect example, as in FIG. 76C, the Chibihime character CH1 is displayed, but another character may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when the conversation effect (or the dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 77(d), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display "here" is displayed in the balloon portion TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap the first decorative symbol. Further, the old character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon character TT3 may be displayed after the old character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136. The tutorial display section TT1 is hidden. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at a timing after the grandpa character GY1 is displayed, or at a timing before the grandpa character GY1 is displayed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(e), the state that the family crest monument 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. More specifically, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the balloon part TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the family crest actor 224E. It is shown to appear above. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 shows a portion that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the expanded reserved display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT2 and overlaps the balloon TT2, but does not overlap the balloon TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the dialogue display (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the pending display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expanded display mode. It should be noted that, in this effect example, although the figures of the pending display frame FL1 before expansion and the pending display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, the expanded animation also includes the expansion of the pending display frame FL1 step by step.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

  In FIG. 77(h), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the rear side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of the princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. . It can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 after the extension. In other words, it can be said that the Ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. The effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of a look-ahead notice or a change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ1) performed in the extended display frame FL1 after expansion, but can be said to be the effect performed outside the retained display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 77(i), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the shuriken SH1 facing the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 77(i), the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the region within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is large.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. As a result, the player may have an expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change and the reliability of the big hit may increase.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 77(k), it is shown that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E is changing from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is placed on the hold icon before the hold icon for hold, which is the target of prefetching, changes. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is again displayed in an easily visible manner. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 may be performed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in the same figure (a). An animation display (reduced animation) is performed to reduce the shape to the shape shown. A reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the pending display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. May be overlapped with each other and finally deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the start timing of each production such as the character CH1 of the princess Chibi, the character GY1 of the grandfather, the advance notice display of a plurality of arrows, the family crest part 224E, the decorative pattern variable display, the expansion operation of the hold display frame FL1 and the like. The end timing can be set in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, a ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1. However, an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display an image (corresponding to the changed hold icon) that reminds the changed hold icon.

  Next, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

  FIG. 77(i') corresponds to FIG. 77(i) and has the same effect contents as in FIG. 77(i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(j′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is held in the second hold. By passing through the icon, as shown in FIG. 77(k′), the shuriken SH1 is framed out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, thereby failing to change the display mode of the hold icon. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the mode of blinking in white.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. In FIG. 78, it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the decorative design in which the character display of “change” is displayed in the middle design is stopped and displayed. That is, it can be said that the decorative pattern of "change" is a display suggesting the effect contents.

  As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a reservation icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reservation icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 78(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white, and the prefetch notice display is displayed. It is displayed in a manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the swing is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 3-change-decoration 1" is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 78(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 78(b), the state in which the family crest accessory 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L is shown. At this time, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display section TT1, and a part of the middle pattern of "change". Covering. Note that the family crest monument 224E may not overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and is displayed above the family coat emblem 224E. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps the decorative pattern (the middle pattern of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative pattern (the middle pattern of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded pending display frame FL1. The extended display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

  In FIG. 78(e), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in the state where the display (decorative pattern of “change”) indicating the effect content is overlapped.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 78(f), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the shuriken SH1 facing the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 78(h) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, a reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, it becomes a state in which the overlap to the decorative pattern by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative pattern becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap in the decorative pattern by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  79 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 79 shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below. 79(a) to 79(n) are the same as FIGS. 77(a) to 77(n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of frame-in and frame-out. Only the part will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 77A to 77N will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 79(b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the frame-in (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, At the timing shown in FIG. 79(c), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the text display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. The timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. May be Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the character display of "Panda is Master of the Lord" in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the frameout animation (frameout animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 79(f) (for example, It is continuously displayed for 5 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79(e), when the family crest part 224E rises and overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed. It may be overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 79(f) to 79(h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation for frame-out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases. The start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or may be the timing before the start of the extended animation. The timing may be after the start. In this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display section TT1 is similar to the extended reserved display frame FL1 (may be an example of the first extended display in this example of performance) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative pattern, but the dialogue is It can be said that they are different in that they do not overlap the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, that they do not overlap frequently.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 77. In FIG. 80, after the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation and is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is again framed in and the preview display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. 80(a) to 80(n), except that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the preview display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. (A) to (n) of FIG. 79, only different parts will be described, and description of contents similar to those of (a) to (n) of FIG. 79 will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 80(a) to 80(h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 80(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is restarted, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 80(j), and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the characters “pseudo-link”. The display is displayed. That is, a display indicating that the pseudo-link may be performed is displayed. That is, in the tutorial display section TT1, not only the tutorial display but also the notice display can be displayed. It should be noted that the character display of "pseudo-relation" may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The timing of completion of the frame-in animation on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be present, or may be the same timing as when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIGS. 80(j) to 80(n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the display time of the tutorial display section TT1 is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same, Alternatively, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to have a longer display time when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. As described above, in this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a pattern of success or failure are displayed, and when a success pattern of the mini-games is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that gives a change to other effect display such as a hold change (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the variable icon, the stop of the pseudo-relational pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-repeation, the display mode of the dialogue notice) Changes (for example, blue lines or blue background lines changed to red lines or red worship lines), step-up of line announcement (for example, while character A's line announcement is displayed, then character B's lines are displayed) It may be configured to display a notice).

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 81 is, for example, executed after the effect display shown in FIG. 77 is performed, and the variable display of symbols based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 81(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a display mode of a pre-reading notice that is displayed in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed, and the explanation is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 81(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The family crest 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variable icon h0.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has high reliability for the big hit. .. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon. It may be difficult to visually recognize these displays as compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI part FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 is erased and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the timing of erasing the hold icon, or a timing after the timing of erasing the hold icon. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Although the variable icon h0 has not been deleted, the variable icon h0 may also be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 81(d) to 81(g), the UI section frames out by the UI section FO animation. In some cases, even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the emission color of the family crest part 224E. That is, as described above, it is displayed by performing the variable display of symbols based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display state of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1. It may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the hold icon even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is housed is hidden.

  FIG. 81(h) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 81(h), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed.

  After that, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the lord's character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 63(c) to 63(h) is performed, the first decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 81(i). In the pattern display device 208L, the main character is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is derived for both the first and second decorative symbols, and fluctuations in the shaking Is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 81(j) to 81(n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion is framed in from below the display screen is performed. Although the hold icon is re-displayed after the display of the UI section FI animation is completed, it may be displayed from the time when the display of the UI section FI animation is started, or it may be displayed again. It may be displayed upon completion. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(o), the first decorative pattern displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is a decoration of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, the family crest accessory 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased at the stop display. The timing at which the family crest monument 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same as the stop display of the decorative design, or may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative design, or the decoration. The timing may be after the stop display of the symbols. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases. Further, the variable icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode once before the stop display of the decorative pattern and then deleted, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative pattern. It may be erased after that, before the stop display of the decorative pattern, it may be erased without changing the display mode, or after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display mode is It may be erased without changing, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display of the decorative pattern.

  It should be noted that while the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is being displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after expansion/expansion/reduction may be displayed. The entire hold display frame FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  Further, it may be configured to display the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 during the super reach, and in the configuration, at each timing during the super reach (for example, cut-in of a friend character or cut-in of an enemy character). Display timing, or the display timing of the dialogue displayed in blue, the display timing of the dialogue displayed in red, and the like) may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. You may make it display one of the multiple types of display which shows.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 82(a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 and FIG. 82(b- 1C to FIG. 82C show that the display effect of the hold icon is changed while the notice icon is stocked. FIG. (c-6) shows a state in which an effect in which the display mode of the notice icon is changed is performed by an effect that is partially common to the change effect in the display mode of the hold icon.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 82(a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 77(g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omit it. As shown in FIG. 82(a-1), a part of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E and a part thereof is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. By comparison, it is difficult to see. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is used as an example of the notice icon, but it is also applicable to the case of displaying various notice icons shown in FIGS. 18 and 73(d), for example. Needless to say.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82(a-2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, in the notice icon BX of the treasure box, the portion not overlapping the family crest 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it.

  After that, in FIG. 82(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed and the display color may be changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 82(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the pattern variation display based on the hold. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by the notice icon BX of the treasure box.

  The example productions shown in FIGS. 82(b-1) to (b-6) are different from FIG. 77(g), except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed above the second hold icon h12. -Since it is the same as FIG. 1 (l), detailed description is omitted. The notice icon BX shown in FIG. 82(b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIG. 82(a-1) to FIG. 82(a-4), but may be another effect, for example. It may be displayed by (for example, an effect produced by stopping the chance symbol). Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 82(b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box or may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, for example, even if the treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 82(a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the treasure chest notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side or the back side.

  FIG. 82(b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps not only the second hold icon h12 but also the notice icon BX of the treasure box. As a result, it may not be known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  82(c-1) to FIG. 82(c-5) are similar to the effect examples shown in FIG. 82(b-1) to FIG. 82(b-5), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 82(c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the emission of the family crest actor 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the changed hold icon is changed. No change in aspect is observed. That is, it can be said that the change in the hold icon is not displayed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest monument 224E.

  FIG. 82(c-6) subsequent to FIG. 82(c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82(c-6), after the effect EF2 is erased, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes. In some cases, the player may be surprised at the production and further increase the expectation for the big hit, because the notice icon BX of the treasure box is changed not by the change of the display mode of the hold icon but by the promotion change. is there. The change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to the change in size, and for example, the shape may change, the color may change, or a combination thereof may change. .. As shown in FIG. 82(c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a voice notifying that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the voice output does not appear. You can

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 83(a-1) to (a-6), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icons other than the hold icons displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, blinking in white) 83(b-1) to FIG. 83(b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to display the hold icon. It is shown that the effect to be changed is performed, and in FIGS. 83(c-1) to (c-5), the effect of changing the display mode of all the hold icons being displayed is performed. Is shown.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 83(a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 77(g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 83(a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 83(a-1), which is followed by FIG. 83(a-2), it is shown that the family crest monument 224E is descending toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent to it instead of the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice.

  After that, in FIG. 83(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the third hold icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the third hold icon h13 explodes is displayed. Has been done. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13 and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains in the display mode of the prefetching notice (blinking in white).

  Thereafter, FIG. 83(a-5) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is given that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 83(a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared to the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a green lighting state. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 may be performed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the prefetching notice. According to this effect example, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12, instead of the second hold icon h12, is changed, so that the effect can be given a surprising effect and the second hold icon h13 can be displayed. It may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12. .. It should be noted that, although this example of effect has been described with respect to the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice, it may be performed for the first hold icon. However, if there is a fourth hold, it may be performed for the fourth hold icon h14.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 83(b-1) to (b-4), the extended character of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed instead of the ninja character BC1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the throwing object is also shown. 77(g) to FIG. 77(j), except that the point is changed. Therefore, only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 83(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the banquet character BC1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. Note that the bancho character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

  In FIG. 83(b-2), the state in which the family coat emblem 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the part of the buncho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the bancho character BC1 is throwing a qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown item. The qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of the princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. Good.

  After that, FIG. 83(b-3) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the qigong wave KK1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Is being done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different for the shuriken SH1 and the qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, the bancho character BC1 is erased from the reserved display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this example of performance, by displaying a character other than the ninja character NJ1, it may be possible to change the reliability of the big hit depending on the appearing character.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 83(c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 83(b-1) to FIG. 83(b-3) except for the above. Therefore, only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 83(c-3) followed by FIG. 83(c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of this effect EF3 informs that all of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are subject to change in display mode. This may give rise to the expectation that confidence may increase for all pending. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 83(c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. In addition, the effect produced by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the bancho character BC1 appears, and is not performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the banchou character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icons h11 to h3 are compared with the state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 of is displayed again easily and visually. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this performance example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that it is possible to give a surprising effect to the effect and In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be dramatically improved. This effect example may be performed, for example, when the hold is increased at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold is increased after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it to.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 84(a-1) to (a-5) show that the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIGS. 84(b-1) to (a-5). FIG. 84(c-1) to FIG. 84(c-4) show a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and a character related to the hold change notice effect appears in b-5). In the figure, it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is being performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 84(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77(g) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84(a-1) followed by FIG. 84(a-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the reserved display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E and is easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT3, and the display of the balloon TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it does not overlap the balloon TT3. In addition, the family crest 224E is descending toward the initial position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 84(a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing three shurikens SH1. All of these three shurikens SH1 are moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 84(a-3), the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes. The display is being done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the lord. At this time, the speaker 120 may output a notification sound that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at this time, the light emission mode of the family crest monument 224E has not changed, but may change. As described above, in this effect example, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward and part of the effect content is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 77. The effect contents may be the same even if the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation for the big hit depending on the amount of change in the hold display frame FL1.

  The extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 84(a-3′), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Good. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 in the vertical direction may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 77(g), and the extension range in the width direction may be set to a range overlapping with the hold icon of the prefetch target. Further, when the third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the third hold icon may be expanded in the width direction to at least a part thereof. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be overlapped with the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 84(b-1), the family crest monument 224E rises from the initial position and the pending display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the pending display frame FL1, but the character does not appear in the expanded portion, and thereafter, It is shown that the family crest monument 224E has moved to the initial position. Since the other effect contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 77(g), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the opening operation of raising the background of the hold display frame FL1 like a shutter is started, and the back side of the background is visually recognized. It is shown that various forms of display are being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84(b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the reserved display frame FL1 is in a fully open state, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 in which the background is in a fully opened state, and to change the color depending on the degree of expectation of a change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 84(b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 may be started after the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing of the background of the hold display frame FL1 being fully opened. Alternatively, the timing may be before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done. At this time, the closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the display of the effect EF2 or the same as the display of the effect EF2. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  The example production shown in FIG. 84(c-1) is the same as FIG. 77(i) except that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken toward the variable icon h0. A detailed description will be given, and a description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84(c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1 toward the variable icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variable icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the variable icon h0 explodes is displayed. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variable icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. The second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetching notice. This may change the display mode of the variation icon h0 and increase the reliability of the big hit for the variation while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  After that, in FIG. 84(c-3), it is shown that the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that a notice is given that the display color of the variable icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest product 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is changed to the change icon before the notice that the change icon display mode is changed is given. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the variable icon h0 is displayed again easily in a visible manner. At this time, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a green lighting state. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the voice output, or the display of the variable icon h0 may be changed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 85 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is framed out of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 85(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. The hold icon display area is displayed in a housed manner, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 85(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon portion TT2, which suggests that a UI portion FO animation in which the UI portion including the pending display frame FL1 is framed out, which will be described later, is performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 85(a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden due to a frame-out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 85(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state in which a lord's character is riding on the stage is shown, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and special symbols of special maps 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

  FIG. 85(b) shows a state where the UI section FO animation is performed and the UI section is framed out below the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. This UI part FO animation is performed, for example, in the case of transition to darkness production or SP reach.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 85(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Is being done. That is, in this effect example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 85(c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative pattern and also overlaps the blowing portion TT2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position at which the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the explosion effect EF2 is displayed. There is.

  Thereafter, FIG. 85(e) shows a state in which the emission color of the crest product 224E changes from white to green. That is, the advance notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, but the UI part is still in the frame-out state, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 85(g) shows a state in which an animation (UI section FI animation) in which the UI section is framed in is performed and the UI section FI animation is completed. When the UI section FI animation is completed, the UI section is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this example of effect, the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 is framed out, and during this time, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, FIG. 85(a′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI portion may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 85(a') is the same as that in FIG. 85(a), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 85( a ′), which follows FIG. 85( a ′), the UI part FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85(b'), in this example of performance, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is not framed out and is displayed. Is maintained.

  In FIG. 85(c'), an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 85(c'), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The performance is being thrown towards the position where it was. That is, in this effect example, even if the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 86(a-1) to (a-7) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are being performed at the same time. FIG. 86(b-1) to FIG. 86(b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetching notice.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 86(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77(f) and described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86(a-1) followed by FIG. 86(a-2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and it is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1 as compared with a state in which the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

  Further, in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, a state in which the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started and the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 86(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice.

  On the other hand, in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, the appearance that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. The timing of starting the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be the same as the timing of starting the throwing of the shuriken SH1 by the ninja character NJ1, or the timing before starting the throwing of the shuriken SH1. The timing may be after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 86(a-4), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the shuriken SH1 facing the second hold icon h12.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the first decorative symbol and also with the old character GY1 and the balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character is ruptured. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. May be the timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 86(a-6), a notice is given that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(a-6), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 to give notice that the swordsman reach will be reached. Here, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 may output a sound notifying that effect. Further, the timing at which the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the emission color of the family crest actor 224E changes to green, or before the emission color of the family crest actor 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, the timing may be always set to one of the timings, or the timing may be different in some cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86(a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display section TT1 while being reduced in size, and thereafter, the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character. Ends the throwing animation. It should be noted that it may be notified by voice output that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been placed in the tutorial display section TT1. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, compared to the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not arranged in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. In other words, according to this effect example, it can be said that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display section TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future.

  The production example shown in FIG. 86(b-1) is the same as that of FIG. 76(a) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the characters "Panda is the master of the lord". The description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86(b-1) followed by FIG. 86(b-2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character is bomb icon. It is shown trying to throw I61.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(b-3), the lord's character throws a bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. Is shown. The display of the exploded bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and the ruptured bomb icon I61 is compared to a state in which the bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 of is displayed again easily and visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the read-ahead notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, and may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Further, like this example of effect, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. Further, the above-described effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is out of frame.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 87 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  The effect example shown in FIG. 87(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77(d) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 87(a-2) following FIG. 87(a-1) shows a state in which the lord's character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

  Then, in FIG. 87 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moving toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, the grand character GY1, the balloon section TT3, the tutorial display section TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative pattern are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the grand character GY1 and the balloon section. TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are in a visually difficult state when compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap each part.

  After that, in FIG. 87(a-4), it is shown that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the variable icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger than the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. .. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that, at the timing shown in FIG. 87(a-4), although the overlap with the grandfather character GY1 has been eliminated, the balloon portion TT3, each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still the third decorative symbol display. It is overlapped with device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87(a-4), the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated therein, and each part of the balloon section TT2 are overlapped on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, and each of the balloon parts TT2 is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87(a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has reached the position where its center is aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and has finished moving. Then, all of the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and together with the medium symbol and the reserved display frame FL1. The change icon h0 becomes invisible in a front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon TT2, and the balloon TT3 is also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first reserve icon h11, the balloon TT2, and a part of the balloon TT3. It is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87(a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an expansion animation of the reserved display frame FL2 is performed, the reserved display frame FL2 expands upward, and a ninja appears in the expanded portion. The appearance of the character NJ2 is shown. That is, it can be said that the pending display frame FL2 displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further displayed in an extended display. Although the ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the size may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87(a-7), a state in which the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that gives the look-ahead notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice displayed by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1. . It can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded pending display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the Ninja character NJ2, which is an example of effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of the look-ahead notice or the change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ2) performed in the extended display frame FL2 after expansion, but can be said to be the effect performed outside the retained display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves so as to straddle the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87(a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, in FIG. 87(a-10), it is shown that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. Further, the LED arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, and these light emitting means notify the advance notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. The timing of the change in the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87(a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, the animation may be performed by frame-out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fade-out, or may be erased suddenly.

  Then, in FIG. 87(a-13), a state is shown in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves to the right and moves toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is resolved, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped, and a part of the device 208N is visible together with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle pattern of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and compared with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which makes it difficult to see as compared with the non-overlapped state.

  After that, in FIG. 87(a-14), a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is at the initial position is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-14), since the overlap has been resolved for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far, the overlap is achieved. Compared with the state in which is not eliminated, each display is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

  After that, in FIG. 87(a-15), it is shown that the LED emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. Instead of turning off the light, the light may be turned on in a default light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode of lighting in white). On the other hand, the family crest monument 224E still emits green light in correspondence with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this production example, one display device (third decorative symbol display device 208N) of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is the first decorative symbol. Although the display device 208L is moved so as to overlap the display device 208L so that the display mode of the hold icon is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(b), both of the two sub display devices are displayed. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a hold icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when performing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are set to the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L is moved to a position near each other in the center. Then, the reserved display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and at the bottom of the reserved display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon portion TT2, the balloon portion TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon. All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display section TT1 and the Chibihime character CH1 are overlapped.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 88, a sub-display device (only one sub-decorative pattern display device 208P is provided in place of the above-described two sub-display devices, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in this sub-decorative pattern display device 208P Is shown.

  88 differs from the above-described embodiment in that it includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps a part of the front side of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the holding display frame FL1 and the holding icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the sub-decorative pattern display device 208P, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged below them. The UI section in which is formed is displayed, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the prefetch advance notice display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed, and the relationship between panda and lord is explained. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the Chibihime character CH1 on the left side of the display screen. The speech display "Where is the grandfather?" is displayed in the balloon portion TT2. On the right side of the display screen, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. In the speech bubble portion TT3, a dialogue display saying "Here". That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 88(a), a conversation notice is given. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern may be overlapped with the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 88(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed.

  Then, in FIG. 88(b), an extended animation of the pending display frame FL1 is performed, the pending display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a state in which the ninja character NJ2 appears in the expanded portion is shown. At this time, the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is extended from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display frame displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon TT2 is overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon TT2 is visually recognized in comparison with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 88(b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. It is shown that the user is moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 88(c), the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P and is shown toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(d), in the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. There is. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(e), in the sub-decorative pattern display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is again easily visually displayed as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. To be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 89(a-1) to (a-6) show that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the error display is being performed. FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the effect display is being performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices, and FIG. FIGS. 89(d-1) to 89(c-1) to FIG. 89(d-1) to FIG. 89(d-1) to (c-3) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136. In the same figure (d-3), a state is shown in which an effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 and changing the display mode of the hold icon while the button effect is being performed is being performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 89(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77(d) except that an error display is performed, and therefore only the different points will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of other parts are omitted.

  In Fig. 89 (a-1), when the lower plate is full, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to inform that the lower plate full error has occurred. It is shown that the tan error display ER is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of the error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display that notifies that the front frame door 106 is open. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower plate full tank error display ER is shown as overlapping with a part of the balloon portion TT2. Note that such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(a-2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. In FIG. 89(a-2), since the family crest monument 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which a part of the lower plate full error display ER is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 89(a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 expands upward, which is greater than that of the family crest actor 224E. The appearance is shown above. In this effect example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1. Is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89(a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. In addition, a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see when compared with a state in which a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

  In FIG. 89(a-5), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, a ninja is compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice.

  After that, FIG. 89(a-6) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continuing, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the reserved display frame FL1 and the extended part of the reserved display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the state that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  In FIG. 89(b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the state of scrolling to the left is shown. Has been done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 89(b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetching notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and the contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, since the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the extended hold display frame FL1.

  In FIG. 89(c-1), as an example of the display mode of the prefetching notice, a state is shown in which the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, in this example of performance, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state. Although the button image 136a is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position apart from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that even if the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed, it does not overlap. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 89(c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon to that shown in FIG. 89(c-3). It changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the lord's character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a receivable state on the condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Good.

  FIG. 89(d-1) shows a state in which an effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, the button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, since the effect display for changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, the hold image frame FL1 in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar are partially expanded is displayed. It is overlapped. Further, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, and therefore the button effect can be said to be an effect that does not overlap the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is the button effect. It can be said that the productions do not overlap. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. When the button hold icon described above is displayed, the button image 136a is displayed in front of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar and is displayed in front of the hold display frame FL1. It may be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar or on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 89(d-2), as shown in FIG. 89(d-3), the cut-in in which the lord's character is displayed up is displayed. Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is highly reliable. In this example of effect, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. .. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. When the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing, stepwise, an example of the variable display of symbols applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 90(a-1) to (a-5) do not include a sub display device, and effect display is performed only by the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 90(b-1) to FIG. 90(b-2) show a state in which an error display is performed. Further, FIG. 90(c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 90(d-1) to FIG. 90(d-1). -2) shows that a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  FIG. 90(a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that only the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device is provided and the sub display device is not provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 90(a-1), the UI section is arranged at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the second decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen is also displayed. In the upper right of the, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 90(a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and fluctuation fluctuation is performed. Further, the variable display is performed in the second decorative pattern. Further, in the UI section, the hold display frame FL1 accommodating the variable icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center is performed. In this example of the effect, images that imitate the sliding doors are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the wiping display is such that the sliding doors are closed. Here, the wipe means a video effect in which an image to be displayed next is interrupted from a part of the display screen when the image is switched. There are various types of wipe techniques, but any technique can be applied. In this example of performance, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the shake variation is started by the combination of the decorative decorative patterns, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the shake variation is completed and the confirmation display is performed. May be performed. In addition, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or when transitioning to the super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 are overlapped with the UI portion and the first decorative symbol, while being overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 90(a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The variable icon h0 is erased at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. Here, the change icon h0 may be deleted at a timing before the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed, or at the same timing as the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. It may be present, or it may be a timing later than the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  FIG. 90(a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 90(a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area are overlapped with the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 shows the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the state in which the fixed symbol is definitely displayed is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is in a state of being entirely overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in accordance with the combination of the decorative patterns displayed when the first decorative pattern shakes. It is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol 1 4th symbol is also stopped and displayed with a missing symbol.

  After that, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the wipe pattern is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are respectively framed out in the left-right direction of the display screen. Be seen. As a result, the UI portion is visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol have begun variably displaying. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the second hold icon that was displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

  FIG. 90(b-1) to FIG. 90(b-2) show that the wipe display is being performed during the display of the error display. 90(a-3) to FIG. 90(b-3) to FIG. 90(b-2) except that the lower plate full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as that of a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 90(b-1) to 90(b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described lower plate full tank error display ER is shown to overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been done. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 90(b-1), the lower plate full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. As shown in FIG. 90(b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full tank error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. .. Note that an error display such as the lower plate full tank error display ER may overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 90C shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 90(c) is the same as FIG. 77(i) except that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the different points will be described in detail, and others. A detailed description is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90(c), for example, when the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the variable icon h0 moves upward with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the rear side of the variable icon h0. The effect is such that the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variable icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 90(d-1), a hold display frame FL4 that surrounds the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the prefetching notice is displayed, and this hold display frame FL4 expands upward and the ninja appears in the expanded portion. It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. It should be noted that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 90(d-1), except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1, FIG. Since it is the same as that of b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 90(d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetching notice. This hold display frame FL4 is, for example, in a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, and is framed in from below the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12. After that, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward is performed by the expanded animation in the above-described manner. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May be overlapped, or the time when both effects are performed may not be overlapped.

  Further, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the next symbol variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 90(d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the expanded reserved display frame FL4 is reduced to change to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the variable display of symbols is started. Then, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by expanding the hold display frame FL4. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in this manner. Further, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be erased once, and after the next symbol variable display is started, the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even at the time of the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved in accordance with the movement display of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 91(a-1) to (a-4) show that the tutorial display section TT6 serving as a hold display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 91(b-1) to (a-4). In b-5), a state is displayed in which the hold display frame accommodating the hold icon is expanded and displayed, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 91(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame. It is displayed in a state of being housed in the FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(a-1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. .. In the tutorial display section TT6, the characters “Panda is the master of the lord” are displayed, and the explanation is displayed. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 91(a-1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Note that the button image 136a is not displayed in this effect example.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

  FIG. 91(a-2) shows a state in which the range of the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded by pushing up the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area by an animation in which the tutorial display section TT6 expands upward. ing. Further, in the expanded tutorial display section TT6, a drinker confrontation reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative pattern is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded. The display that is performed in the lower area is a decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, for example, a dialogue display such as a conversation notice, a notice display, or a display that does not overlap with the effect of the change in the display of the hold icon. Can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character display of "SP development by victory" is displayed, and the content of the effect performed when the win in the drink-drink confrontation reach effect is informed. In the production of a drinker confrontation reach, a battle between the protagonist and the grandfather will be compared, and if the grandfather gets drunk, it will be announced that the protagonist will win and that SP will be reached. In addition, when the drink-drink confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. May be.

  In FIG. 91(a-3), a state in which the drink confrontation reach production is continuously performed is shown.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 91(a-4), in the case of shifting to SP reach, the grandfather is drunk and the effect display in which the main character's lord has won is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of loss is displayed without shifting to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 91(a-4'), the hero's hall is drunk and the hero's hall is defeated by the grandfather. Is done. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91(a-1) may be configured not to perform the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the state of FIG. 91(a-2). The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91(a-2) may be configured not to display the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the state of FIG. 91(a-1). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 91(a-2), the hold icon or the variable icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 91(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-1), the four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame accommodating the first hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in this variable icon display area during symbol variable display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-1), the tutorial display section TT7 displays the character display of "Because the notice icon is exhausted... ", which suggests that the notice effect is performed. The tutorial display unit TT7 may display an explanation. It should be noted that neither the variation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative pattern.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In addition, in this example of performance, the stage name display portion and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-1), the family crest monument 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The hold icon display area can be enlarged and displayed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded form. At the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 91(b-3), the emission color of the family crest monument 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of symbols relating to the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the default display mode is restored. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiments 1 to 9 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment replaces the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 with a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 802. Display device 804. The first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are arranged in the rendering device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, liquid crystal display devices are used as the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but various effects and various games can be used even if they are not liquid crystal display devices. It suffices if it is configured to be able to display information, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, Other display devices, including projectors, may be used.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments includes a production movable body 806, a production movable body 808, and a production movable body 810. Rendering movable body 806, rendering movable body 808, and rendering movable body 810 are arranged in rendering device 206 shown in FIG.

  Here, the positional relationship among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. . After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is described as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is. It is written as "after". Therefore, for example, the side closer to the player is referred to as “front”, and the side farther from the player than the “front” is referred to as “rear”. The side closer to the player is referred to as the "front side", and the side farther from the player than the "front side" is referred to as the "rear side". In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left as viewed from the player is defined as “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa is “right” (right, right). , Right edge, etc.).

  The first display device 800 is arranged substantially in the center of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 3, the second display device 802 is arranged to the left of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804. Are arranged on the right side of the first display device 800. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are arranged in front of the first display device 800. The positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 in the front-rear direction are the same.

  The effect movable body 806 is arranged on the upper left side of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is arranged on the upper right side of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged adjacent to each other. The positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the front-rear direction are the same and are on the front side of the first display device 800.

  The effect movable body 810 is arranged below the first display device 800. The position of the production movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

  These display devices and effect movable bodies are, from the rear side, a first display device 800, a second display device 802 and a third display device 806, an effect movable body 806, an effect movable body 808, and an effect movable body 810. They are arranged in order. Note that the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 may be at the same position in the front-rear direction, or the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged in front of the effect movable body 810. May be. Further, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be arranged in front of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

  The first display device 800 has a horizontally long rectangular display area. The first display device 800 is, as shown in FIG. 5C, “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→ It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol for switching the display of each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the order of... During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order in a horizontal row from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped and displayed on the first display device 800.

  A game information display area a is provided below the display area of the first display device 800. The lower end side of the game information display area a coincides with the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, the left end side of the game information display area a coincides with the left end side of the display area, and the game information display area The right edge of a coincides with the right edge of the display area. At the center of the game information display area a, a variable icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided. The variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area b when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon, it is possible to notify (the fluctuation notice) whether or not the special figure fluctuation game is successful with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation). In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the variable icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes.

  In the game information display area a and to the left of the variable icon display area b, a special figure 1 hold icon display area c is provided. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 1, and the special figure relating to the hold depending on the display mode of each hold icon. It is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation) whether or not one variation game is won.

  From the right to the left, the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation orders, respectively. That is, the hold icon of special figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (the most memorized in the past) hold can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas similarly have the second to fourth hold icons. It is possible to display the respective hold icons of Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the hold.

  An elliptical pedestal image showing the display position of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed below each of the first to fourth regions. In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold icons g1, g2, g3 are displayed in the first area, the second area, and the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Are displayed respectively. The hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed so as to overlap the top of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes. It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold icon, which indicates that the special figure 1 prefetch result is “undetermined”, may be displayed in a default display mode. In this case, the reliability of the default display mode is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, the hold icon is displayed in a display size smaller than that of the variable icon. This may facilitate identification of the hold icon and the variable icon.

  As shown in FIG. 92(a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area d is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, the number of hold icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure relating to the hold depending on the display mode of each hold icon. (2) It is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) of the success or failure of the variation game with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation).

  In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, so the special figure 2 hold icon display area d does not display the special figure 2 hold icon. When the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 92(a), a horizontally long rectangular display area e is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. Be done. In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display or a notice display such as a description of a game method, a description of effects, a description of a character, and the like in a character image. As shown in FIG. 92(a), during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the character image is not displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display and the notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the tutorial display or the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e. In addition, when the number of holding of special figure 2 is 1 or more, or when the game state is the electric power support state, the display area e may not be provided, and within the display area of the first display device 800. Therefore, the display area e may be provided at a position that does not overlap the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the castle town stage is set as the production stage. On the first display device 800, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage (hereinafter referred to as “castle town background”) is displayed. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

  The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 is smaller than that of the first display device 800. It is smaller than the display area. On the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802, a mini decorative pattern having a smaller display size than the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed. In FIG. 92 and subsequent figures, the mini decorative design is illustrated in a simplified manner than the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800. The display mode of the mini decorative design may be different from the display mode of the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800. On the second display device 802, it is possible to display three mini-decorative symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol arranged in this order from left to right. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, each symbol on the left middle right is "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" →... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → The variable display of the mini-decorative pattern that is switched in the order of "decoration 1"→... Is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 92( a ), the second display device 802 has a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, as in the first display device 800. It is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 92(a), a reception count display 850 indicating the reception count of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the second display device 802. In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the number of times of acceptance of the character string image "850 times" is displayed 850, and the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is zero. A button image 852 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the reception count display 850. Three lines are drawn in the button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, all four areas of the button image 852 are displayed in white and the meter is 0. The specific content of the effect using the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

  A horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, and information about the current performance stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), since the effect stage is the castle town stage, the character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

  Further, the second display device 802 displays a background image of the castle town background. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

  A full-color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802. By causing the full-color LED to emit a predetermined color, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect, notification, or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, the third display device 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area having the same size as the second display device 802. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special maps is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of reservations of special figure 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of reservations of special figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 and the number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 is 0. And the number "0" are displayed.

  The fourth symbol is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the third display device 804. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The square-shaped fourth symbol displayed on the left side is the fourth symbol for special figure 1, and the circular fourth symbol displayed on the right side is the fourth symbol for special figure 2. The fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed in white during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed in black during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Similarly, during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 is displayed in white, and during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game, the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 is displayed in black. . In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), since both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 variation game are not being executed, both the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 It is displayed in black. In addition, when the special symbol 1 of the big hit symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special design 2 of the big hit symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth design for the special design 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

  In the lower part of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of a lord on a cylindrical stage is displayed. It is possible to execute predetermined effects and notifications using the character image of the lord.

  Further, the background of the castle town is displayed on the third display device 804. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the third display device 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, game state, and effect mode.

  A full-color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804. By causing the full-color LED to emit a predetermined color, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect, notification, or the like.

  It should be noted that the second display device 802 may display a decorative pattern, a variable icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a number-of-holds display, or a fourth pattern, or a third display device 804 may display a decorative pattern or a variable icon. Alternatively, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a reception count display, a button image, a mini decorative design, or information on the current performance stage may be displayed. It should be noted that the first display device 800 may display a mini decorative design, a reception count display, a button image, information on the current performance stage, a fourth design, or a hold count display by numbers.

  Display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. Note that a control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that executes display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 may be separately provided. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are located at their initial positions. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are located on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 in the plane parallel to the display area, respectively. Can be moved from left to right. Drive control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions symmetrical to each other with respect to a virtual straight line that passes through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and extends in the vertical direction. In addition, a virtual straight line that passes through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and extends in the horizontal direction is located at a position that passes through the center of the display areas of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end portion of the second display device 802 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the left end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end portion of the third display device 804 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the right end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial position. The effect movable body 806 is relatively arranged on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is relatively arranged on the right side. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have the same vertical position in the initial position. The production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 have horizontally long rectangular plates of the same size, and are arranged so that the plate surfaces are orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The character "Yatsushiro" is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 806, and the character "General" is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 808.

  The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and in a plane parallel to the display area from the respective initial positions in the vertical direction. Can be moved. In addition, the production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 may operate integrally or individually when they are operated. In addition, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have full-color LEDs, and the predetermined effect or notification can be executed by causing the full-color LEDs to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape, and the surface thereof is decorated with a family crest. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The production movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and can move in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions in the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. In addition, the production movable body 810 has a full-color LED, and the full-color LED can be caused to emit light to perform a predetermined production or notification. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the production movable body 810 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  Drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  In addition, in each of the drawings from FIG. 92A onward, the components necessary for the description among the components of the pachinko machine 100 are extracted and illustrated in the region on the paper surface delimited by the one-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 92(a) and the subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated in the upper left part of the drawing, the chance button 136 is schematically illustrated in the lower left part of the drawing, and the general prize is shown in the lower right part of the drawing. The mouth 226 is schematically illustrated.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each drawing of FIG. 92 is a diagram showing this example of performance in time series. FIG. 92(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 6-decoration 2" -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 92(a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3 and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0, so that holding icons g1, g2, g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 holding icon display area c. In the upper left part of the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “3” and “0”. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, or may be deleted at the same time as the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  During the game, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  92(b) continuing from FIG. 92(a), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (first special figure display device 212) not shown in FIG. 92 and thereafter, The variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern are started. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to a change icon f2. Moved to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and changed to the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 92(b), the decrease animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

  Further, along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed in the display area e, and the panda character is explained.

  FIG. 92(c) following FIG. 92(b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 92(d) subsequent to FIG. 92(c) shows a state in which the meter of the button image 852 has increased by one in response to the fact that one game ball has won in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost area of the four areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by diagonal cross hatching in the figure). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, each time one gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 226, one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green and the meter is displayed. Is increased by 1.

  The five vertically aligned dots shown in FIG. 92(e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92(d). In this example, the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 92(b) is being executed, and two gaming balls have been won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 92(d).

  FIG. 92(f) shows a state after two game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. In response to two game balls winning the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by 2. At this point the meter value is 3.

  After the time point shown in FIG. 92(f), one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 92(g) shows a state following FIG. 92(f). In response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by 1, and the meter becomes full. In this example, when a total of four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (hereinafter, may be referred to as “reception number”) is increased by one. The display content of the acceptance count display 850 is updated to a character string image of "1 more time", and it is notified that the acceptance count of the chance button 136 has increased from 0 to 1. In the button image 852, after the meter is full, all four areas change from green to white, and the meter value is reset to 0. Note that the meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the reception count display 850 is updated, or before the display content is updated, It may be after the display content is updated. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when the number of times of acceptance of the chance button 136 is increased from 0 to 1. The chance button 136 may emit red light when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The red light emission of the chance button 136 may start at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, after the start of the operation valid period, or immediately before the start of the operation valid period. May be.

  The five vertically aligned points shown in FIG. 92(h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92(g). In this example, the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 92(b) is being executed, and eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 92(g).

  FIG. 92(i) shows a state after eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times of accepting the chance button 136 is increased by two in response to eight game balls having been won in the general winning opening 226. The display content of the reception count display 850 is updated to a character string image of "3 more times", and it is notified that the number of receptions of the chance button 136 has increased to 3 times. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white and the meter is reset to 0.

  FIG. 92(j) continuing from FIG. 92(i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 92(b) is finished. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the hit/miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, is "decoration 3-decoration 2". -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. During the stop display of the decorative pattern, the character image is not displayed in the display area e and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing of erasing the character image in the display area e may be the same as the start of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be immediately before the start of the stop display of the decorative design, or the stop display of the decorative design is in progress. You may.

  FIG. 92(k) continued from FIG. 92(j), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon f2 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f3. The icon moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 92(k), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f3 and the hold icon g3 has been completed.

  Further, along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In the present example, a character string image "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed in the display area e, and the lord's character is explained. In this way, the display contents of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

  Further, on the second display device 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed by a character string image of “3 more times”. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the previous special figure variation game can be carried over to the next special figure variation game transition.

  FIG. 92(l) subsequent to FIG. 92(k) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 once. FIG. 92(m) subsequent to FIG. 92(l) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Since the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is reduced to twice. As a result, the display content of the acceptance count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “2 more times”.

  The five vertically aligned points shown in FIG. 92(n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92(m). In this example, after FIG. 92(m), the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during execution of the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 92(k).

  FIG. 92(o) shows a state after the player has operated the chance button 136 twice. In this example, the effect is not executed in response to either operation of the chance button 136 twice. Since the chance button 136 is operated twice, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is reduced to zero. As a result, the display content of the acceptance count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to "0 more times". In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends when the number of times the chance button 136 is received decreases from once to zero. For example, even if the chance determination result regarding the symbol variation display being executed is out of order, the chance button 136 may be operated or the effect may not be executed in response to the operation.

  FIG. 92(p) shows another pattern of the effect example continuing from FIG. 92(k). In this pattern, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In FIG. 92(p), the player operates the chance button 136. Further, the variation icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the variable icon and the hold icon are displayed in a predetermined color, the jackpot reliability is set to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability is white, the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is blue, the display method with the highest jackpot reliability is green, and the display method with the highest jackpot reliability is It is red. Therefore, the white circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 92(k) is displayed when the green circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 92(p) is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. The jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case. The display mode of the variable icon f3 shown in FIG. 92(p) may be changed from white to green during execution of the symbol variable display, and the display mode is changed from white to green at the start of the symbol variable display. It may be changed, the display mode may be changed from white to green during the period displayed as the hold icon f2 before the variable icon is displayed, and the hold icon f2 may be displayed in the green display mode from the beginning. May be.

  FIG. 92(q) subsequent to FIG. 92(p) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 once. In this example, the notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As a notice effect of the change, a notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the emission colors of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 are displayed. Changes from white to red (indicated by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines in the figure), and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of "keen". The notice image is displayed so as to overlap the entire reception count display 850. Note that the reception count display 850 may be erased during the display of the preview image. Further, either the timing at which the advance notice image is started to be displayed or the timing at which the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red may be first or may be simultaneous. Good. Note that the effect movable bodies 806 and 608 may execute a moving operation as a notice effect. For example, the production movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward at the same time when the emission color changes to red, or may move downward after the emission color changes to red, or the emission color may change to red. You may move downwards before changing to.

  Further, either one of the timing at which the advance notice image starts to be displayed and the timing at which the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect “Kean” may be first or may be simultaneous. Further, either one of the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect of “Kean” may be first, or at the same time. It may be.

  In the present example, the notice image including the character image of "celebration" is a notice image for confirming the big hit, and is displayed only when the result of winning/deciding whether or not the variable display is being executed is the big hit. In the case where the hit/no hit determination result relating to the symbol variation display being executed is out of alignment, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIGS. 92(m) and (o). Alternatively, for example, a notice image including a character string image of "chance" may be displayed as a notice of the change. The advance notice image including the character string image of “chance” can be displayed even when the result of winning/decision determination relating to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. The notice image including the character string image of “chance” has a lower jackpot reliability than the notice image including the character image of “celebration”, and the notice image including the character image of “celebration” is displayed while the variable display is being executed. When displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than when the notice image including the character string image of “chance” is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits red light is set to be relatively high. The light emission color of the effect movable body at the time of the notice effect is set to have high jackpot reliability in the order of white, blue, green, and red. During execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the production movable body emits red light and the advance notice effect is executed is more than the case where the production movable body emits blue light and the advance notice effect is executed. There is a high probability that the jackpot pattern mode will be confirmed and displayed on the display.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the notice effect of the change may be executed in accordance with the second operation of the chance button 136. However, the notice effect of the change may be executed according to the third operation, or the notice effect of the change may be executed for each operation of the chance button 136. Incidentally. The effect executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a pre-reading notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is increased by 1 each time four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. It should be noted that the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one each time one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, or two or three game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one, or the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one each time a predetermined number of five or more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. May be. The upper limit of the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be three times, less than three times, or four times or more.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a chance button 136 as an operating means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. It is possible to increase or decrease the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the effect (first button effect) related to the chance button 136 based on the number-of-accepts display 850 and the button image 852. May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player can be made aware of the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226 by increasing the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 and the number of operations of the chance button 136. There are cases.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c). FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c) are diagrams showing the effect example in time series. FIG. 93(a) shows the state during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The variable display of the decorative design is executed on the first display device 800, and the variable display of the mini decorative design is executed on the second display device 802. On the third display device 804, a white fourth symbol for Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804. In the upper left part of the, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  In FIG. 93A, a button image 854 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the button image 854. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the length of a predetermined color (light black color in the figure). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the middle symbol). The button image 854 has a larger display size than the button image 852.

  In addition, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 3 times in response to the winning of 12 game balls in the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 93(a), and the second display device In 802, a reception count display 850 by a character string image of “3 more times” is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the meter value is 0.

  In the present embodiment, an effect regarding the chance button 136 by the number of times of reception display 850 and the button image 852 (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect A”) and an effect regarding the chance button 136 by the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter, “button effect”). (Referred to as “B”) is executed redundantly. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds. The remaining time is reported. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. In addition, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, or the button image 854 may be displayed before the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The gauge image 856 may be displayed. Further, in the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the notice effect is executed according to the operation. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. When the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are erased at the end of the operation valid period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not executed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. Good.

  FIG. 93B continuing from FIG. 93A shows a state where the player operates the chance button 136 once. FIG. 93(c) subsequent to FIG. 93(b) shows a state where the effect is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect B. The first notice production and the second notice production are started at the same time. The first notice effect is similar to the change notice effect shown in FIG. 92(q). As the first notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed, the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of “keen”. The second notice effect is a notice effect of the variation, and as the second notice effect, a cut-in image 858 having a horizontally long parallelogram shape and including the character image of the lord is displayed on the first display device 800. The cut-in image 858 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable icon display area b. In this example, when the first notice effect and the second notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second notice effect is output. May be done.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second notice effect can be executed. Button effect A and button effect B are separate and independent effects, and even when the "0 more time" character image acceptance count display 850 is displayed, chance button 136 is operated in button effect B. Then, the second notice production can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the button effect A and the button effect B can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel. Is.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 93(b), the second notice effect may be started after the first notice effect is started. In this case, when the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit green light as the second notice effect, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the first notice effect, the second notice effect is generated. The effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 93(b), the first notice effect may be started after the second notice effect is started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit red light as the first notice effect. In this way, the light emission color of the effect movable body may be overwritten with the color according to the notice effect that is started later.

  The button effect B in this example is an effect requiring a single-shot operation of the chance button 136, but the button effect B may be an effect requiring a continuous hit operation of the chance button 136. For example, in the case where the button effect B is an effect that requires ten consecutive hit operations of the chance button 136, the button effect B causes the chance button 136 to be operated seven times even after the number of times the button effect A has been received reaches zero. Is accepted and the chance button 136 is operated 10 times, the operation valid period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

  The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap, or in the button effect A. Light may be emitted in red only during the operation-effective period of the chance button 136, or may be emitted in red only during the operation-effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B.

  In the button effect A, a period other than the stop display of the decorative symbol and the execution of the wipe effect display described later in FIG. 95 may be settable as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A may be reset to zero.

  Next, a modified example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93(d) and 93(e). FIGS. 93(d) and 93(e) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of this modification in time series. FIG. 93(d) shows the state during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. On the first display device 800, the variable display of the decorative symbols is being executed, and on the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbols is being executed. On the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804. In the upper left part of the, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  The hold icon g2 is displayed in a display mode of a pattern simulating the chance button 136. Further, the hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The hold icon g2 has a smaller display size than the button image 850. In addition, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is three times in response to the winning of twelve game balls in the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 93(d), and the second display device. In 802, a reception count display 850 by a character string image of “3 more times” is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the meter value is 0.

  In this example, the button effect A based on the number-of-receptions display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect regarding the chance button 136 based on the hold icon g2 (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect C”) are executed in an overlapping manner. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is in the period in which the hold icon g2 is displayed. It continues until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started at the same time as the display of the hold icon g2 of the pattern imitating the chance button 136 is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may be started after the display of the hold icon g2, or the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C prior to the start of display of the hold icon g2. May be started.

  FIG. 93(e) subsequent to FIG. 93(d) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 once. According to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first notice effect is similar to the change notice effect shown in FIG. 92(q). As the first notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed, and the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third notice effect is a look-ahead notice effect, and the third notice effect of this example is a look-ahead notice about the special figure variation game according to the second holding of special figure 1. As the third notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed from the pattern imitating the chance button 136 to the character pattern of the lord. In the hold icon, the jackpot reliability of the display mode of the character image of the lord is set higher than that of the display mode of the red circle. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes, the hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, when the first notice effect and the third notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the third notice effect is output. May be done.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, the third notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect C are separate and independent effects, and the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C even when the reception count display 850 of the character image of "0 more times" is displayed. Then, the third notice production can be executed. As shown in FIG. 93(d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first notice effect are executed as the notice effect of the change, and the button effect C and the third notice effect are executed as the prefetch notice effect. Note that the button effect B shown in FIGS. 93(a) and (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 93(d) may be executable in parallel, or the button effect B and the button effect C may be performed. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state of being executed in parallel, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in parallel.

  In the first and second embodiments, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is increased when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. Even if the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased when the game ball enters the starting opening 230), the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 (the second special drawing starting opening), and the universal drawing starting opening 228. Good.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226, and when the game ball passes the sensor, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. The number of times may be increased.

  Note that the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased only in a predetermined game state (for example, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, non-execution of big hit game).

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each drawing of FIG. 94 is a diagram showing this example of performance in time series. FIG. 94(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out, is "decoration 6-decoration 2". -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 94(a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In the upper left part of the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “3” and “0”. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, or may be deleted at the same time as the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  In this example, a horizontally long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the first display device 800 as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the wipe display screen wpa, a still image or a moving image different from the still image or the moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed, and a predetermined effect is executed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is not executed and may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is executed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 94(a), the wipe display screen wpa displays a disappointing expression of a lord's character image. The character image is a default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. Further, during the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) is over the decorative pattern in the stop display (right pattern). Wrapped and displayed.

  94(b) continuing from FIG. 94(a), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to a change icon f2. Moved to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and changed to the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 94(b), the decrease animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) are not overlapped with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative pattern. In other words, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) are overlapped with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol and displayed. In addition, the lower end of the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol may match the upper edge of the wipe display screen wpa.

  FIG. 94(c) continuing from FIG. 94(b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 94(d) subsequent to FIG. 94(c) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the fact that one game ball has won in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a mini game effect display is executed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the game ball winning the general winning opening 226. Even when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, the special symbol is held 0, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol fluctuation stop is displayed), and the big hit game is being executed. If the remaining variation time of the special figure variation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini game effect display may not be performed. Further, the mini game effect display may be executed as many times as the number of game balls that have won the general winning opening 226. For example, the mini game effect display is started in response to the fact that one game ball has been won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not being executed, and the general winning opening is further played during the execution of the mini game effect display. When the ball wins, the start of the mini game effect display may be suspended. Further, the mini game effect display is started only when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not executed, and the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is being executed. In this case, the start of the mini game effect display may not be suspended.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 94( d ), a mini game effect display is performed in which the lord and the old man are compared to drink alcohol. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which a lord and an old man are compared to drink alcohol is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variation game according to the second holding of special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 94(e) subsequent to FIG. 94(d) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 94(f) subsequent to FIG. 94(e) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord has won the confrontation comparing drinking and the wipe display screen wpa displays the character string image of “win” and the moving image of the scene where the lord won. In this example, if the mini game is successful, the lord wins the confrontation with drinking and drinking.

  FIG. 94(g) subsequent to FIG. 94(f) shows a state in which the notice effect executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, as the notice effect, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. A part of the hold icon change animation of this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. The arrows in FIGS. 94(g) and 94(h) indicate the loci of movement of the effect image 860.

  FIG. 94(h) subsequent to FIG. 94(g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. Note that the effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g2) that is not the target of the hold icon change animation.

  FIG. 94(i) subsequent to FIG. 94(h) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is completed. When the hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased and the whole hold icon g3 becomes visible again. Due to the hold icon change animation, the hold icon g3 is displayed with the display state changed from white to green.

  FIG. 94(j) subsequent to FIG. 94(i) shows a state after the mini game effect display is finished. In this example, the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends. On the wipe display screen wpa, the default display similar to that of FIG. 94(b) is executed.

  FIG. 94(k) shows an example of an effect of a pattern in which the mini game fails. If the mini-game fails, Tono is defeated in a confrontation with drinking and drinking, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of "Loss" and a moving image of the scene in which the defeat was lost. When the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  FIG. 94(l) shows an example in which the mini-game effect display is displayed overlapping with other effect display. In the lower right part of the display area of the first display device 800, a conversation notice image 862 including a character image of Princess Chibi and a balloon image including a character string image is displayed. A part of the conversation notice image 862 is overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, in the conversation preview image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the entire character string image, and the region other than the upper end and the right end of the balloon image are overlapped on the wipe display screen wpa and are visually recognized. It is impossible. In other words, in this example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed on the conversation notice image 862 without overlapping. Further, in this example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as a notice image of the change. The conversation notice image 862 may be displayed as a prefetch notice image.

  94(m) to 94(r) show another example of the mini game effect display in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of mini game effect displays. FIG. 94(m) continuing from FIG. 94(b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 94(n) subsequent to FIG. 94(m) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the fact that one game ball has won in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 94(n), a mini game effect display in which the lord tries to throw a thousand boxes is executed. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which the lord is throwing a thousand boxes is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variation game according to the second holding of special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 94(o) subsequent to FIG. 94(n) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 94(p) subsequent to FIG. 94(o) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord succeeds in throwing a thousand boxes and a moving image of a scene where the lord succeeds in throwing a thousand boxes is displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. In this example, if the mini-game succeeds, the lord wins the Thousand Box Throw.

  FIG. 94(q) subsequent to FIG. 94(p) shows a state in which the notice effect executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, as the notice effect, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. The arrow in FIG. 94(q) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The hold icon change animation of this example is the same as the hold icon change animation shown in FIGS. 94(g) to (i). In this example, similar to FIG. 94(j), the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

  FIG. 94(r) shows a rendering example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. When the mini-game fails, the lord fails to throw a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene where the lord fails to throw a thousand boxes. When the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini game effect display. The jackpot reliability may be set according to the type of mini game effect display. For example, the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display A”) of the drinking and drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 94(d) to 94(l) is shown in FIGS. 94(m) to 94(r). The jackpot reliability may be set to be higher than that of the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display B”) in which the player throws a thousand boxes. In this case, when the mini game effect display A is executed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol fluctuation table subject to the notice than when the mini game effect display B is executed. Conversely, the mini-game effect display B may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the mini-game effect display A. In this case, when the mini game effect display B is executed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol fluctuation table subject to the notice than when the mini game effect display A is executed. It should be noted that when the mini game effect display A is executed, it may be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display B is executed, or when the mini game effect display B is executed. It may be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display A is executed. It should be noted that the holding icon change animation may be only one kind or may be provided in plural kinds. When multiple types of hold icon change animations are provided, the hold icon change animation to be executed for each mini game effect display may be determined in advance, or the hold icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. May be done.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a general winning opening 226 as a first area, and display means for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 226, the mini game effect display may be executed, and the mini game effect display is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the prize balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 226 but also the effect display based on the winning in the general winning opening 226 is given to the player with an expectation for a big hit. May be possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the mini game effect display as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa which is a partial area of the display area of the first display device 800. The mini game effect display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a part of the variable icon change animation for changing the variable icon in the wipe screen wpa as the wipe display. In addition, the mini game effect display may not be started during the execution of the stop display of the decorative pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. The mini game effect display may be executed when a game ball enters the starting port 228.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a through) that detects passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball through the general winning opening 226, and when the game ball passes the sensor, the mini game effect display is executed. It may be configured.

  The mini game effect display may be configured to be executed only in a predetermined game state (for example, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, non-execution of big hit game).

  It should be noted that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only displaying the effect image 860 and deleting the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. 94(g) and (h) is for the change of the hold icon. It may be an animation of.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each drawing of FIG. 95 is a diagram showing this example of performance in time series. FIG. 95(a) shows a state in which "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" indicating a deviation during the super reach production is temporarily stopped (swing variation display). Note that the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown in each drawing of FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, holds the mini decorative design displayed on the second display device 802 and the numbers displayed on the third display device 804. The number display and the fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini-decorative design is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number-of-holds display and the fourth design are displayed in the upper right part of the display area. Further, during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, since the decorative symbol is being changed and displayed, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 6” of the right symbol.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 95(a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2 and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0, so holding icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 holding icon display area c. In the upper right part of the display area of the first display device 800, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”.

  FIG. 95( b) following FIG. 95( a) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started. The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased from the edge of the display area of the display device so as to be wiped out. In this example, as shown in FIG. 95B, the wipe display wpb1 starts to appear from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts to appear from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 have started appearance at the same time, and the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is regarded as the wipe effect display start. The display mode of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is a fusuma pattern. The wipe effect display may or may not be executed on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  The wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed so as to overlap the display other than the mini decorative design, the number-of-holds display and the fourth design. As shown in FIG. 95(b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed so as to overlap the display other than the mini decorative design, and the wipe display wpb2 overlaps with the display of the number held by numbers and the display other than the fourth design. Will be displayed. In other words, the mini-decorative design, the number-of-holds display by numbers, and the fourth design are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  Further, the variable icon f1 is erased at the same time when the wipe effect display is started. The variable icon f1 may be deleted before the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed even after the start of the wipe effect display.

  FIG. 95(c) subsequent to FIG. 95(b) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is being executed. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the time shown in FIG. 95(c).

  FIG. 95(d) following FIG. 95(c) shows a state in which the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 has been completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed by the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 in a display mode in which the sliding doors are closed. In this example, at the same time as the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol (the symbol variable display) are terminated. In the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, a mini decorative pattern of a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and in the upper right part of the display area, a black special figure 1 The fourth symbol for use is displayed. The symbol variation display may be terminated after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. In addition, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is executed after the end of the variable display of the symbols, and the stop display of the decorative symbols of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 95(e) following FIG. 95(d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed prior to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 shrinks toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 is deleted from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 shrinks toward the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb2 is erased from the display area. The withdrawal display completion timing of the wipe display wpb1 and the withdrawal display completion timing of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to a change icon f2. It moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 95(e), the decrease animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

  As shown in FIG. 95(e), since the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are erased, the wipe display area wpb, the change icon f2, the hold icon g2, and the castle town background are visible. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to refresh the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next variation when the deviation occurs in the super reach effect.

  95(f) and 95(g) show another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 95(f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 95(c) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 95(f), the lower plate 128 becomes full with game balls, and a lower plate full error occurs. In the lower center of the display area of the first display device 800, a lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed in which a character string image of "Please pull out the ball" is displayed in a black horizontal oblong image. There is. The lower plate full tank error display 852 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern and the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2.

  FIG. 95(g) subsequent to FIG. 95(f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 95(d) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this way, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment. In other words, the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment are not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display 864.

  FIG. 95(h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 95(h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 95(g) except that the hold icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 95(h) shows a state in which the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrow in FIG. 95(h) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The moving effect image 860 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display 864. In other words, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap with the moving effect image 860.

  In this way, the notice effect display may be displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. In this example, the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation as the prefetching notice effect is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment refreshes the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next change when the deviation occurs in the super reach effect, and the prefetch advance notice display is displayed on the wipe effect display. By overlapping, it may be possible to expect after the next symbol variation display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 4 of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95 again.

(A1)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136),
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a general drawing starting opening 228),
A gaming machine equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter,
It is possible to increase or decrease the number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (for example, the effect regarding the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 92, button effect A) (hereinafter, referred to as the “acceptance number”)
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the player may be able to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the first area by increasing the number of times the operation means is operated and the number of times the operation means is operated.

(A2)
The gaming machine described in A1 above,
A display means (for example, a general term for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804),
The display unit (for example, at least one display unit of the first display unit 800, the second display unit 802, and the third display unit 804) is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display” (for example, a notice display including a character image of “celebration” shown in FIG. 92D)). ,
In the first button presentation, the first display may be displayed when the operating means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.
A game table characterized by that.

(A3)
The gaming machine described in A2 above,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, “second display” (eg, cut-in image 858 shown in FIG. 93(c), hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 93(e)). That is),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed,
The second display may be displayed even if the number of receptions is 0,
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel,
A game table characterized by that.

(A4)
The gaming machine described in A3 above,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel,
A game table characterized by that.

(A5)
The game table according to A3 or A4,
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display” (for example, button image 852)) in the first button effect.
The display means displays an image imitating the operation means in the second button effect (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display” (eg, button image 854, hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 93D)). Can be displayed,
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(A6)
The gaming table according to any one of A1 to A5,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may decrease.
A game table characterized by that.

(A7)
The gaming table according to any one of A1 to A6,
When a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of times of reception may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(A8)
The gaming table according to any one of A1 to A7,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226),
A game table characterized by that.

(A9)
The gaming table according to any one of A1 to A8,
A second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may increase,
A game table characterized by that.

(A10)
The gaming table according to any one of A1 to A9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

  When the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of reception may increase.

  The number of times of reception may increase only when the game ball enters the first area while a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full.

  The number of times of reception may not increase even if the game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full or the like is not satisfied.

  In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed without fail when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more.

  In the first button effect during execution of the variable display of symbols, the first display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.

  In the first button effect during non-execution of the variable display of symbols, the first display may not be displayed even when the operating means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.

  When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  The second display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

  The second display may not be displayed even when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

  The second display may be always displayed even when the number of receptions is 0 when the operation means is operated.

  The second display may be displayed only when the number of receptions is 0 when operating the operation means.

  The second display does not have to be displayed even when the number of receptions is 0 when the operation means is operated.

  The number of receptions may be necessarily reduced when the operation means is operated.

  The number of receptions may be reduced only when the operation means is operated.

  The number of receptions does not have to be reduced even when the operation unit is operated.

  When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of reception may increase without fail.

  The number of receptions may increase only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.

  Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of reception may not increase.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area without fail.

  Only the game balls that have passed through the second area may be able to enter the first area.

  There may be a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not enter the first area.

  When a game ball enters the second area, the number of times of reception may increase.

  The number of times of reception may increase only when the game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full.

  There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if the game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full or the like is not satisfied.

  Special figure Low probability General figure It is possible to increase the winning rate to the general prize hole in order to raise the base (number of prize balls/number of game balls) in the low probability state, but with conventional game consoles general prize hole Since there is no means for the player to recognize that the winning rate to 226 has increased, the number of award balls based on the award to the general winning opening 226 increases, so that the total number of award balls does not occur. There was a fear of distrusting the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 based on the winning of the general winning opening 226, thereby increasing the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 and the number of operations of the chance button 136. In some cases, the player may be able to know the winning number of game balls to the general winning opening 226.

  The number of times of reception may be increased by one each time one game ball is won in the first area.

  In a so-called right-handed machine where a universal starting port and an attacker are provided on the right side of the game area, a game ball is won in the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area when right-handed (during electric power support and jackpot game) In such a case, the number of receptions may not increase.

  When hitting to the right, the number of receptions may or may not be increased even if the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area is won. Good.

  When the game ball enters the first area, the effect in which the operation means is operated at least once may be configured to be started. For example, in a configuration in which a certain effect always involves the operation of the operation means, the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, a pseudo-relation effect) may be indicated.

  The display of the first display (for example, the first notice effect) may be configured so as to require a plurality of operations of the operation means even in the case of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

  The number of acceptances may be configured to increase at other occasions (the number of winnings of a big hit or the number of executions of a predetermined reach).

  Even when the first display is being made, the number of receptions is reduced when the operation means is operated.

  When the game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of times of reception may or may not increase.

(B1)
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a general drawing starting opening 228),
Display means (for example, a general term for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804),
A gaming machine equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter,
The display unit (for example, at least one display unit of the first display unit 800, the second display unit 802, and the third display unit 804) is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display” (for example, mini game effect display)).
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, not only the prize balls based on the winning in the first area but also the first display based on the winning in the first area gives the player an expectation of a big hit. You may be able to.

(B2)
The gaming machine described in B1 above,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display” (for example, conversation notice image 862)),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display,
A game table characterized by that.

(B3)
The gaming machine described in B2 above,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area (for example, a wipe screen wpa) of the display area of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(B4)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B3,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display” (for example, hold icon, change icon).),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
As the display for changing the display mode of the third display, the first display (for example, a wipe effect display as a hold icon change animation or a change icon change animation) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(B5)
The gaming machine described in B4 above,
The third display is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(B6)
The game table according to any one of B1 to B5,
The first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative design (for example, the wipe effect display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative design),
A game table characterized by that.

(B7)
The game table according to any one of B1 to B6,
When the game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, in the general winning opening 226 during execution of the wipe effect display). When the game ball wins, the wipe effect display is continuously executed),
A game table characterized by that.

(B8)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B7,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226),
A game table characterized by that.

(B9)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B8,
A second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
The first display may be displayed when a game ball enters the second area,
A game table characterized by that.

(B10)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

  The first display may be always displayed when the game ball enters the first area.

  The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the first area while the symbol variable display is being executed.

  The first display may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the first area during the non-execution of the symbol variation display.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area without fail.

  Only the game balls that have passed through the second area may be able to enter the first area.

  There may be a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not enter the first area.

  When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed without fail.

  The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the second area.

Even if the game ball enters the second area, the first display may not be displayed. Special prize Low probability General map General prize to raise the base (number of prize balls/number of game balls fired) in the low probability state A means of increasing the winning rate to the mouth is conceivable, but since there is no means for letting the player recognize that the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 has increased in the conventional gaming machine, There is a risk of distrusting the player of the fact that the number of award balls based on the winnings has increased and the total number of award balls has increased even though the player has not won the jackpot. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini-game effect display based on the winning of the general winning opening 226, thereby notifying the player that the game ball has won the general winning opening 226, and at the same time the mini game. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit by the effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game effect display in the wipe screen wpa that is displayed by prioritizing the decoration pattern or other effect display (for example, the conversation notice image 862) on the wipe screen wpa. Performance display It may be possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 by the frequency of the performance display so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

  The wipe screen wpa may display not only the mini game effect display but also the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received (for example, the number of times of reception display 850) and the button image (for example, the button image 852).

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97A to 97E. Each of FIG. 96 and FIGS. 97(a) to (e) is a diagram showing the example of the effect in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 96 and 97(a) to (e), the game state is a non-electric power support state. As shown in FIG. 96(a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is within the game information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800, and the digestion icon is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digestion icon display area i is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In the digestion icon display area i, a variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure variation game (symbol variation display) can be displayed as a digestion icon. A horizontally long rectangular pedestal image indicating the display position of the digestion icon is displayed below each of the first to fourth regions.

  In addition, in each of FIG. 96(a) and the subsequent drawings, among the configurations of the pachinko machine 100, the configurations necessary for description are extracted and illustrated in the area on the paper surface delimited by the one-dot chain line. As shown in each of FIGS. 96A and subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated in the upper left part of the drawing, and the chance button 136 is schematically illustrated in the lower left part of the drawing.

  FIG. 96(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has not been executed since the pachinko machine 100 was powered on. The pachinko machine 100 displays "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is the default symbol combination on the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 after the power is turned on. At the time shown in FIG. 96( a ), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 0, so that the hold icon is not displayed on the first display device 800 and the third display device 804 is displayed. The number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "0" and "0". Further, on the third display device 804, a black special figure 1 fourth symbol and a black special figure 2 fourth symbol are displayed.

  A button image 870 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the second display device 802. The display color of the button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The production movable bodies 806, 808, 810 are respectively located at the initial positions, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 96(b) continuing from FIG. 96(a), the holding of the special drawing 1 is increased by 1 in response to the fact that one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, and the holding of the special drawing 1 is exhausted. Then, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are shown. In the variable icon display area b, the variable icon f1 in a white circular display mode is displayed. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  In FIG. 96(b), when the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1 and the increased holding of special figure 1 is exhausted, and the special figure 1 variable game is Has been started. In this case, the command including the information that the number of the special reservation 1 has been increased by 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute the increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon gradually rises from below toward the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the suspension of Toku-zu 1 is exhausted during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub control unit 400 starts the symbol variation start from the main control unit 300 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Receive command. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, it controls the first display device 800 to stop the increase animation of the hold icon, and the variation display of the decorative symbol and the movement animation between the hold and variation icons. To run. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon corresponding to the held hold of the special figure 1 becomes the change icon and moves to the change icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to perform the increase animation of the hold icon. Stop it on the way and start moving animation between the hold and change icons. In addition, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 increases by 1, the increase animation of the holding icon, the holding icon corresponding to the increased holding, and the holding/fluctuation. Instead of displaying the movement animation between icons, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure variation game (symbol variation display) started immediately after the increase of the hold may be displayed in the variation icon display area b. In addition, after the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is completely moved to the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c (after the increase animation of the hold icon is finished to the end), the movement animation between the hold/variable icons May be performed.

  In FIG. 96(c) which continues from FIG. 96(b), four game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by 4 and the holding icon increase animation is executed, and the holding is performed. It shows a state in which the animation of increasing icons has ended. Reserved icons g1 to g4 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area c. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white circles. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a mode in which the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from the lower side toward the first area to the fourth area. Further, the number of holdings is displayed on the third display device 804 by the numbers “4” and “0”.

  FIG. 96(d) continuing from FIG. 96(c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit/miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 4" -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 96(e) continuing from FIG. 96(d), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a moving animation between the moving/digesting icons and a reduction animation of the hold icon with the start of the special figure 1 changing game. In the moving animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, the icon displayed as the fluctuation icon becomes the digestion icon and moves to the digestion icon display area i. In the moving animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons of this example, the fluctuation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 96(e) becomes the digestion icon j1 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j1 becomes the digestion icon display area. Gradually move toward the first region of i. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(e), the movement of the digestion icon j1 has been completed. The movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons ends when the movement of the digestion icons is completed. In addition, the display mode of the digestion icon j1 changes from a white circle to a gray ninja character pattern after the movement is completed. The display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change during the movement of the digestion icon j1, or may change at the same time when the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. In this example, the digestion icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon as a notice of advance notice or notice of the change. By using the digest icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern, for example, a notice effect such as a pending change animation can be executed. In addition, even if the digestion icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed, the notice effect such as the pending change animation may not be executed.

  The decrease animation of the hold icon is an animation including a moving animation between the hold/variable icons and a moving animation of the hold icon. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c gradually changes to the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(e), the movement of the variable icon f2 is completed. The moving animation between the holding and changing icons ends when the moving of the changing icon is completed. Further, the display size of the variable icon f2 is gradually enlarged while moving to the variable icon display area b.

  The hold icon movement animation is an animation in which each hold icon moves to an area corresponding to the one-order higher hold order. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is changed. FIG. 1 Moves to the third area of the hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(e), the movement of the holding icons g2 to g4 has been completed. The animation for moving the hold icon ends when the move of the hold icon is completed.

  In this example, the moving animation between the changing/digesting icons, the moving animation between the holding/changing icons, and the moving animation of the holding icon are started at the same time. Note that the three animations may be started in an arbitrary order, and two of the three animations may be started at the same time.

  Further, in this example, the moving animation between the changing/digesting icons, the moving animation between the holding/changing icons, and the moving animation of the holding icon end at the same time. Note that the three animations may end in any order, or two of the three animations may end at the same time.

  FIG. 96(f) continuing from FIG. 96(e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 9" -Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 96(g) continuing from FIG. 96(f), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a moving animation of the digestion icon when one or more digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i at the start of the special figure 1 variation game. The movement animation of the digestion icon is an animation in which the digestion icon moves one area to the right. In the movement animation of the digestion icon in this example, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i in FIG. 96(f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 has been completed. The animation of moving the digestion icon ends when the movement of the digestion icon is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation between variation/digestion icons and a reduction animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 96(f) becomes the digestion icon j2 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j2 becomes the first in the digestion icon display area i. Gradually move toward area 1. The display size of the digest icon j2 is gradually reduced during the movement so that the digest icon j2 has the same display size as the hold icon at the same time as the completion of the movement to the first region of the digest icon display area i. The display size of the digestion icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular suspension icons (for example, the suspension icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 96(g)), and the display color of the digestion icon j2 is gray (indicated by a horizontal line in the figure). It is shown as a striped pattern). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon in the default display mode is not used as the notice icon.

  In this way, the digest icon in the default display mode has the same display size and shape as the variable icon in Toku-zu 1 and the hold icon in Toku-zu 1. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the digestion icon is an icon corresponding to the ending special figure 1 variation game.

  In this example, the digestion icon j1 is moved to the second area as if the digestion icon j1 is pushed out from the first area of the digestion icon display area i by the digestion icon j2 by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons. To do.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed. In the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(g), the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 is completed. In the moving animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 has been completed.

  In this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon is started at the same time as the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may start in any order, and two or three of the four animations may start at the same time.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon ends simultaneously with the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may end in any order, or two or three of the four animations may end.

  FIG. 96(h) continuing from FIG. 96(g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. The first display device 800 and the second display device 802 indicate that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out, indicating that the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit "decoration 6-decoration 3" -Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 96(i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 96(g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 96(g), the special figure 1 variation game is executed twice. It is assumed that there is no winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game twice. Also, due to the start of the special game 1 variation game twice, animation animation of digestion icon, animation animation of transition/digestion icon, animation animation of hold/variation icon, and animation animation of hold icon are 2 respectively. It is executed one by one.

  The digestion icon j1 displayed in the second region of the digestion icon display region in FIGS. 96(g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). Moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon that was executed, and then displayed the digestion icon by the animation of movement of the digestion icon that was executed when the second special figure 1 variation game started Move to the fourth region of the region i.

  The digestion icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 96(g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). Move to the second area of the digestion icon display area i by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed, and then display the digestion icon by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed at the start of the second special figure 1 variation game started. Move to the third region of the region i.

  The variation icon f3 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIGS. 96(g) and (h) is executed with the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). By moving animation between the fluctuation and digestion icons, the digestion icon j3 becomes the digestion icon display area i and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The animation moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i.

  In FIG. 96(g), (h), the hold icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). It was changed to fluctuating icon f4 (not shown) due to the movement animation between the hold and fluctuating icons that was moved to the fluctuating icon display area b, and then was executed with the start of the second special figure 1 fluctuating game that was started. The moving/digest icon movement animation results in the digest icon j4, which moves to the first region of the digest icon display area i.

  In FIG. 96(g), (h), the hold icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). Between the hold/fluctuation icons executed by the start of the second special figure 1 variation game that was started by moving to the first area of the special figure 1 retention icon display area c by the executed animation of movement of the hold icon. The moving animation results in a variable icon f5 that moves to the variable icon display area b.

  FIG. 96(j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variation game has ended from the state shown in FIG. 96(h). The special judgment 1 variation game result of the variation game is out. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 1" -Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 96(k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 96(j). In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 96 is not executed. In accordance with the winning, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, the increase animation of the holding icon is started, and the holding icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased holding is the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c. It is displayed in such a manner that it gradually rises from below toward. In this example, the suspension of the special icon 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variation game is started during the execution of the increase animation of the suspension icon, so the increase animation of the suspension icon is stopped and the movement between the suspension and variable icons is stopped. Animation starts. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 96(l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative pattern is executed on the second display device 802, and the white special pattern 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. The fourth symbol for use is displayed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon and a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons are executed.

  In this example, up to four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. When the movement animation of the digestion icon is started in a state where the four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, the animation is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the movement animation of the digestion icon. The digest icon is moved to the right, and the digest icon is gradually erased in a mode of moving toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, the digestion icon movement animation is executed, whereby the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region c in FIG. 96(j) moves to the right, and the digestion icon j1 becomes It is gradually erased in such a manner that it moves toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. Further, since the animation of moving the digestion icon is executed, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon display area is displayed. The digestion icon j3 displayed in the second region of i moves to the third region of the digestion icon display region i. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(l), the digestion icon j1 is erased, the digestion icons j2 and j3 have been moved, and the animation of the digestion icon has ended. In this example, the digestion icon j1 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is deleted without the notice effect being executed.

  By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f5 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 96(j) becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

  In addition, during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game, two game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 2, and the increase animation of the holding icon is started, and 1 piece is held. The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased in accordance with the winning of the eye is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the lower side toward the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c, and is displayed in accordance with the second winning. The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the lower side toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. At the time shown in FIG. 96(l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended. The display modes of the hold icons g6 and g7 are default display modes.

  FIG. 96(m) continuing from FIG. 96(l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit determination result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 6" -Decoration 7" is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  96(n) continuing from FIG. 96(m), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 96(n), the digestion icon j2 has been erased, the digestion icons j3, j4, and j5 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

  By executing the moving animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f6 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 96(m) becomes the digestion icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time point shown in FIG. 96(n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

  By executing the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 96(m) becomes the change icon f7 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(n), the movement of the variable icon f7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 96(m) moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To do. At the time shown in FIG. 96(n), the movement of the hold icon g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 96(o) subsequent to FIG. 96(n) shows a state in which the display mode of the digestion icon j4 is changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digestion icon j4 after the change of the display mode is displayed as a notice icon.

  96(p) subsequent to FIG. 96(o) shows a state in which a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a look-ahead announcement effect. In this example, the hold of the prefetching notice object is the hold of special figure 1 corresponding to the hold icon g7 (holding of special figure 1 with the first holding order), and the change animation of the hold icon corresponds to the hold of the prefetch notice object. This is executed in order to change the display mode of the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon g7) to be executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken image k (hereinafter referred to as “shuriken k”) toward the hold icon g7 that is the display mode change target. A moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 96(p) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not overlap the shuriken k and is not displayed. At the time point shown in FIG. 96(p), the shuriken k has hit the holding icon g7.

  FIG. 96(q) subsequent to FIG. 96(p) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 96(r) subsequent to FIG. 96(q) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that is displayed by overlapping the entire hold icon g7 is deleted, the entire hold icon g7 whose display mode is changed to a blue circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change animation of the hold icon ends. In addition, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to blue prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In other words, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. It should be noted that the light emission color of the production movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time as the termination icon change animation ends, or the light emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the termination icon change animation ends. May change. In other words, at the same time that the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue, or the effect becomes after the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the look-ahead notice effect, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes. The effect of changing the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the hold icon. Note that the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the look-ahead notice effect when the hold icon change animation is executed may be at least one effect movable object of effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810.

  In this example, a change animation of the hold icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon g7 by the digestion icon j4 in the display mode of the ninja pattern is executed. In FIGS. 96(o) to 96(r), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a prefetching notice display. The change animation of the hold icon is only the display of the effect image 872 and the deletion of the effect image 872. The animation of the scene in which the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is the animation for changing the hold icon. May be

  FIG. 97(a) continuing from FIG. 96(r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular frame image. When the decorative pattern is an odd number, the frame image is displayed in red and the decorative pattern is an even number. In some cases, the inside of the frame image is displayed in blue. The display pattern of the decorative pattern includes the display color in the frame image. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading announcement by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbols in odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the pre-reading notice with a combination of odd-numbered decorative patterns is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice with a combination of even-numbered decorative patterns. In other words, the pre-reading notice with a combination of red decorative patterns is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice with a combination of blue decorative patterns. Therefore, when a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols is displayed, a jackpot pattern mode is stopped and displayed in the pattern variation display of the look-ahead notice than when a combination of even (blue) decorative symbols is displayed. Easy to be affected. A combination of odd-numbered, even-numbered, and decorative patterns of the same color is a so-called chance.

  97 (b) continued from FIG. 97 (a), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, and a movement animation between the hold/variation icons are executed. If only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon movement animation is not executed along with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(b), the digestion icon j3 has been erased, the digestion icons j4, j5, and j6 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f7 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 97(a) becomes the digestion icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

  By executing the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 97(a) becomes the change icon f8 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(b), the movement of the variable icon f8 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended.

  97(c) subsequent to FIG. 97(b) shows a state in which a change icon change animation for changing the display mode of the change icon is executed. The change animation aspect of the variable icon in this example is the same as the change animation aspect of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 96(p) to (r). As shown in FIG. 97(c), the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the variable icon f8, and a moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the variable icon f8. The arrow in FIG. 97(c) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not overlap the shuriken k and is not displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 96(p), the shuriken k hits the variable icon f8.

  Note that the change animation mode of the variable icon may be different from the change animation mode of the hold icon. For example, in the changing icon change animation, a moving image of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

  FIG. 97(d) subsequent to FIG. 97(c) shows a state in which a change icon change animation is being executed. In the change icon change animation, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the change icon f8 after the shuriken k hits the change icon f8, as in the hold icon change animation. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 97(e) subsequent to FIG. 97(d) shows a state in which the change animation of the change icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that is displayed overlapping the entire variation icon f8 is deleted, the entire variation icon f8 whose display mode has changed to a red circle can be visually recognized again. The change icon change animation ends when the effect image 872 is deleted. In addition, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red prior to the end of the change icon change animation. In other words, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from blue to red before the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again. Note that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time when the change icon change animation ends, or the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red after the change icon change animation ends. May change. In other words, at the same time that the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red, or after the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. In this way, when the change icon change animation is executed, the display color of the change icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the notice effect of the change, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change icon change animation. Even if the effect movable body whose emission color changes as a notice effect of the change when the change icon change animation is executed is at least one of the effect movable bodies 806, 808, 810. Good.

  In this example, a change icon change animation is performed in which the display mode of the change icon f8 is changed by the digest icon j4 in the display mode of the ninja pattern. 97(b) to (e), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a notice display of the change. The animation for changing the hold icon is an animation for only displaying the effect image 872 and erasing the effect image 872. The animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is for changing the variable icon. It may be an animation. In this example, the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display and then also as a notice of the change.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 96(e) and 96(f) after the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 96(b) to 96(d). Is. The first display device 800 can display the variable icon f1 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d), and the icon displayed as the variable icon f1 is shown in FIG. 96(e). ), (f) can be displayed as the digestion icon j1 in the variable display of the decorative pattern. The digestion icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digestion icon display area i in which the digestion icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the variable icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the symbol variation display is stopped in the symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the previous symbol variation display is displayed as the notice icon in the next symbol variation display. Since it can be displayed as, there is a case where it is possible to expect the variable display of symbols immediately after the deviation.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the variable icon f2 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIGS. 96(e) and 96(f). The first display device 800 can display both the variation icon f2 and the digestion icon j1.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the variable icon f4. The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as the first display mode. This is a display mode. The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

  The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8 (for example, a change icon change animation).

  Note that one of the plurality of display modes of the digestion icon is, for example, a display mode of a banquet character pattern (display mode of the hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 97 (e) described later). The digest icon of the gray Bancho character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon). It is an icon related to a change (for example, a change icon change animation).

  The display mode of the bancho character pattern may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the ninja character pattern. For example, when the notice icon of the display mode of the banquet character pattern is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is stopped in the variable display of the pattern of the notice object than when the notice icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. It may be easily displayed.

  In this example, by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i becomes the second area in the digestion icon displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i so as to be pushed out from the second area, Display of the first display device 800 such that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is pushed from the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i. Erased from area.

  In this example, by executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area is changed from the third area to the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c. Move to be pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is moved to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c so as to be pushed out from the second area, and is held. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c moves to the variable icon display area b so that the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is pushed out from the first area. ..

  As described above, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in the animation mode in which the icon is pushed to the icon in the adjacent area and moves to the area opposite to the adjacent area.

  In the present embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, and the movement animation between the hold/variation icons are executed, they are displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. When the digested icon is pushed out by the digested icon displayed in the third region of the digested icon display area i to be erased, when the variable icon becomes the digested icon, and when the hold icon becomes the varied icon. And are the same. Note that these three timings may be different, and the order can be set arbitrarily. Two of the three timings may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon rises from below, but may be executed in a manner in which the hold icon descends from above.

  The effect of displaying the variable icon as the digestion icon or the notice icon after the next symbol variable display is executed only in the non-electric power support state. For this reason, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons are executed only in the non-electric support state. It should be noted that the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons may be executed without fail in the electric power support state.

  Note that the number of digestion icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In the present embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 changes in FIG. 96(o), but the display mode of at least one digestion icon j3, j5, j6 along with the digestion icon j4. May change. The case where the display mode of many digestion icons changes at one time may be easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol in the pattern change display of the notice target than the case where only the display mode of one digestion icon changes. In this case, it may be possible to entertain the player with lively productions with a relatively high jackpot reliability. On the contrary, when only one digestion icon display mode changes, the big hit symbol is confirmed in the pattern variation display of the notice object, rather than when many digestion icon display modes change at once. It may be easy to be displayed. In this case, it may be possible to give the player an impression of the digestion icon displayed as the notice icon by changing the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display in FIGS. 96(m) to 97(a), the notice-pending hold is the hold of Toku-zu 1 having the first holding order (Hold 1 of Toku-zu 1). When the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is a notice object, the icon indicating the notice variable display of the notice object is displayed as a hold icon in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the change icon display There are two opportunities to change the display mode (promotion to a display mode with high jackpot reliability) compared to the case where the area is displayed as a variable icon. 96(o) to 97(a), the digestion icon j4 as a notice icon is displayed in the third region of the digestion icon display region i, and in FIGS. 97(b) to 97(e) as a notice icon. The digestion icon is displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region i, and the digestion icon j4 can be displayed over the two symbol variable displays. Since the change animation of the hold icon or the variable icon is executed only once in one symbol variable display, the digestion icon as the notice icon related to the change animation is displayed over the two symbol variable displays. In this case, it may be possible to predict that the symbol variable display next to the symbol variable display at the time when the display of the digestion icon is started is the subject of advance notice.

  For example, in the case where the notice-targeted hold is the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order (hold-down 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the notice variable design is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in the display mode three times when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and as a change icon in the change icon display area b (display with high jackpot reliability) There is an opportunity of promotion to the mode). The digestion icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, the digestion icon is displayed over the three symbol variation displays, so the third variation display including the symbol variation display that is being executed when the digestion icon is started is the subject of advance notice. Sometimes it can be predicted.

  As described above, it may be possible to predict the target change of the prefetching notice by the display start position of the digestion icon as the notice icon. Note that the greater the chances of promotion of the icon display mode, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In some cases, the jackpot reliability can be suggested by the number of times of promotion of the icon display mode.

  For example, in the case where the notice-targeted hold is the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order (hold-down 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the notice variable design is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in the display mode three times when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and as a change icon in the change icon display area b (display with high jackpot reliability) There is an opportunity of promotion to the mode). The digestion icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region i. Thereby, since the digestion icon is displayed over the one-time symbol variable display, it may be possible to predict that there is only one opportunity to promote the display mode of the icon.

  It should be noted that the digest icon as the notice icon can be displayed in the first to fourth areas of the digest icon display area i regardless of whether the notice target is held. It should be noted that the digest icon as the notice icon can be associated with the promotion of the icon display mode up to four times when the display is started in the first region of the digest icon display region i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has five opportunities for promotion in the display mode, and one digestion icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can't. The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c may not be the target of the change animation of the hold icon (the target of promotion of the display mode).

  The display on the first display device 800 in the present embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97(f). FIG. 97(f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed on the second display device 802, and the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. It is displayed. A white circular variation icon f1 is displayed in the variation icon display area b.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97(f), the game state is the non-electric power support state, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 2. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “4” and “2”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the display area for displaying the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not provided in the non-electric power support state, and when the hold of the special figure 2 is 1 or more in the non-electric power support state, In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97(f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the special figure 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold in the special figure 1, and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon m2 corresponding to the hold 2 in the special figure 2 is displayed in the area c, and is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold in the special figure 1 and is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To be done. For this reason, a part of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 becomes invisible. The hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display mode. The display mode of the white square is the default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1.

  As described above, in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1. In other words, in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed without overlapping the hold icon corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 2.

  The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol variation display executed when the corresponding hold is exhausted, and the digest icon or the notice in the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display. Not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is erased at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, when the hold of the special figure 2 which remains at the end of the electric support is consumed after the end of the electric support, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol variable display. , It is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon in the next symbol variation display.

  In addition, in the non-electric power support state, when the holding of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the game information display area a is erased, and the digestion icon and special figure 1 Is also erased, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area is separately provided in the display area of at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804. May be In addition, in the non-electric power support state, when the suspension of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the digestion icon or the notice icon may be deleted.

  By using a device that distributes the prizes to the game balls to the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 for each ball in the non-electric power support state, the starting port winning is possible with the maximum number of holding 8 In the forward change configuration, a maximum of 8 hold icons and digest icons can be displayed, so if you mistake the digest icon for a reserve icon, the number of reserve icons looks like 16 and the maximum reserve number is It may be mistaken for 16 pieces. This may give the player a fresh feeling. In addition, in the electric power support state, the holding icon and the digestion icon of Toku-zu 1 are not displayed, so the maximum number of holdings may appear to be four.

  In addition, a maximum of four hold icons and special digest icons of Toku-zu 1 can be displayed. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two, one area is displayed a variable display of a decorative icon corresponding to the hold icon and special figure variation game, to perform the effect, the other A fake effect may be executed by displaying a variable display of a fake decorative design not corresponding to the digestion icon and the special figure variation game in the area. The fake effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG. 94.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97(A) to (E). Each of FIGS. 97(A) to 97(E) is a diagram showing the effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 97A to 97E, the game state is a non-electric power support state. FIG. 97(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". In this example, the pre-reading notice target is the suspension of special figure 1 having the second suspension order.

  On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. In the digestion icon display area i, digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed. The display modes of the digestion icons j1 to j4 are default display modes of gray circles. In the variable icon display area b, the variable icon f5 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The variation icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed not only in the digestion icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. When the icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed in the variable icon display area b or the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In this example, the variable icon f5 is used as a pre-reading advance notice display for the reservation of the special figure 1 having the second reservation order.

  FIG. 97(B) continuing from FIG. 97(A), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(B), the digestion icon j1 has been erased, the digestion icons j2, j3, and j4 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

  By executing the moving animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f5 displayed in the variation icon display area b becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended. The digestion icon j5 is displayed with the same display size as the variation icon f5. As described above, the icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern has the same display size when it is displayed as the variable icon and when it is displayed as the digestion icon. The digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray at the same time when the digestion icon j5 starts moving to the first region of the digestion icon display region i, or may be changed to gray during the movement to the first region. It may be changed to gray at the same time when the movement to the first area is completed, or may be changed to gray after the movement to the first area is completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 97(B), the movement of the change icon f6 is completed, and the movement animation between the change/digest icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 97(B), the movement of the hold icon g6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 97(C) subsequent to FIG. 97(B) shows a state where a change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 97(C), the shuriken k thrown by the digestion icon j5 hits the holding icon g6. The icon displayed as the variable icon in FIG. 97(A) may be used as a notice effect after it becomes a digestion icon.

  FIG. 97D subsequent to FIG. 97C shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The icon (in this example, the hold icon g6) corresponding to the symbol variable display of the notice target may change the display mode when it is displayed as the hold icon.

  FIG. 97E continuing from FIG. 97D shows a state where the change animation of the hold icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon g6 is erased, the entire hold icon g6 whose display mode has changed to a red circle becomes visible again. In addition, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to red prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the look-ahead notice effect, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the change icon as a notice icon that gives a notice other than the change. Note that the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon that gives notice of a hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order. The icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice display of the variation in the variation icon display area b, and may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. is there.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to 97(e). 97A to 97E are diagrams showing the present production example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 97A to 97E, the game state is a non-electric power support state. FIG. 97(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. On the first display device 800, a decorative pattern of a combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed on the second display device 802, and the fourth symbol for white special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. Moreover, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digestion icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digestion icon is not displayed. Further, the variable icon display area n of the present embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image unlike the variable icon display area b in the above-described embodiment, and the variable icon display position is provided at the bottom of the variable icon display area n. The horizontally long rectangular pedestal image shown is displayed. Further, in FIG. 97 (A), the variable icon f1 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The variable icon f1 is displayed in color. The change icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon for giving notice of the hold of the special map 1 having the first hold order.

  FIG. 97 (i) continuing from FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed from a white circle to a display mode of a long-length character picture. The display mode of the Bancho character pattern is a display mode of a pre-reading notice. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 changes, a change icon change animation including a scene in which the change icon f1 throws a shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. An animation may be displayed in which the Ninja character of turns to the hold icon g1. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 changes, an animation including the moving image of the variable icon f1 may be displayed, and the change icon f1 may be associated with the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1.

  FIG. 97 (u) continuing from FIG. 97 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result relating to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". The hold of the pre-reading notice target is the hold of special figure 1 having the first hold order.

  97 (e) which continues from FIG. 97 (u), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative pattern and the variation display of the mini decorative pattern are started. The state is shown. In addition, the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, in this example, in addition to the movement animation between the variation icons, the movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon, the movement animation of the variation icons is executed.

  By executing the moving animation of the variable icon, the variable icon f1 moves from the center of the variable icon display area n to the right side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variation icon related to the change display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area n even after the end of the corresponding special figure variation game. At the time point shown in FIG. 97E, the movement of the variable icon f1 has been completed, and the moving animation of the variable icon has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area n. At the time point shown in FIG. 97E, the movement of the variable icon f2 has been completed, and the movement animation between the variable/digested icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 97E, the movement of the hold icon g2 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  In this embodiment, two variable icons may be displayed in the variable icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 97E, the variation icon f1 is displayed in the upper right portion of the pedestal image in the variation icon display area n, and the variation icon f2 is displayed in the upper left portion of the pedestal image. The variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 are displayed in different areas in the variable icon display area n so that one of them does not overlap the other. Note that a part of one of the variable icons f1 and f2 may overlap with a part of the other icon. A character string image of "co-fighting" is displayed above the variable icons f1 and f2, and the variable icon f1 of the ninja character pattern and the variable icon f2 of the banquet character pattern give advance notice of the change. Executed. In this way, the variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 may be integrally displayed and function as one variable icon. Note that, in FIG. 97 (e), the change icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digestion icon. The variable icon corresponding to the symbol variable display shown in FIG. 97(E) may be only the variable icon f2.

  As in this embodiment, the two icons may be integrally displayed as one variable icon. When two icons are displayed integrally as one variable icon, the jackpot pattern mode is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display being executed than when one icon is displayed as one variable icon. Good.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed on the second display device 802, and the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. It is displayed. A white circular variation icon f1 is displayed in the variation icon display area b.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97(a), the game state is a non-electric power support state, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons g1 and g2 are default display modes.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a horizontally elongated rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 92(a) is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. .. In the display area e, it is possible to display, as character string images, a tutorial display or a notice display such as a description of a game method, effect contents, or a character description. In FIG. 97(A), the tutorial display is executed by displaying the character string image of "Due to the announcement of the notice icon..." In the display area e.

  The notice icon o is displayed in an overlapping manner on the upper portion of the character string image of "notice" in the display area e. The display mode of the notice icon o is a character pattern of a swordsman. The icon displayed as the variation icon is displayed as the notice icon o after the end of the corresponding special figure variation game (symbol variation display). In this example, the notice icon o is an icon displayed as a variation icon in the special figure 1 variable game one time before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. 97(A). Note that the notice icon o may be the icon displayed as the variation icon in the special figure 1 variable game two or more times before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. 97(A). The notice icon o may be a swordsman character pattern or may be in a circular display mode of a predetermined color during the period in which it was displayed as a variable icon. The notice icon of this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. 62(i). The notice icon of this example may be displayed as the notice icon shown in FIG. 18. For example, the pseudo-relationship effect may be executed when the notice icon of this example is consumed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be applied to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 17 to 91.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97 again.

(C1)
Display means (for example, generic name of first display device 800, second display device 802, third display device 804, special figure 1 display device 212)
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means (for example, at least one display device among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212).
Is a symbol variable display (hereinafter, "first symbol variable display" (for example, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of special figure 1, variable display of mini decorative symbol, shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d)). After the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display ended in FIG. 97(A), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 97(A) to (U).), the next symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol"). "Variable display" (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special symbols, variable display of mini decorative symbols, symbol variable display shown in FIGS. 96(e) and (f), and FIG. 97(B) to (E)) It is a means capable of displaying the symbol variation display shown, and the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 97 (E).
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first variation icon” (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d), figure A variable icon f5 shown in FIG. 97(A) and a variable icon f1 shown in FIGS. 97(a) to (u)) can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variation icon (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d), variation icon f5 shown in FIG. 97(A), and FIGS. 97(a) to (u)). The variation icon f1) shown in FIG. 9 is a notice icon (for example, the digestion icon j1 shown in FIGS. 96(e) and (f), the digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 97(B) to (E)) in the second symbol variation display. , The variable icon f1) shown in FIG. 97E is configured to be displayed,
The area in which the notice icon is displayed (for example, the notice icon display area i) is a different area from the area in which the first variable icon is displayed (for example, the variation icon display area b).
A game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if the deviating symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the first symbol variable display, in the next second symbol variable display, the first symbol variable display is displayed. Since the corresponding variable icon can be displayed as the notice icon, there may be a case where the second symbol variable display immediately after the departure can be expected.

(C2)
The gaming machine described in C1 above,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second variation icon” (for example, variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 96(e) and (f), figure 97 (B) to (E), which is referred to as a variable icon f6).
The second fluctuation icon (for example, fluctuation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 96(e) and (f), fluctuation icon f6 shown in FIGS. 97(B) to (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 96(e) ), and the digestion icon j1 shown in (f) and the digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 97(B) to (E) are both displayable (for example, FIGS. 96(e), (f), and FIG. 96). 97(A) to (E)),
A game table characterized by that.

(C3)
The gaming table described in C1 or C2,
The icon displayed as the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 96(l) to (r) and FIG. 97(a)) is changed to the change icon (for example, the change icon f8 shown in FIG. 97(b)). Can be displayed,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a gray circular display mode and a gray ninja character pattern display mode).
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray ninja character pattern),
The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, digestion icon j4 shown in FIGS. 96(o) to (r), 97(a) to (e), digestion shown in FIGS. 97(B) to (E)) Icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 96(l) to (r), FIG. 97(a), hold icon g6 shown in FIGS. 97(B) to (E)). (For example, see FIGS. 96(p) to (r) and FIGS. 97(C) to (E)),
A game table characterized by that.

(C4)
The gaming machine described in C3 above,
The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, the digestion icon j4 shown in FIGS. 96(o) to (r) and 97(a) to (e)) is the variation icon (for example, FIG. 97(b). ) Is a icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8) (for example, a change animation of the variable icon),
A game table characterized by that.

(C5)
The gaming table described in C3 or C4,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray bancho character pattern),
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon),
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon (for example, a change animation of the variable icon),
A game table characterized by that.

(C6)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C5,
The display mode of the notice icon (for example, the display color is gray) is different from the display mode of the variable icon (for example, the display color is a color other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color)),
A game table characterized by that.

(C7)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C6,
It is possible to display an animation including a movement of the notice icon (for example, a movement animation between fluctuation/digestion icons, a movement animation of a digestion icon),
A game table characterized by that.

(C8)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C7,
The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is configured to include an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game table characterized by that.

(C9)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C8,
In the non-electric power support state, the icon displayed as the first variable icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(C10)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

  The display modes of the hold icon, the variable icon, and the notice icon may be different from each other, the display modes of the hold icon and the change icon are the same, and the notice icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and the change icon. The notice icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the change icon.

  The display state of the variable icon and the notice icon are the same, the hold icon may be different from the change icon and the notice icon only in color, and the hold icon may be different from the change icon and the notice icon in color and shape. You may.

  Note that the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon are the same, the variable icon may be different from the hold icon and the notice icon only in color, and the change icon may be different from the hold icon and notice icon in the color and shape. You may.

  An animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon may be executed by the hold icon. The hold icon may be an icon associated with a change in the display mode of the digestion icon. On the contrary, even if the animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon is not executed by the hold icon. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon.

  An animation may be executed by the digest icon to change the display mode of the digest icon different from the digest icon. The digestion icon may be an icon associated with a change in the display mode of the digestion icon different from the digestion icon.

  The special icon variation game is being executed (the symbol variation display is being performed), and after the display suggesting the deviation (for example, the temporary stop display of the deviation pattern) is executed, the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is the ninja. It may be changed to a character pattern such as a character or a bancho, and may be displayed as a notice icon after the end of the variable display of the symbol.

  The digestion icon may return to the default display mode after the end of the notice effect related to the digestion icon (for example, the change animation of the hold icon or the change animation of the variable icon). The digestion icon that has finished the role of production may return to the default display mode. Note that the ninja character pattern hold icon does not return to the default display mode even after the effect of changing another hold icon, a variation icon, or a digestion icon is executed by the ninja character pattern hold icon.

  At least a part of the effect is the same as the effect that changes the display mode of the notice icon, and other effects (for example, the change of the display mode of the hold icon, the acquisition of the mini item (notice icon), the stop of the middle symbol) It is feasible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described first to ninth embodiments uses the first display device 8 as the display means.
00, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but the pachinko machine 100 may include only the first display device 800 among these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above-described production example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In Examples 1 to 9, the display on the first display device 800 may be displayable on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804, The display on the second display device 802 may be displayable on at least one of the first display device 800 and the third display device 804, or the display on the third display device 804 may be. It may be possible to display on at least one of the first display device 800 and the second display device 804. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described Examples 1 to 9 has a first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 62 instead of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 as display means. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above-described effect example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The first decorative pattern display device 208L, the second decorative pattern display device M, and the third decorative pattern display device 208N shown in FIGS. 62 to 91 are the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. , May be displayed on the third display device 804. The game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) section in FIG. 62(a). The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.

  The matters described in the first to ninth embodiments can be combined.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107.

  98 to 107 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 98 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 98 to 107 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are combined as the effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 98 to 107, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of the light irradiation plate. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 98 to 107, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect of the mini game applicable to this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 98(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being accommodated in a rectangular hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal for the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 98(a), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the three hold icons h11, h12, h13 all have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is displayed, and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 98(a), no display is made and it is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and it is informed that it is lost. There is. The UI unit is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. In addition, the UI unit may be always displayed, or may be displayed for a certain period.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 98(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a loss. It has been reported.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

  In addition, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. In addition, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 98(b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is stored in the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 98(b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord's character is explained. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. The timing may be before the start of display. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(c), the second hold icon h12 of the special drawing 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the button hold icon. In the present embodiment, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to be always performed at the same timing after the symbol variable display is started, or may be configured to be different in some cases. Good. Further, the speaker 120 may output a voice at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(c), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the operation is not validated, and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed. However, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid. The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(d), the effect of the mini game is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the mini game is started, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a manner showing the result of "1", and above it, The explanation of the mission of the mini game is displayed. In the mission explanation display shown in FIG. 98(d), the display of "button push" and the display of "3" on the dice are displayed together with the display of "dance chance", and the mini game starts. After that, it is explained that if the production button 136 is operated and the result of the dice “3” is stopped and displayed, something good will happen. In this example of performance, the mini game is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In other words, the display area in which the mini game is executed is a liquid crystal frame configured by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is partitioned by the (bezel).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98(e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the symbols on the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time elapsed since the mini game started. The button reception time meter may not be displayed. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 98, when the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

  Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 98(f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 98(g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays dice symbols. Is stopped and displayed, while the hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is not changed in display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 98(g), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of "3", and the fact that the mission is achieved is notified.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "Hold 1UP" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. That is, it is announced in advance that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be upgraded by one step. In other words, it can be said that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of a big hit notice. It should be noted that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of a big jackpot announcement, so it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. Also, at the timing when the mini game ends, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the change display of the hold icon starts. At this time, a button reception time meter may be displayed. FIG. 98(i) shows that the mission achievement rewards are still displayed. Further, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 remains in the display mode of the button hold icon.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 98(j), as shown in FIG. 98(k), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon becomes a circular blue display mode. Change. That is, the display mode of the prefetch notice has changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green, and red, and the reliability of the big hit is higher in the order of red>green>blue. .. In other words, when the circular and red hold icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the circular and green hold icon is displayed. When the green hold icon is displayed in, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the circular blue hold icon is displayed. When the hold icon in the display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, in this production example, by operating the production button 136, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the blue display mode which is the first stage rank of the prefetch notice, but the green The hold icon may be changed to the display mode of or the display mode of red. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button holding icon may be displayed in an aura-like manner so that the holding icon can be expected to change to a display mode with a higher rank.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(l), the display of "holding 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and becomes a blue display mode. A state is shown in which the second holding icon h12 of the changed special figure 1 is headed. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of “Hold 1UP” starts moving is the timing after the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes, but it may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of "Hold 1UP" starts to move is within the same symbol variable display as the symbol variable display in which the display mode of the pending icon h12 has changed, but the display mode of the pending icon h12 changes. The symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display may be in execution.

  After that, when the display of "Hold 1UP" overlaps the second hold icon h12 of Toku-zu 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to green, as shown in FIG. 98(m). That is, the result of the mini game is reflected, and it is produced that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon h12 is increased by one step. Even if the display of "hold 1UP" overlaps the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 98(n), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the mini game mission is announced to announce that the display mode of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be upgraded by one step. However, for example, the mini game mission is achieved. As a result, one of the mini items shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 72(d) may be stocked, and the contents of the effect (preliminary effect) to be performed thereafter may be announced, or timer stock may be performed. May be. Here, the timer stock is, for example, one form of advance notice that displays a timer and suggests that a special effect is started when the time indicated by the timer has elapsed. Further, as a result of the mission of the mini game being completed, a rare item that is not related to the result of the success/failure determination may be acquired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game is started at the timing after the hold icon is changed to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change effect of the hold icon is started, but the mini game is started. The change effect of the hold icon may be started later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the change effect of the hold icon is performed and the period during which the mini game is performed are made to overlap, but the periods may not be made to overlap, for example, a certain symbol variation. The mini game may be started after a change effect of the hold icon is performed in the display and the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, blue display mode). That is, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display while the blue hold icon is displayed. This also applies to the following description.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a reward for the achievement of the mission of the mini game, a notice is given that the hold icon changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice will be ranked up by the change effect of the button hold icon. As a reward for the achievement of the mini game mission, a change effect of the button hold icon may give an advance notice that the hold icon will change to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the look-ahead notice may be announced. Further, it may be possible to give a notice that a change effect of the button hold icon will be performed.

  Further, in this example of production, the mini game is played on the sub liquid crystal (second decorative symbol display device 208M), but it may be played on the main liquid crystal (first decorative symbol display device 208L).

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 99(a) to 99(j) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(j), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 99(j), as shown in FIG. 99(k), the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It changes to a circular green display mode, and the display of "hold 1UP" is erased in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As described above, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 causes the change of the hold icon in the display mode of the button hold icon and the change in the display mode of the hold icon due to the achievement of the mini game mission at the same time. .. That is, in this effect example, as a change in the display mode of the hold icon by the change effect of the button hold icon to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the prefetch notice, and as a reflection of the result of achievement of the mission of the mini game. The pre-reading notice rank of the display mode of the hold icon is being simultaneously increased.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the effect of the mini game. Since FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b), the description thereof will be omitted.

  Unlike FIG. 98(c), in FIG. 100(c), the change icon of the hold icon is not started, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 remains in the default display mode. Thereafter, the effect of the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 100(d), and the mini game is executed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 98(d) to (h) (FIG. 100(d) to FIG. 100(d)). The same figure (h)).

  When the timing shown in FIG. 100(i) is reached in a state where the change effect of the hold icon is not started, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 changes to a blue display mode on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the display mode changes to the first-stage display mode of the prefetch notice. That is, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon is not changed by the change effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon, and only the change of the display mode of the hold icon is reflected as a result of achievement of the mini game mission. Has been done.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of the mini game step by step. Note that FIGS. 101(a) to 101(l) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(l), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 101(l), the display of "holding 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of "holding 1UP" is displayed. When it overlaps with the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 101(m), the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to red, and the reliability of the prefetching notice increases by two levels. ing. In this example of performance, the advance notice reliability was predicted to be one step higher in rank as a result of achievement of the mini game mission, but the result is more advantageous than the preview content (preread notice reliability is increased to two steps). Is reflected.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 101(n), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

  In the present embodiment, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and then the mission achievement result of the mini game is displayed. As a reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is further changed. However, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a display mode of two or more ranks of prefetch notice, and then the mini game You may make it further rank up the display mode of a hold icon as a reflection of the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is the highest rank display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, a red display mode, or a premier display mode for predicting the jackpot confirmation (for example, rainbow). If the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even if the rank increase of the display mode of the hold icon is announced as a result of achievement of the mission of the mini game. Further, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the result of achievement of the mission of the mini game.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 102(a) to 102(e) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 102(f) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 102(g). indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, changes to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notice. .. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, the effect is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 98(k) to (l) (FIGS. 102(h) to (k)).

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 103(a) to 103(c) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, before the effect of the mini game is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 103(d). The slide movement is started in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the left edge of the display region is substantially aligned with the left edge of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the third decorative symbol display device 208N stops at a position where the right edge of the display region is substantially aligned with the right edge of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the mini game is played, and compared with the state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. Therefore, the hold icon h12 is difficult to see. In other words, it can be said that the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation is overlapped with the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation. The change effect of the button holding icon is performed by the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1, and the holding icon h14 of the fourth special drawing 1. In this case, if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps and the first holding icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is used, the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap, but 1 Even when the hold icon h11 of the second special drawing 1 is used, it may be configured to be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 103D, a part of the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the second special figure 1 All of the hold icons h12 may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this effect example, when only one of the notice of change in the display mode of the hold icon and the mini game is being performed, the effects of each other do not overlap, and the hold icon Even when the period in which the display mode change notice is performed and the period in which the mini game is performed do not overlap with each other, the effects do not overlap each other. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display section is compared with the state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The character display displayed on TT1 is difficult to see. Further, the first decorative symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively, and it is difficult to visually recognize, but the middle symbol is It is not overlapped by the display device and is visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 103(e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the effect of the mini game is started as described above with reference to FIG. 98(d).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103(f), the variable display of the symbols on the dice is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 103(g) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 103(h). indicate. The hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is not changed in display mode. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button holding icon is not accepted, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 103(h), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing "3", and it is informed that the mission has been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 103(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "Hold 1UP" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 103(j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is such that the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M has been eliminated, and the hold icon compared to the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible. The timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial positions may be after the mini game ends, or may be returned during the derivation of the mini game results. May be.

  After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 98(j) to 98(n) and described above (FIGS. 103(k) to 103(n)).

  In this example of the effect, the display device on which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed is different from the display device on which the effect of the mini game is effected, and the button by the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the effect of the mini game is effected. Although it is shown that the change effect by the hold icon is overlapped, the display device by which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device by which the effect of the mini game is performed may be the same. In this case, for example, the effect of the mini game may be displayed so as to overlap with the effect of change by the button holding icon.

  Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the change effect by the button holding icon is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the mini game effect is performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A change effect may be performed by the button holding icon on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and a mini game effect may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the change effect by the button holding icon is performed. The effect of the mini game may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M which is displayed.

  Further, when the display device on which the change effect by the button holding icon is performed and the display device on which the effect of the mini game is performed are the same, for example, the change effect by the button holding icon overlaps the effect of the mini game. It may be displayed.

  Further, in this example of production, an example in which the effect of the mini game is overlapped with another effect is shown, but for example, other than a mini game such as a customer waiting demonstration effect or a decorative pattern variable display instead of the effect of the mini game. The effect may be performed, and this effect may overlap other effects. More specifically, for example, the big hit effect is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The effect displayed on the display device 208L may be overlapped. According to this, it may be possible to draw more attention to the effect by performing the effect other than the mini game.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 104(a) to 104(g) are the same as FIGS. 103(a) to 103(g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 104(g) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 104(h). indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the display mode of the button hold icon which is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the effect of the mini game is performed is displayed. The hold icon h12 changes to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notice. That is, in this effect example, the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon overlapping the effect of the mini game are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136. Is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 104(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “Hold 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 104(j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M resolved, and the hold icon compared with the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible.

  After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 102(i) to (k) and described above (FIGS. 104(k) to (l)).

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 105(a) to 105(g) are the same as FIGS. 103(a) to 103(g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 105(g) after the mini game is started, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 105(h), the line is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The dice pattern in the production of the mini game being displayed is not stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the mini game production is being performed. The hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold icon, is changed to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notice. That is, in this effect example, the button operation in the mini game is not accepted, and only the button operation in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapping the effect of the mini game is accepted. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the reception of the button operation in the change effect of the button hold icon is prioritized to the acceptance of the button operation in the mini game.

  After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 105(i). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the effect of the mini game is still continuing, and in order to promote the operation of the effect button 136, the button image 136a is displayed and the gauge of the button reception time meter is decreasing. .. On the other hand, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and is more than the hold icon h12 compared to the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is easy to see.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 105(j), as shown in FIG. 105(k), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol “3” is rolled. The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is notified that the mission has been achieved.

  After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 102(h) to (k) and described above (FIGS. 105(l) to (n)).

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Since FIGS. 106(a) to 106(f) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(f), a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106(f) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 106(g). On the other hand, the hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button reservation icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is not changed while being displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 106(g), the symbols on the dice are stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "1", and it is informed that the result of the mission is not achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 106(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "sorry" to inform that the mission of the mini game has failed. Therefore, in this example of performance, a big jackpot announcement is not given. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily finalized when the mission achievement outcome is derived than when the mission achievement outcome is derived. There is.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106(i), as shown in FIG. 98(j), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the default display mode. .. In other words, it is shown that the change effect of the button holding icon is an effect that does not change to the display mode of the prefetching notice.

  After that, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 106(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 107(a) to 107(e) are the same as FIGS. 98(a) to 98(e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 107(f) shows that the mini game has started but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Therefore, the variable display of the symbols on the dice is continuously performed.

  After that, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 107(g), as shown in FIG. 107(h), the effect of the mini game is not notified and the effect of the mini game ends. To do.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 107(i), as shown in FIG. 107(j), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to a blue display mode. , Look-ahead notice is given.

  After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 107(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

  In the example production shown in FIG. 98, in the mini game, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136, a notice that the mini game mission is achieved and the display mode of the hold icon changes However, in this example of performance, the mission button 136 is not operated in the mini game, so the mission is not achieved, and no notice is given that the display mode of the hold icon changes. Further, in this effect example, since the mission has not been achieved, the effect that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one step is prevented from being performed. However, for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second step. If it is predetermined to do so, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as previously set regardless of the result of the mini game. For example, the hold icon up to the second stage It is decided to change, and after changing the hold icon to the first stage in the change effect of the hold icon of the button, the effect of the mini game is executed so that the result of the mini game is a mission achievement, and the mini game is derived. In the case where it is planned to change the hold icon to the second stage corresponding to the result, even if the result of the mini game is not derived, the hold icon may be finally changed to the second stage. Good. Regarding the change mode, for example, in the change effect of the button hold icon, the hold icon is changed from the button hold icon display mode to the green display mode in the second stage in response to the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode may be changed, or the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the first-stage display mode which is a blue display mode in response to the operation of the effect button 136. After that, during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed, or during the execution of the symbol variation display that is performed after the symbol variation display being executed, the second stage which is a green display mode. The display mode may be changed. In other words, a notice corresponding to the result of execution of the mini game may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, a notice corresponding to the result to be derived is given. It may not be performed. Even in this case, the result of the symbol variable display does not change, so that it is possible to perform an appropriate effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon may be more easily displayed in green when the mini game is played than when the mini game is not played. That is, it can be said that when the mini game is started, the advance notice is more likely to be given in an advantageous manner than when the mini game is not started.

  In this example of performance, when the mini game is started in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode and the result of the mini game is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up. Although not performed, the current state is maintained, but even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded. In this case, the rank may be increased in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed, or may be increased in the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed.

  Further, in this production example, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed has been described as the pre-reading notice mode. However, the pre-reading notice mode can be a known mode such as continuous notice. ..

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 116.

  108 to 116 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 108 to 116, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 108 to 116 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative pattern display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  108 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the holding of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the second holding icon h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani. That is, that is, it is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display is started, one variable icon corresponding to the symbol variable display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(c), the first stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(d), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(e), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then the "decoration 2" -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 108(f), the suspension of special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Variable display has started.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(g), the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order, and in the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps of the display mode. It is displayed. The size of the number of steps indicates that the reliability of the big hit is high or low. For example, if it is displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, the reliability may not be 100% even if it is displayed up to step 5, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when up to step 5 is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, the display size also increases. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 108B(g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(h), the decorative symbol display device 208 updates the step-up notice, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(i), the step-up notice is further updated on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display form of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108(l), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and the screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 in which the mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the effect display of the super reach, and the effect display of the super reach is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. The mini game in this example of the effect is a game whose mission is to repeatedly operate the effect button 136 during the effective operation period to finally derive “Daikichi”. In other words, the mini game in this example of performance requires a plurality of operations of the effect button 136 to derive the result. In FIG. 108(m), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "repeatedly hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and prompts the user to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Daikichi might be a super hot notice", and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. The mini game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108(n), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108(o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108(p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been informed that the acceptance of the repeated hit operation by has been started.

  In FIG. 108(r), it is shown that the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136.

  In FIG. 109(a) subsequent to FIG. 108(r), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number also increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this example of effect, when the player interrupts continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of effect images of stars gradually decreases, but may not be decreased. At the timing shown in FIG. 109(a), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  In FIG. 109(b), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109(b), five effect images of the star are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It has been notified that the possibility that “Nakichi” or “Daikichi” will be derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this example of performance, when the player interrupts the continuous production of the effect button 136, the display of "Kokichi" which has been deleted may be displayed again, but when it is deleted, it is not displayed again. Good.

  In FIG. 109(c), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109(c), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakichi” have been continued. , The button image 136 and the characters “repeatedly hit” are replaced with the characters “2 more seconds” are displayed, indicating that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  In FIG. 109(d), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109(d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 has not been changed, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakichi” have been continued. The display for notifying the operation effective period is "1 second left", and it is informed that the operation effective period is 1 second remaining.

  In FIG. 109(e), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109(e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display notifying the operation valid period, but a predetermined number of effect buttons. It is informed that the display of “Nakichi” has been erased by the operation of 136, and the possibility that “Daikichi” will be derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this example of performance, when the player interrupts continuous hitting of the performance button 136, the display of “Nakichi” which has been erased may be displayed again, but when it is erased, it is not displayed again. Good.

  FIG. 109(f) shows a state in which “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the player continuously performs the streak operation of the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has been completed. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense hot notice may appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of "Daikichi", it may be possible to give a notice that the intense hot notice is always executed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 109(g), the super reach effect is restarted. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109(g), the button notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and "Push" is displayed together with the button image 136a. Is displayed to indicate that the one-time operation of the effect button 136 is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this effect example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which it vibrates and rotates, it is more final than in the case where the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. The jackpot pattern is designed so that it can be easily stopped. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode that neither vibration nor rotation occurs. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect related to the variable display of the decorative pattern). In addition, in this example of the effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly striking the effect button 136 in the mini game and the operation is performed by operating the effect button 136 once in the main effect. However, the effect button is used in both the mini game and the main effect. You may make it produce by the continuous hit operation of 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 109(h), the state that the super reach effect is continuously performed and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed is shown. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109(h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 109(i), the word "Game" is displayed in the balloon together with the up image of the lord's character. A cut-in image including a balloon image with is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of faces (for example, 9) are arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon, and this is the above-mentioned mini-image. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in correspondence with the result of achieving the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “DAIKICHI” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 109(i′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image having a smaller size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the longest face is not arranged around the characters of “Game” in the balloon. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission is not achieved in the mini game. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap the super-reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super-reach is performed more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 109(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). One special figure variation game ends.

  In this production example, the mini-game requires the continuous operation of the production button 136 to achieve the mission, while the main production requires the single operation of the production button 136 in order to make the notice appear. In the mini game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be requested, and in the main effect, some operation may be required to repeatedly hit the effect button 136.

  Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice relating to the symbol variable display as in this example of performance, the execution time of the mini game becomes an execution time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variable display. ..

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 110(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 108(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 110(b), it is shown that the device has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and the screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also performed as described above with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 110(c), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "repeatedly hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and prompts the user to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Daikichi might be a super hot notice", and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, a button operation effect that requires operation of an effect button is started even in the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 110(c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the character "Push" is displayed together with this button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is pressed once. It is shown to facilitate the operation. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period in the main effect has not started and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 and the main effect have some relation to each other.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110(f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110(g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and in the mini game. It is informed that the acceptance of the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this example of effect, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially accepted. The button operation for the main effect overlapping the mini game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

  In FIG. 110(h), a state is shown in which the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110(h), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  In FIG. 110(i), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110(i), the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakichi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been announced that the possibility has increased. The number of effect images of stars displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  In FIG. 110(j), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110(j), five effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, in place of displaying the button image 136 and the character of “continuous hit”, the character of “2 more seconds” is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 110(k) shows a state in which the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 has been interrupted. Then, the effect images of the stars displayed in the mini game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and the number of star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 is 0 at the timing shown in FIG. 110(k). It is shown that it has become. Moreover, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakichi" continues to be displayed, the display notifying the operation valid period is "1 second", and the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. It has been informed.

  FIG. 110(l) shows that the operation valid period in the mini game has passed and “Nakichi” has been derived as the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived when the continuous hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved because the number of operations of the effect button 136 was insufficient. It is due to that.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(m), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is restarted, and the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is displayed. Decrease display is started. This notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 110(n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 110(o). This is displayed based on that the derivation result of the mini game was not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. When it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed, FIG. As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined, regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, if it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 110(p), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a winning screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

  Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 110(q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends. In this way, the result of the win or failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the win or failure is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle may be changed as appropriate, and therefore the operation means ( The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 111(a) is an effect following FIG. 108(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has developed into super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which a mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. .. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to be operated once. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says, "Daikichi will come out and Daikichi will appear super hot." It will be announced that a highly reliable warning will be issued when "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi" and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, informing that the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect requesting the continuous hit operation of the effect button is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with this button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this example of the effect, an effect of requesting a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect of requesting the once operation with the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is requested is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is requested. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 111(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this example of performance, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. The acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. In this example of effect, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, the same operation means (effect button 136) can be operated for both the main effect and the mini game effect. Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the operation acceptance is prioritized is an effect requiring a continuous hit operation and the effect in which the operation acceptance is non-priority is an effect requiring a single operation, the operation means has a continuous hit force. The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is an effect that requires a single operation, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is not prioritized is a continuous hit operation. In the case of the effect to be requested, the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, so that it may be possible to reliably derive the result for the effect to be prioritized.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this example of the effect, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111(i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the continuous hit operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, which makes it difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Mission in progress” for notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed is scrolling from the right end to the left end. This notifies that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed on the condition that the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued. Note that the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

  After that, as a result of continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player, as shown in FIG. 111(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the weak cut-in image CI1b is replaced with the strong cut-in image CI1a. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of achieving the mission in the mini game as described above. In this example of effect, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when it is displayed and full. At this time, if it is determined in advance not to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, the continuous stroke gauge may not be full even if the continuous stroke operation is performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(k), in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to “Mission in progress” and “ The display of "Geki Atsu Notice Appearance" is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a Geki Atsu notice, has been displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(h), the mini game mission is achieved, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to the player canceling the repeated hit operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 111(j′). It may remain. That is, as in this example of performance, even if the mission has been achieved, there may be a case where the law collapses in which the intense hot notice does not appear, depending on the operation status of the performance button 136. Note that, in order to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. You may make it display an intense hot notice. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(l), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 111(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special figure variation game ends.

  As described above, in this example of performance, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in is performed. The image CI1a is not displayed, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this example of performance, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini cut-in image CI1a can be displayed. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" can be derived. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1b can be displayed, the display of "Daiyoshi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this example of effect, in the button repeated operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 does not operate at least the number of times required to display the weak cut-in CI 1b. You can If the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the button repeated hit operation effect in the main effect, or a weak cut-in image. The CI 1b can be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 112(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 108(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112(b), it is shown that the device has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and the screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 112(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. In FIG. 112(c), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "take out Daikichi by repeated hits" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 112(c) has a larger size than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 108(m). However, they may have the same size. Further, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of achievement of the mission may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large size button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small size button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below it is a text display that says "A strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi", and it is announced that a strong cut-in notice with high reliability for a big hit will be generated when "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

  After that, the explanation of the play of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 112(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" is overlapped with the display of "Nakichi", and the display of "Nakichi" is "Kokichi". Is displayed so as to overlap the display of.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 112(e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136. It has been informed that the acceptance of the repeated hit operation by has been started. In addition, a button reception time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the passage of the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In this effect example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

  112(f) to 112(g) show a state where the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini-game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136.

  After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result according to the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 112(h), “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game, and the word “Mission achieved” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

  Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112(i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the achievement of the mission by deriving "Daikichi" as a result of the mini game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 112(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special figure variation game ends.

  On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 112(e), as shown in FIG. 112(f′) to FIG. 112(g′), the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated. However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1, as shown in FIG. 112(h′). As "Kokichi" is derived, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the success/failure determination.

  Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 112(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Miyoshi" was derived and the mission was not achieved as a result of the above-mentioned mini game.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 112(j′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a screen that is defeated is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". It

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 112(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). Then, the variation game of one special figure ends.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 113(a) is an effect following FIG. 108(d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of missing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, the display mode of the prefetching notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 113(b), the suspension of the special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Variable display has started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(c), it is shown that the mission as the main effect has started. Specifically, the character "Mission activation" is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. At the lower edge of the display area, "take out cut-in" and "big hit if it comes out" are displayed together with the image of the face of the length, and the contents of the mission are informed. That is, it is informed that the mission is achieved and the big hit is confirmed if the image of the face of the bancho appears during the mission.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Mission in progress" is displayed to indicate that the mission is continuing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the display of "during mission" continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113(f), the decorative pattern display device 208 provides a display that develops into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Even after developing into super reach, the display of "in mission" continues to be performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 113(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, the mission as the main effect and the mission in the mini game are simultaneously performed. In other words, it is shown that the mission of the main game is overlapped with the mission of the mini game. Here, in this example of performance, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the productions shown in FIGS. 113(g) to 113(l) are shown in FIGS. 112(c) to 112(c) except that the display of “during mission” indicating that the mission is in progress is displayed. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 113(j) to 113(k), a part of the display of “during mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed. The display of "Mission in progress" is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 113(l), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, and after the mission is completed, at the timing shown in FIG. 113(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in notice. The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result that "Daikichi" was derived and the mission was achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "during mission" continues, but the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps with the strong cut-in image CI1a. It is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the CI 1a is not overlapped.

  The strong cut-in image CI1a is, as described above, an image including a balloon formed by arranging a number of long-faced faces around the characters "Game". Therefore, the appearance of the Bancho face, which is a mission in the main production, has been achieved, so that in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(n), the character display of “mission accomplished” is overlaid on the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed by the achievement of the mission in the main effect. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 113(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 113(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special figure variation game ends.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 114(a) to 114(k) are the same as FIGS. 113(a) to 113(k), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 114(l), when "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the mini game, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it, and the mini game mission was not achieved. Is notified. It should be noted that in this example of performance, the result of the hit/miss judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Therefore, in this example of production, in the mini game, Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance that a value other than “Daikichi” is always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 114(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display "Mission in progress" continues to be performed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b overlaps and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, although it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b, the display of "during mission" indicates the strong cut-in image. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, since the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, was not achieved, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(n), the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114(o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". ..

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 114(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). One special figure variation game ends.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 115(a) to 115(i) are the same as FIGS. 113(a) to 113(i), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 115(i), as shown in FIGS. 115(j) to 115(k), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is changed. When the effective operation period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as shown in FIG. 115(l), in the mini game display area MN1, the result of the mini game is “Kokichi”. Is derived, and the word “Mission failed” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. In this example of the effect, the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived as the result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, “Daikichi” is not derived and “Kokichi” is derived. If the mini-game has started but the production button 136 has not been operated at all, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if “Daikichi” is determined to be derivable. .. Further, when it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived, “Daiyoshi” may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 115(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display "Mission in progress" continues to be displayed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the mission result is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, was not achieved, and therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115(n), the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this example of performance, the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and the winning screen is displayed. At the same time, the "decoration 7" that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the approximate center of the ornamental pattern display device 208, and the ornamental pattern "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed. It is informed that the combination will be scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 115(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special figure variation game ends. That is, in this example of performance, the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the mini game is insufficient, and the mission of the mini game fails. Therefore, the mission of the main effect related to this cannot be achieved, but the success or failure is achieved. It is shown that the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 116, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 116(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 108(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and the screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(b), the button operation effect requesting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts continuous hitting of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to be operated once. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur due to the derivation of "Dakichi". That is, the contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of achieving the mission are explained. As described above, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. In addition, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 116(f), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 is moved and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. Note that, in this example of effect, the effect movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit announcement, but, for example, the effect movable object 224 operates to notify that the possibility of achievement of a mission in the mini game is high. Alternatively, it may be announced that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". Further, the display of “Kokichi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the continuous production operation of the production button 136 in the main production is also continuously performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(g), in response to the continuous production operation of the production button 136 in the main production. , A weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with the button image 136a. Note that the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakichi” and “Kokichi” is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, informing that the acceptance of one-time operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect that requires continuous operation of the effect button continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here too, the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing, but when the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game has priority over the operation of 136, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line, for example. Is configured. It should be noted that one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 116(i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as the result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini-game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm 224b of the production movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the character “achievement”. At the timing shown in FIG. 116(i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has elapsed, and the player has finished the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116(j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 116(j), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" indicating that the mini-game mission has been accomplished is easily visible. The timing when the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect ends and the timing when the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position may be the same. Then, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position after the mission in the main effect ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, or the effect movable body 224. After the forearm portion 224b has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(k), a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b is shown. This is displayed as a result of achieving the mission in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although not displayed, if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. You may do it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .. After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the variation game of one special figure ends.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 121.

  117 to 121 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 117 to 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 117 to 121, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 117, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

  FIG. 117(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this effect example, the mini game is played without being divided into regions. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the main character appears from the treasure box, it will switch to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area. The treasure box selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a mini game is played using a plurality of operating means is shown. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is played using a region wider than the effect related to the decorative symbol variable display.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is shown to be the selected treasure box. Further, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and at the timing shown in FIG. 117(b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed. Has been done. Further, FIG. 117(b) also shows a state where the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(c), the cursor CSL that surrounds the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 117(d), as shown in FIG. 117(e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box is selected. The treasure chest image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 117(d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", which shows that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, the treasure box to be opened may be confirmed when the operation valid period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without performing the operation by the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation valid period elapses without any operation, no treasure box is selected and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(f), the character YSM of the main character, Lord, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the appearance that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is shown. As a result, it is announced that the SP reach will be started. The look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(h), it is shown that the SP reach is developed. In this way, in this effect example, in the case where the variation pattern of the decorative design determined based on the result of the win/fail judgment is to shift to SP reach, in the mini game performed before shifting to SP reach, The character YSM of the protagonist, who gives a notice of the shift to SP reach, can be displayed. As a result, it may be possible to give advance notice of the shift to SP reach by causing the lord's character YSM to appear in the mini game.

  In this production example, if the shift to SP reach is determined in advance, the lord's character YSM appears regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected, and the process does not shift to SP reach. If it is determined in advance that the right character treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, the lord's character YSM may not appear. Further, on condition that the transition to SP reach is predetermined, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. In the case of, the lord's character YSM may appear. Further, in the case where a variable time capable of executing SP reach is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. When the lord's character YSM appears, the SP character is developed after that, and when the lord's character YSM appears, the SP reach is developed. However, when the lord's character YSM does not appear, the SP reach is subsequently generated. It may be configured to perform a reach with a smaller hit reliability than a SP reach such as a normal reach until the variation time elapses. In addition, whether or not the lord's character YSM should appear at the timing of selecting the treasure box image may be randomly selected. In addition, even if the lord's character YSM appears, there may be a case where the process does not shift to SP reach. In this case, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a break in the law.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 118, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown.

  FIG. 118(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune comes out" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the hero of the protagonist appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 118(a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and no treasure box image is displayed in a selected state. Has been done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118(b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed in the center right side of the display area. It At the timing shown in FIG. 118(b), “3” indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118(c), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is “2”, and the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, since no treasure box image has been selected yet.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118(d), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is "1", which shows that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, without selecting any treasure chest image.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118(e), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, with no treasure box image selected yet. As a result, none of the treasure boxes is selected, and none of the treasure boxes is opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. 118(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 reaches the reach state. Will be moved to.

  In this example of performance, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if no treasure box is selected, but the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variation time are: Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit/no hit judgment, if no treasure box is selected, SP reach is not performed, for example, reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP reach such as normal reach is executed. You can According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 119, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. Since FIGS. 119(a) to 119(d) are the same as FIGS. 117(a) to 117(d), the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 119(d), as shown in FIG. 119(e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is displayed. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced and displayed. In addition, in this example of production, as shown in FIG. 119(e), an error display of "a game ball is clogged" and "call an attendant" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error. (Notification) has been made, and it has been notified that a ball clogging error, which is a state where gaming balls are clogged in the payout path, has occurred. Specifically, for example, a payout condition for a prize ball or a rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 or the like) is driven, but a payout of a game ball is not detected, and a retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times ( Despite repeated three times, if the payout of the game ball is not detected, a ball clogging error is notified. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is given. In addition, when the elimination of the error which is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout of the game balls is normally performed by the payout device 152), the error notification is erased. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display.

  119(f) to FIG. 119(h) are the same as FIG. 117(f) to FIG. 117(h) except that the error display is performed, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the mini game is continued if it is an error in which the game is not interrupted.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 120, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. In this example of performance, a magnetic detection sensor that detects a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits the magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, and then stops the game to disable the game. Control. After the deactivation, the main control unit main processing (see FIG. 6) is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization processing of step S113 is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120 or causes a predetermined error mode by the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, and the game frame lamp 542, for example. It is possible to blink the lamp and display a predetermined error on the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 119(a) to 119(c) are the same as FIGS. 117(a) to 117(c), description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(c), a state of enclosing the right treasure box image BXR is shown. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  After that, for example, when a player uses a magnet to make a fraud, and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. The magnetic error display ERR including the character "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 117(d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 120(d), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased, and as shown in FIGS. 117(d) to 117(h). However, the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is cut off without visually confirming these effect displays (FIG. 120(d) to FIG. 120(h)). )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 120 is different from the error display shown in FIG. 119 in the area overlapping the effect of the mini game. In other words, it can be said that the effect display of the mini game has a different area overlapped with the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 121(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 108(j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 121(b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state of developing into bowling reach which is one of super reach is shown. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as a main production. When the process moves to bowling reach, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c small in the upper left corner, and the ten pyramid-shaped bowlings are arranged. The effect display that the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is displayed, and the word "Big hit by strike" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area, so if you complete the mission of strike you will be a big hit. It has been informed.

  Thereafter, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121(c) shows that the ball has reached a position close to the ten bowling pins and is about to fall down the bowling pins. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area, and overlaps with at least a part of the effect display of bowling reach. .. In the mini game display area MN1, the explanation display of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 121(c), the "1" of the dice is shown and the "put out" is displayed below the display of the "mini game". It is described that after the start, the effect button 136 is operated to perform a mission to stop the display of the result of "1" on the dice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121(d), a state in which the nine boring pins are tilted is shown. That is, it is shown that one boring pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, a button image 136a is displayed together with the display of “Push”, and it is notified that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, dice symbols may be variably displayed.

  FIG. 121(e) shows a state where the effect button 136 is operated and the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, since the strike does not occur in the bowling reach on the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "sorry" is displayed, and the player is notified that the mission in the bowling reach cannot be achieved and the player will lose. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the production button 136 is operated, and as a result of the mini-game, the result of the dice “1” is stopped and the mission is achieved. The display of "+1" is displayed to notify that the book will collapse.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121(f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the result of the mini game is a roll of "1" and the reward of achievement of the mission is ". After "+1" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 121(g), a state in which one remaining boring pin that has not collapsed collapses and a strike occurs is shown. That is, it is shown that an effect that is a revival jackpot from a loss is being performed.

  After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 129.

  122 to 129 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 122 to 129, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 122 to 129 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative pattern display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1, the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 representing the holding of the special drawing 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-functional display area MF1 partitioned into a substantially rectangular shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can display the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini game effect display, and the like. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is set as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. The hold icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 is displayed and is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the variable icon may be displayed as described above.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(c), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a message "mini-game will start at various timings" is displayed, which suggests when the mini-game will start.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 122(e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is the first special figure 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(f), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th shogun" is displayed, and information regarding the hero's lord is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122(g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(h), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "1" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and the display of "Hold 1UP" is displayed. It is explained that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, the result of the roll of "1" of the dice as a mission is derived, and it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead notification mode. Becomes

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a to notify that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 122(j), as shown in FIG. 122(k), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the result of achieving the mission. The derivation display is performed in a manner showing the result of "1", and the display of "1UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 122(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Note that the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then " Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It is changed to a blue display mode with a circle. Also in this example of performance, the reliability of the jackpot is high in the order of red>green>blue for the hold icon. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  122(g) to (k) may replace the dice game as the mini game described above, and the omikuji game may be started. Here, FIG. 122(g′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 122(f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122(f) is interrupted, and the mini game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 as shown in FIG. 122(g′). Be started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the buncho's face image BCH, and it is notified that the mini game is started. To be done. In this example of performance, the image BCH of the face with the same length is displayed even when different types of mini games are started. In other words, in this effect example, the same character (image BCH of the longest face) can be made to appear and a plurality of types of mini games can be executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122(h′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, “Nakayoshi” and “Hold 1UP” are displayed on the right side of the buncho face image BCH, and in the mini game, “ It is described that, when "Nakichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by one step. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the "Nakichi" fortune as a mission is derived, so that it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notification display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122(i′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. In addition, the mini game in this example of performance does not operate by the operation means such as the effect button 136.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(j′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display of the treasure box image BXS is changed to an open state, and the “Nakichi” fortune is displayed and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. Note that the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 122(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(l′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular blue display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 122, there is shown an example configured such that different types of mini games can be played when the start condition of the mini game is satisfied. In the mini game (dice game), the operation of the effect button 136 is required, in the mini game of the other (omikuji game), no operation by the operation means is required, and further, in any mini game, the display mode is displayed. Are the same (they change the holding icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, FIG. 122 shows an example of an effect in which, in any of the mini-games, the same effect has the same effect on the main effect. In addition, in this effect example, which of the dice game and the fortune-telling game is to be executed may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the omikuji game is executed than when the omikuji game is executed.

  In addition, as in this example of production, in a mini game, a character smaller than a character that appears during execution of variable display of decorative symbols (may be referred to as "small character"), or in production of tutorial display, for example. A character that appears (may be referred to as “navi character”) may appear. It should be noted that these characters may be configured to be displayed in the tutorial display or other notices when the mini game is not performed, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Further, these characters may be constantly displayed. Further, it is preferable that the characters appearing in the mini game and the characters appearing during the variable display of the decorative pattern are visually different. For example, the characters may be different in size, or the 3D character may be deformed. There may be differences in terms of expression, such as the character.

  In this example of performance, the omikuji game (second mini game) may use a larger area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a certain display area (the multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini game is played), and further another display area (the display area of the enlarged portion of the multifunctional display area MF1). ) May also be configured to be used.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIG. 123(a) to FIG. 123(e) are the same as FIG. 122(a) to FIG. 122(e), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(f), it is shown that the advance notice of the mini game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the longest face to give a notice that the mini game is about to start.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123(g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(h), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and "Hold 3UP" is displayed. It is described that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. That is, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the number "3" of the dice as the mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead warning display mode. Becomes Moreover, in this example of performance, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 123(j), as shown in FIG. 123(k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbols are the achievement achievements of the mission. It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 123(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Note that the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  When the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 123(g'), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 displays The "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the face image BCH of "," and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game will be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123(h'), in the multi-function display area MF1, "Daichi" is displayed on the right side of the buncho face image BCH, and "is held 3UP" is displayed. It is described that, when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by three steps. In other words, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the “Daikichi” fortune as the mission, it is announced that the default hold icon will change to the look-ahead notice display icon. Moreover, in this example of performance, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 122.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123(i′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the treasure box image BXS is changed to the open state and the fortune-telling of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 123(k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(l′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 123, the contents of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission can be made different even in the same type of mini game. It should be noted that the mission content may be the same and the reward for achieving the mission may be different, or the content of the mission may be different and the reward for achieving the mission may be the same.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  124(A1) to FIG. 124(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the old lady mode, and FIG. 124(B1) to FIG. 124(B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is. The auntie mode and the princess mode are names of the effect modes, and are configured so that the mode-specific effects are performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the grandmother mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be determined randomly or may be determined based on the game state. For example, in the normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to auntie mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), shift to princess mode. For example, it may be made easier so that the player can guess the current game state.

  FIG. 124(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It has been informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 124(A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Dice game” is displayed along with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this rendering example, the dice game is more likely to be started than the omikuji game in the auntie mode. Here, when executing the mini game in the old mode, the dice game may be always started and the omikuji game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 124(A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 123(h) to 123(l) except that the auntie mode display and the auntie character BA are displayed. , The description is omitted.

  FIG. 124(B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 124(B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho's face, and it is notified that the mini game is started. In this production example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the princess mode, when the mini game is executed, the omikuji game may be started and the dice game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 124(B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 123(h') to (l') except that the princess mode display and the princess character HM1 are displayed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production is shown in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  125(A1) to FIG. 125(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIG. 125(B1) to FIG. 125(B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

  FIG. 125(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(A1), while the display of the "aunty mode" is performed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 125(A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the advance notice executed in the main performance. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is easier to start than the omikuji game as the mini game in the symbol variable display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation. If it is, the omikuji game is configured to be more easily started as a mini game than the dice game in the symbol variable display. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variable display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation, In the variable display of symbols, a fortune game may be started as a mini game without fail. Further, in this example of performance, the type of mini game to be executed is determined without depending on the current effect mode, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125(A2), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and "Hold 3UP" is displayed. It is described that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 125(A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started and the step-up notice SU1 is displayed, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, or after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 may be displayed. The display of "press" may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 125(A4), as shown in FIG. 125(A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbol is the result of achieving the mission. It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 125(A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 125(A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 125 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 125(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho's face, and it is notified that the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(B2), a state is shown in which temporary stop is performed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this example of performance, it is informed that, for example, a pseudo-repeating may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, there is a case where the combination of the decorative patterns of only the “decoration 7” and the “decoration 3” becomes the chance. In addition, you may make it notify about the start of a pseudo-relation by displaying a pseudo-relational pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiyoshi” and “Hold 3UP” are displayed on the right side of the bancho face image BCH, and when “Daichi” is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is explained that the display mode of 3 ranks up. In addition, the timing when the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in “” are started, the decorative design may be provisionally stopped, or after the decorative design is provisionally stopped, “Daiyoshi” in the multi-function display area MF1. The display of “” and the display of “Hold 3UP” may be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125(B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started, and the state in which the pseudo-variable first variable display is performed is shown. Here, the number of times the pseudo-repeating is performed may be displayed. The start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation). May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo-link) may start.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (B4), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display changes to a mode in which the image BXS of the treasure box is open, and the “Daikichi” fortune is displayed and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is temporarily stopped, and it is preliminarily informed that pseudo-linking may be further performed. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derivatized and displayed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. The decorative design may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started, and the pseudo-variable second variable display is shown. It should be noted that the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the timing at which the display of the mission achievement reward are started may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) is started. The display of the reward for achievement of the mission may be started, or the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) may be started after the display of the reward of achievement of the mission is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to a circular red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetching notice. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is definitely displayed, and it is notified that the decorative pattern has been lost. Here, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-link may be further performed. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In this example, the result of the mini game has been described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon. However, as a result of the mini game, it may be announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for completing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-ream is started may be announced in advance, or the increase in the number of pseudo-reams may be notified.

  As a result of the mini game, a step-up notice may be given as a reward for completing the mission, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be given. It may be possible to give a notice that the number will increase.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  126(A1) to FIG. 126(A6) show an example of an effect performed in the old lady mode, and FIG. 126(B1) to FIG. 126(B6) show an example of an effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

  FIG. 126(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 126(A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this effect example, the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed instead of the buncho face image BCH, and the display of the "dice game" is performed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is shown that it is informed that the dice game will be started. The character image SBH of the sabotani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is configured not to be displayed in the omikuji game, but may be displayed in the omikuji game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the dice game is more likely to be advantageous when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this example of performance, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the prefetch notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the first step of the prefetching notification (blue display mode). More specifically, when the character image SBH of Savohani is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the image BCH of the bancho is displayed, and the result of the bancho is When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. Further, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. In addition, FIG. 126(A2) to FIG. 125(A2) are different from FIG. 125(A2) except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the sabotani character image SBH. -Since it is the same as that of the figure (A6), description is abbreviate|omitted.

  FIG. 126(B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 126(B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 126(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the princess character image HM2 is displayed instead of the bancho face image BCH, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2. It is shown that it is informed that the fortune game will be started. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the omikuji game is more likely to be advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared with the case where the bancho face image BCH is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the first stage of the prefetching notification (blue display mode). More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, “Daikichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the bancho face image is displayed. When BCH is displayed, “Nakichi” is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. Note that, as in this example of effect, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character (princess character HM1) displayed in the princess mode is the same as the character (princess character image HM2) displayed in the mini game. Further, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. In addition, FIG. 126 (B2) to FIG. 125 (B6) are different from FIG. 125 (B2) except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  127(A1) to FIG. 127(A6) show an example of an effect performed in a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), and FIG. 127(B1) to FIG. , An example of the effect performed in the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state) is shown. In this effect example, it is shown that the types of mini games to be started differ depending on the current game state. More specifically, a dice game is easily started as a mini game in the normal game state, and an omikuji game is easily started as a mini game in the probability variation state. It should be noted that a dice game may be started as a mini game in the normal game state, and an omikuji game as a mini game may be started in the probability variation state. Further, the appearance frequency of the mini game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the probability variation state, the player basically feels like to wait for a big hit, so the player is free until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability of mini-game occurrence in the normal gaming state may be higher than that in the probability variation state. Further, the mini game may be executed only in the probability changing state, or the mini game may be executed only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. There may be a case where the game is played, or a case where the game appears only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 127(A1) shows that the game state is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. 127(A1) to (A6) are the same as those in FIG. 126(A) except that the display of the old woman mode and the display of the old woman's character BA are the normal mode display indicating the normal game state. The description is omitted because it is similar to A1) to (A6) in FIG.

  In FIG. 127 (B1), it is shown that the game state is the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (B1), the "probability variation mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the probability variation state. ing. Further, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Right Strike" is displayed and a striking suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 127(B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. In addition, the first holding icon h21 of the special drawing 2, the holding icon h22 of the second special drawing 2, and the holding icon h23 of the third special drawing 2 representing the holding of the special drawing 2 are in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is notified that the mini game is started. 127(B1) to FIG. 127(B5), the game state is the production mode of the princess mode, which is a definite change state, and the hold display of Toku-zu 1 is the hold display of Toku-zu 2. 126(B1) to FIG. 126(B5), except that the number of pending displays is different, the positions of pending displays, and the display positions of the multi-function display area MF1 are interchanged. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 127(B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, after the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 127(B6). In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and in this example of performance, the display mode of the second hold icon h22 of the special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the prefetch notice. The display mode of the third stage is changed to a circular and red display mode. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the combination of the decorative patterns is lost. In this way, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  128(A1) to FIG. 128(A6) show an example in which the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 128(B1) to 128(B6) show that the multifunctional display area MF1 is An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Note that FIG. 128 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, but the present invention can be applied to the above-mentioned omikuji game.

  In FIG. 128 (A1), the game state is shown as a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed together with the character image SBH of the sabotani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(A2), the multifunctional display region MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the state in which the region is enlarged is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani and "Hold at 3UP" is displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button is displayed. It is described that when the user operates 136 to stop and display the roll of "3" on the dice, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by three steps. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of the sabotani and the roll of "3" on the dice is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping the multifunctional display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notification may be performed after the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be displayed, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is displayed. Further, even when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started and the display start of the step-up notice SU1 is the same, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed or the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. Further, the timing of the expanded display of the multifunction display area MF1 is the same as the timing of the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1. Alternatively, after the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF1 may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded-displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may or may not be necessarily expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the probability variation state, and the mini game is expanded in the normal gaming state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the normal game state and the mini game is started in the probability variation state. In this case, the multifunctional display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this production example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative design, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the expanded multi-functional display area is used. It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-expanded multifunction display area MF1 may overlap the decorative design, or the decoration design may overlap the non-expanded multifunction display area MF1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the button image 136aL that is displayed in large size is displayed together with the button image 136aL, and "press" is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It has been notified that the operation valid period has started. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notification SU2 overlaps the multifunctional display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notification SU2 does not overlap the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, or the step-up notice may be overlapped when the multi-function display area MF1 is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and "press" in the multifunctional display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136aL and “press” is started, or after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 is displayed. The display of "press" may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notification SU3 overlaps the multifunctional display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notification SU3 does not overlap the multifunctional display area MF1. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the gauge reduction speed is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 128(A4), the enlarged dice pattern is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 as shown in FIG. 128(A5) to achieve the mission. Is displayed and displayed in a form showing a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of sabotani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns. In addition, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 has been reduced to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the result of the mini game is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result may be deleted, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be returned to the default size after the result of the mini game is deleted.

  In FIG. 128 (B1), the game state is shown to be the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(B1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, etc., a hold icon is displayed. The holding icon of Toku-zu 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the holding icon of Toku-zu 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 128 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, the mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. Is notified that the dice game as is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, the display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the sabotani, and the display of "reserve 3UP" is performed. It is described that when the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of the dice "3" is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. In addition, even when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started and the step-up notice SU1 is displayed at the same time, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF2, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF2 may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF2. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, or after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2 is displayed. Also, the display of "press" may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (B4), the dice symbol is the outcome of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF2, as shown in FIG. 128 (B5). It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF2, the character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (B6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 129(a) shows that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(a), the display in the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default t display mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(a), the step-up notice as the main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 129(a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(b), the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, the appearance of the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the mini game is started, or the mini game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. However, the step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(c), the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and the mini game display area MN2 is erased to produce a mini game effect. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display showing the result of the dice "3" and a display of "Hold 3UP" are respectively greatly enlarged and displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect is produced. It is described that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three stages. As described above, in this effect example, a state where the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the time when the mini game is played is shown. Further, the step-up notice was supposed to be displayed until the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 when the mini game was not started. It has been discontinued. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without being discontinued. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed so as to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be shown to overlap with the step-up notice.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged and displayed button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. It is displayed in the form of. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 129(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(e), the enlarged dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement "3". It is derived and displayed in a form showing the result of "." Further, at this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with a roll of "3". In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, the display of "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for completing the mission is displayed. Further, in the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 129(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. The timing of derivation display of the mini game result may be the same as the timing of re-display of the mini game display area MN2, or the mini game display area MN2 may be displayed after the mini game result is derived and displayed. The result of the mini game may be displayed again after the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129(f), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns. At this time, the size of the decorative pattern is returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position is also returned to the default display position. Further, when the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. The display mode has been changed to. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the decorative design, or the final design may be finalized after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon, or the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 129, the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game, but the above-mentioned omikuji game can also be applied.

  Further, although the dice game and the fortune-telling game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed as the mini game described above, the configuration is executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 137.

  130 to 137 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 130 to 137 also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 130 to 137 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. The customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state where the variable display of the special figure is not displayed, and is a display for promoting the player's willingness to play. In addition, in the lower part of the display area, “Display menu with push button” is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demonstration display, and in the standby state, each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed. When is operated, it notifies that a menu screen will be displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 130(c). On the menu screen, items such as member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end are displayed side by side in a column. Below that, there is a directional key operation prompting image 137p, and the word "Select" is displayed. In addition, the character string of “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

  Here, when the item "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for obtaining a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code contains the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the management server side. In this embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history and customizing an effect. The player, for example, uses a mobile terminal having a camera function and a bar code reader function to read the two-dimensional code and acquire the URL of the first registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the first registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile terminal, or may be information input by the accessor. The password issued here includes personal identification information (ID) and initial values of history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the management server issues the password, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

  When the "Issue two-dimensional code" item is executed, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. On the 2D code issuing screen, the 2D code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of this two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will select it when the game is finished in the state where the original mode is set.

  The maximum capacity of the two-dimensional code here is 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size should be changed in 4 cell increments within the range of 21×21 [cells] to 177×177 [cells]. You can A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. Note that a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used instead of the two-dimensional code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, the larger the amount of information included, the larger the character string, which cannot be remembered by human beings and cannot be overwritten. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying by a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. Further, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for store identification, information unique to the gaming machine, the operating status, the number of errors, and the like may be included. The information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the management server.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when the two-dimensional code is issued to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game will be erased.

  When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code is included in “http://www. The URL to which the argument indicating the history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted from the read two-dimensional code by the barcode reader function, the history information stored in the operation server until now is associated with the personal identification information included in the argument portion, It is updated to the history information included in the argument part.

  In the present embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table is deleted when the two-dimensional code is issued. However, the history information is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can be returned to the game in which the history information is reflected. It may be configured as follows.

  When the item "game history" is executed, for example, the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

  When the item "mini game" is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  When the "end" item is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 130(c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "membership registration", the cursor CSL is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(d). When issuing the "two-dimensional code" and operating the lower button 137b once more, as shown in FIG. 130(e), the cursor CSL indicates "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 130(f), the cursor CSL points to the "mini game".

  Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130(f), as shown in FIG. 130(g), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a mini game. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction on the right side of the display area is The character "SELECT" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "SET" is displayed below the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137. Then, one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed, and by operating the effect button 136, it is notified that the treasure box instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened. At the timing shown in FIG. 130(g), the cursor CSL points to the upper left treasure box BX1. In this mini game, the player selects from four treasure boxes and informs the contents of the selected treasure box. The contents of the treasure box are the result of fortune-telling fortune-telling that suggests fortune (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and multiple types are prepared. Furthermore, in this example of performance, a word of advice is added along with the result of the fortune telling. The results of the fortune-telling fortune-telling and the one-word advice are unrelated to the result of the acceptance judgment. In other words, it does not at least suggest the success or failure of the judgment. Further, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) changes according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect buttons 136.

  Then, when the down button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130(h), the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure box BX2, as shown in FIG. 130(i).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130(i), as shown in FIG. 130(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The enlarged upper left treasure box BX1, the upper right treasure box BX3 and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, the fact that the lower left treasure box BX2 has been determined as the treasure box to be opened is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 130(k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. "Kokichi" is displayed, and "Moderately..." is displayed as one word of advice, and it is shown that the user is alerted not to be overly absorbed in the game. That is, in this example of performance, "Okichi" is associated with the auntie character BA, and by looking at the auntie character BA, it may be understood that the result of the fortune telling is "Okichi".

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(l), the character display "Other results are this" is displayed to notify that the contents of the treasure box that has not been opened will be notified. It should be noted that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 130(l) differs depending on the appearing character. For example, when a princess character HM3 described later appears, a character display such as "other result is this" is displayed. Is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, the bancho face image BCH appears from the upper right treasure box BX3, and the lower right treasure box BX4 appears. The appearance of an image PND of a panda's face is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the buncho face image BCH is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the panda face image PND is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character may be set appropriately, and the combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character may be changed every time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as the result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 130(k1), the princess character HM3 appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune-telling is “Daikichi”. Is displayed, and one word of advice is displayed as "I feel like a big catch today", which gives a sense of expectation that a large number of balls may be obtained.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 130(k2), an image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, "Nakichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, and one word of advice is "If it's sticky, it's a day to be able to manage." "Is displayed, and there is also something that gives a sense of expectation that there may be a good thing to sit down and play slowly over time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 130(k3), an image PND of the face of a panda appears in the treasure box, and “bad” is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, and “gaoo” and “deepening danger” are displayed as one word of advice. "Is displayed, and there is also something that shows how to call attention so as not to be overly absorbed in the game.

  In addition, for example, a mini game result that can appear depending on the setting content of the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. If the setting has been made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to become, as shown in Fig. 130 (k4), the display of the one-word advice "Today is a big catch" is displayed. It is also possible to change the display to "Premier notices are likely to be issued." That is, there may be a case where a presentation of an effect related to the result of the hit determination, such as a suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and the display of the result not related to the result of the hit determination. According to this, it may be possible to make the player feel as if he/she is indirectly involved in the influence of the hit determination. Even if the appearance rate of the notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 130(k4) may be displayed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

  In addition, in this effect example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of a character of a model may be displayed instead of a word of advice.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 131(A1) to 131(A6) show effects subsequent to FIG. 130(f) and show examples of effects of another mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130(f), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 131(A1), "Today's fortune telling-draw Daikichi-" is displayed above the display area. The title is displayed, and a mini-game whose mission is to select the treasure box in the contents of "Daikichi" is started. Note that FIGS. 131(A1) to 131(A4) are the same as FIGS. 130(g) to 130(j) except that the display of the titles is different, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 131(A5) shows a state in which the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 131(A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game has been achieved by displaying "Daikichi", "Mission achieved" is displayed to that effect.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (A6), instead of the display of "mission accomplished", the display "Today's best feeling" is displayed as a word of advice, and the player wins the ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the hit/miss judgment.

  FIG. 131(B1) to FIG. 131(B6) are also effects that follow FIG. 130(f) and show a situation in which the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 131(B1) has the same display as FIG. 131(A1).

  When the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 131(B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure box BX3, as shown in FIG. 131(B3).

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 131(B3), the upper right treasure box BX3 is surrounded by the cursor CSL in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 131(B4). The enlarged upper left treasure box BX1, the lower left treasure box BX2 and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the upper right treasure box BX3 has been determined as a treasure box to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure box BX3 in the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. “Kokichi” is displayed as. Since "Daikichi" was not displayed, the mission of the mini game was not achieved, and accordingly, "Not achieved..." is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 131(B6), instead of the display of "not achieved...", a message of "moderate..." It is shown that they should be careful not to be over-immersed.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production is shown in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 132(a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demo display is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 132(b), as shown in FIG. 132(c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen. On the menu screen shown in FIG. 132(c), the items of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed in a line in a column, and below the items, "selection" is performed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. Is displayed, and the character display of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are operated to move the cursor. It is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

  Here, when the item “customize” is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

  Further, when the item “clear individual data” is executed, the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent accidental data clear.

  When the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration" as shown in FIG. 132(c), the cursor CSL is shown in FIG. 132(d). Instructs "customization". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", as shown in FIG. 34(e), the customize menu screen is displayed.

  On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on/off, eco mode on/off, premiere notice appearance rate setting, tutorial display on/off are displayed in a column, and below that direction The character display of “select” is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, it is possible to change the setting instructed by the cursor CSL.

  Here, the "auto button mode" is an effect mode in which the effect buttons 136 and the buttons of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the timing of button operation is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous stroke operation effect that requires a continuous stroke operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at appropriate timing (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in this effect example, when the "auto button mode" is set to ON, the various buttons are automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which the button is automatically operated by long pressing. Here, in the long press auto, in a production (including a mini game) that requires the operation means to be operated a plurality of times, when the long press operation is performed by the operation means, a plurality of operations are continuously performed. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to have been done. In this case, when the operation means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hitting operation effect is executed, by long-pressing the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous hitting operation. In addition, the full auto is an operation that the operation means is operated in a certain performance that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

  The “eco mode” limits the driving of one or more drive devices, for example, turning off the various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode of stopping. In the present embodiment, after the eco mode is turned on, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied, the various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced. The device for which the drive is limited or stopped can be set appropriately.

  Also, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that is guaranteed that the jackpot symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed by the appearance, and if it is set to "normal", the first The probability for the premiere notice to appear Appearance for the premiere notice is performed using the normal probability table, and if set to "High", the premiere notice will appear with a second probability higher than the first probability. The high probability table is used to perform a lottery for appearance of the premier notice.

  Further, when "Tutorial" is set to OFF, it is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed.

  When the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL is pointing to the "auto button mode" as shown in FIG. 132(f), it is "off" as shown in FIG. 132(g). The "auto button mode" setting that was instructed was changed to "on".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132(g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Will be confirmed. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, as shown in FIG. 34(h), the screen shifts to the menu screen. If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. The menu screen may be displayed, or the result of the setting of the “auto button mode” may be reflected (confirmed) and then the menu screen may be displayed.

  When the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize" as shown in FIG. 132(h), the cursor CSL is " "Mini game".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132(i), when the OK button 137e is operated with the cursor CSL pointing to the "mini game", the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 34(j). It Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character is displayed and the name of a mini game called "bancho awakening game" is displayed, and below that, a mission "tear off clothes with continuous button hits". Is displayed. That is, in this mini game, if the mission button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the mission is achieved on the condition that the operation of the effect button 136 has been performed a predetermined number of times, the leader's clothes are destroyed. Is displayed to notify that the mission has been completed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132(k), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed together with the banquet character, and the character "START" is displayed above them. , A state in which the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of performance, as described above, the setting of “auto button mode” is set to “on” and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the setting of full auto is not effective and the effect button The automatic operation of 136 is configured not to be performed. When the setting of “auto button mode” is set to “on” and the long press auto is set, the long press auto setting is not valid even if the effect button 136 is long pressed. Only one manual operation is effective, and thereafter, the effect button 136 is not automatically operated. In this example of performance, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is set to be different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Alternatively, for example, as in this example of performance, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display The change speed of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variable display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode). The number (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the variable display of symbols May be the same.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 132(l) to 132(n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character has not been achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132(o), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132(p), the decorative pattern display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

  It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the player may be allowed to select the execution of the mini game. For example, in the customized menu screen that shifts from the menu screen, it may be set whether or not the mini game can be executed. May be enabled, or the type of executable mini game may be selected.

  Further, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect that the appearance rate is usually extremely low is executed, the desire to participate in the mini game is high. May be able to improve.

  FIG. 133 and FIG. 134 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 133(A1) to FIG. 133(A6) are effects following FIG. 132(i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Note that FIG. 133(A1) to FIG. 133(A2) are the same as FIG. 132(j) to FIG.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133(A2), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133(A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 133(A3) to (A5), the number of effect images of stars increases as the number of operations increases, and the number of effect images of stars increases as the number of operations increases. As shown in FIG. 133(A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is further hit and the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A6), the long character is worn. It is shown that the clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

  FIG. 133(B1) to FIG. 133(B6) show an example in which long press auto is enabled in the mini game, which is an effect following FIG. 132(i). It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hit operation. Note that FIG. 133(B1) to FIG. 133(B2) are the same as FIG. 132(j) to FIG. 132(k), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133(B2), the player pushes the effect button 136 for a long time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous hitting operation has not started yet. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, one pressing operation is desired. However, in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of a pseudo continuous hit, the long press of the effect button 136 is performed. When a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 133(A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is small, and the effect image of the star is also in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(A3). Less than displayed. That is, the manner of changing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the case where the normal repeated hit operation is performed by the player and the case where the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by the long press auto. ..

  When a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and a pseudo continuous hitting operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 133(B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of effect images of stars displayed increases, and when the number of operations for achieving a mission approaches, the effect images of large stars are displayed as shown in FIG. 133 (B5). After that, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are broken, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been accomplished.

  FIG. 134(C1) to FIG. 134(C7) are effects following FIG. 132(i) and show an example in which long press auto is disabled in a mini game. It is shown that no operations were performed and as a result the mission was not achieved. Note that FIG. 133(B1) to FIG. 133(B2) are the same as FIG. 132(j) to FIG. 132(k), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134(C2), the effect button 136 is pressed and held by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 134(C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134(C4), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, not only the effect image of the star does not increase, but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the last operation of the effect button 136. ) Has elapsed, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 134(C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, when the operation acceptance period elapses as shown in FIG. 134(C6), as shown in FIG. 134(C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is performed. It shows that it was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 134(C7), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production is shown in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 135, the full-automatic (or long-pressing auto) function is effective for the effect (including the mini game) that requires one-time operation or multiple-time operation of one button, but the operation key unit 137. Regarding effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example in which the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is disabled is shown.

  FIG. 135(A1) to FIG. 135(A6) show effects subsequent to FIG. 132(i), and show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that the mission is achieved as a result of the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Note that FIG. 135(A1) to FIG. 135(A2) are the same as FIG. 132(j) to FIG.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135(A2), the full-auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135(A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect images of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 135(A3) to (A5), the effect images of stars are displayed more as the number of operations by the pseudo operation increases, and as the number of operations to achieve the mission is approached. As shown in FIG. 135(A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, further pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 135(A6). , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown to be broken, and "Bancho awakening" and "Today is in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

  FIG. 135(B1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 130(f) and shows an example of the effect of another mini game. That is, when the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135(B1), the title "Today's fortune telling-close Daikichi-" is displayed in the upper part of the display area, and "Daikichi" A mini-game whose mission is to select a treasure box inside will start. In this mini game, the buttons of the operation key unit 137 are operated to move the cursor CSL and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini game is operated. The full auto function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135(B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

  On the other hand, even in such a mini game, full auto may be made to function. For example, as shown in FIG. 135(B1′), when the mini game starts, full auto immediately functions and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is pseudo-operated, and the upper left treasure box is automatically selected as shown in FIG. 135(B2′). That is, in the mini game in which the treasure box is selected by the respective buttons of the operation key unit 137 and then the effect button 136 is used to determine the treasure box to be opened, when the full auto is operated, the treasure box initially designated by the cursor CSL is activated. May be arbitrarily selected as an open treasure box, and the operation intention of the player may not be reflected at all.

  In the present embodiment, a mini game that derives a result irrespective of the result of the hit/miss determination in the standby state is performed. However, for example, in an effect that is started at a predetermined time by RTC (Real Time Clock) (the standby state And, it may be executed in a mini game executed in at least one of the variable display of symbols), or may be executed at any time regardless of the game state for the purpose of killing the player's time. ..

  136 and 137 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production is shown in alphabetical order in parentheses. 136 and 137, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, it is shown that the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game. It should be noted that the mini game may or may not always be started during the execution of the big hit game.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(a), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and a state of a big hit is shown. In addition, the hold icon h21 of the first special map 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special map 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special map 2, and the fourth special map 2 of the special map 2 are displayed. Each of the hold icons h24 is displayed in the default display mode. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

  In FIG. 136(b), a state in which the big hit game is started and the game is shifted to the first round is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the "big hit start" is displayed to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" shown and the display of "0GET" showing the current number of winning prize balls in the big hit this time are also displayed. It should be noted that the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the condominium may be displayed. In addition, as for the number of winning prize balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning port 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10) and the variable winning port 234 is closed (overwinning). The number of prize balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(b), a child panda character may appear and perform a comical action to entertain the player in some cases. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing a right-handed operation may be performed.

  In FIG. 136(c), it is shown that the fifth round of the big hit game is being played. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and "735 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the jackpot was started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(c), the display that "mini-game will start in the next round" is displayed, and the mini-game will be started in the next round (sixth round). I foretell.

  FIG. 136(d) shows that the sixth round has started. In the concrete period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "6R" indicating that it is the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the jackpot was started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(d), a display that "mini-game will start" is displayed, which gives a notice that the mini-game will be started.

  After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(e) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is likely to be activated. Further, the number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is. In addition, when the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is assured that the hold-up game is generated. That is, the operation of the effectable movable body 224 during the big hit game can be considered as an example of a pre-reading notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the symbols on the dice, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 136(g), as shown in FIG. 136(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is “3”. The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is shown that the achievement of the mission was not achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 136(h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 is “825 GET”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(i), the display showing the result of "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is not achieved. A "sorry" notification is displayed. Therefore, in this example of effect, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and it is not notified whether or not the holding condominium is performed. In this example of performance, if the pre-reading results in a suspended holiday, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game and the production movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate in some cases. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be always operated when the mission is achieved, or may not be operated. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136(i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

  After that, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 136(j), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "end of jackpot" to notify the player that the jackpot game has ended. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400GET" indicating that the number of won prize balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

  Note that, in the mini game of this effect example, it is performed by operating the effect button 136 once. For example, when the mission is completed and the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. 34 is started, a privilege is awarded. (For example, a notice of the operation of the production movable body 224) may be given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a situation where a mission is achieved in a mini game performed during the execution of the big hit game will be described. Note that FIGS. 137(a) to 137(d) are the same as FIGS. 136(a) to 136(d), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 137(e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is likely to be activated. Here, the bancho character is displayed in a torn manner, which suggests that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbols on the dice start changing display, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of effect, the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of rotating and vibrating, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 137(g), as shown in FIG. 137(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is “1”. The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is indicated that the mission has been achieved. The acquired prize ball number displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 137(h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 is “825 GET”.

  Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137(i), the display showing the result of "1" derived as the result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is notified. The message “I did it” is displayed. In addition, "Attention to the arm" is displayed below that, and it is announced that the effect movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137(i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

  FIG. 137(j) shows that the seventh round has started. In the specific period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "7R" indicating that it is the seventh round of the big hit game and "900GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the big hit has started.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(k), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a large number of effect images of stars are displayed, and a display as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 influences the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. There is. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 137(l), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a "holding condominium confirmation" to notify that the symbol variable display, which is a big hit, is suspended. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by the operation of the effectable movable body 224 and the display of "confirmation of reserved holidaymaker" in FIG. 137(l).

  In addition, in this example of performance, it may be possible to notify that the pending condominium is determined by the achievement of the mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of the above-described mini-games of a plurality of types are combined to be executable.

  In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

  The result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed by using other display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc. Other device) may be used.

  Further, the mini game described above may be executed during the execution of one symbol variable display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Further, like the above-described mini game, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the variable display of the state where the number of variable display of the special figure is four, the variable time may be generally short, and in such a case, it looks like the mini game is started and the result is displayed. You may make it interrupt, without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the effect of the game.

  In addition, the mini game described above may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a sudden big hit (for example, a combination of decorative symbols of big hits is displayed without going through reach production). (Variable display pattern etc.), RTC production starts, the production display being executed switches to a display such as wipe, and an error such as a door opening error or magnetic detection error occurs May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini game and the mini game is interrupted, it suddenly becomes a big hit during the period of looking forward to the results of the mini game, and the player is surprised and delighted. May be able to give. If the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to entertain the effect link with the other game console by the RTC effect.

  The position and size of the display area in which the mini game is executed may be changed depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

  Further, as the operation mode requested in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as one-time operation, repeated hit operation, long-press operation, timing operation, etc. can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, when the mini game is executed during the variable display of symbols, the mini game may be started before the reach. When reaching, there is a tendency for attention to be given to the effect of the variable display of symbols, so starting the mini game before reaching may increase the effect of effect before reaching.

  Further, as the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game described above, a notice is given that a notice is given, but the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the variation notice or the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the jackpot game is being performed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 185, another game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 138 to 185 are basically used only in the description using FIGS. 138 to 185, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 185, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 138 to 185 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In addition, it is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a vertical rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, and a production button 136 and a production button 136 as an example of an operation unit that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 140) by the operation of the player. A production button lamp 138 which is built in and causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in multiple colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting unit that can emit light from the inside of the operating unit. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operation means, and each button forming the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operation means. The specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, the lower plate 128 is provided with a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after mounting the game board 200 on the main body 104.

  FIG. 139 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 140 as viewed from the back side.

  At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150 are provided at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. And a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 140 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display unit capable of executing a plurality of types of displays.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variation games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning port 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. The special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started together with discharging. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed, and the player can win the universal figure variation game, and the universal figure display device. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device wins the special symbol variable game and the special symbol display device stops the big hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. The launch mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or by simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative pattern display device 208, a rendering movable body 225, and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208, the rendering movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 200, and can be moved vertically by a family crest motor (not shown). The production movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advanced position).

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes of the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 and a second sub control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a temporary data A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. .. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two in this circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It has a built-in counter) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of 326 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 controls the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to send a command or the like. However, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 cannot send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. The main controller 300 and the first sub controller 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, or the main controller 300 and the payout controller 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 is for controlling the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136). A drive circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shield device 246, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 (for details, see The operation unit sensor 426 that detects pressing of (described later), the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the signal stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) which reads out image data and the like and uses the work area of the VRAM 436 to generate a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. Outputs to the basic circuit 402 a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the output circuit, the game control is started (the first sub-control unit main processing described later is started).

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable bodies 224, 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable bodies 224, 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. The frame lamp drive circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game base frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is determined whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of pattern>
Next, using FIGS. 142(a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all of the seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats "lighting up of 7 segments" and "lighting up of 1 segment in the center" to display "variation display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (corresponding to the fluctuation time also referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the figure (a), 10 types of special symbols from "Special symbol A" to "Special symbol J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white part in the figure is turned off. The position of the segment to be turned on is shown, and the black-painted portion shows the position of the segment to be lit.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot design, and "Special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot design "Special drawing A" is the special drawing high-probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R special jackpot pattern "Special drawing B" is the special figure low-probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  "Special map C" is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing C” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R as compared with “Special drawing B” which is 15R.

  "Special map E" is a 2R big hit symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot pattern that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, and both are special figure low probability general figure low probability states. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, the amount of profit to be given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special symbol A" are also prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 142(b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, in case of notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" suddenly changed or a sudden 2R big hit called "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 142(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is missed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the place of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the place of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 143. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 143 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a predetermined value). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and when the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and the register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, the power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two random numbers for initial value generation for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters for generating each random number value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detecting sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, information about the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 141 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). Information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed, and the process branches to the subsequent process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 is obtained. The two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numeric range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to vary/stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a prize ball number storage area for each prize hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random number value, and also the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is obtained as a random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value, and is stored as the special figure 2 random number value in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a prize in the variable winning port 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. This public figure state update processing performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the public figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so as to be in the mode. When the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the display mode of the off symbol. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is made in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 142(c)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 142(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening/closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the normal figure disengagement flag is turned on, even in the normal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure inactive is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting/light-off drive control is performed by repeatedly turning the light off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability variation flags are provided for each. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 142(a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is a special map B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special map C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is off, the universal figure probability variation flag is also off, the special figure F, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. In the case of the special symbol I when the first deviation flag is on, and the special symbol I when the second deviation flag is on, the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting/lighting-off drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first outlier pattern (special map) I), and the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the special figure 2 stop time provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the saving time storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set to 100 time saving times, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the figure, compared to the low probability state of the figure, there is a high possibility of hitting the variation game of the figure. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting port 232 until the game balls enter This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is ON, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process moves to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special map starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special effect The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability variation flag values, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are related. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, and the like is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag are included. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag are included. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing is resumed.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 145. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. Update process.

  In step S311, when the depression of various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the depression of the various buttons.

  In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control processing, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to sound source IC 416, this command is output to sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, mission achievement determination processing (details described later) is performed, and in step S325, original mode control processing (details described later) is performed, and then the processing ends.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by the predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S503, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

  Further, in step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and power-off processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, a transfer instruction of image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. Therefore, the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Process of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 146. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initialization of the input/output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S903, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

  Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. Here, FIG. 147(a) is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 138, and FIG. 147(b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 147(a), the operation key unit 137 is configured to have six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, and a clear button 137f. There is. In the following description, in order to simplify the description, of the constituent parts of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e are shown in FIG. It may be expressed in the form shown in b).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function for performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by long-pressing the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Here, the long press operation means an operation mode in which the state in which the effect buttons 136 and the buttons forming the operation key unit 137 are pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. Yes, the continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by each button forming the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed plural times. In the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect buttons 136 and the buttons forming the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the continuous hitting operation is performed at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) while the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed. Is configured to be performed in a pseudo manner. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the buttons that form the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137, the buttons that form the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to properly perform a single-shot operation, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is used until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation of each button included in the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is started. It is configured so that the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started.

  Next, a specific example of performance in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. 148. In the following figures, the screen transitions are shown in alphabetical order in parentheses. 148 and 149 show, for example, how various settings are performed on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

  The menu screen in the present embodiment allows the player to change the setting. In addition to this menu screen, for example, a setting menu screen for the amusement store side is displayed, whereby the amusement store It may be configured to be able to change various settings by the side, for example, to be able to input a master volume, a store name, and the like. Further, in the slot machine, for example, the setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB, etc. may be performed on the menu screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured to be displayed in the standby state, but, for example, the menu screen is not configured to be displayed in the power support state (probability change, time saving). Good.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 148(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the drawing, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are both stopped and displayed in an out-of-range display mode, and the special figure 1, the fourth symbol t1, and the special figure 2 The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed as a display result that is out of correspondence with the display results of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, respectively. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the number of pending variable displays in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148(a), the effect display in the standby state is performed.

  In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, a character "Display menu screen" is displayed together with an icon representing the effect button 136, and informs that the operation can be switched to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the player presses the effect button 136 once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a menu screen ("setting screen") as shown in FIG. 148(b). May be displayed.) is displayed. Specifically, in the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light intensity, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, appearance frequency of notices, etc. There are four menus selectably displayed: "effect customization" for setting and "operation auxiliary setting" for setting a long press automatic continuous hitting function and an automatic button function, which will be described later. At the bottom of these menus, the characters of “select” are displayed with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and on the right side thereof, the characters of “decide” are displayed with the icon of the OK button 137e. Further, on the right side thereof, a character "return with" is displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Informs that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. Further, in FIG. 148(b), it is also informed that when the effect button 136 is operated, the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 148(a) is returned.

  In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set from 11 stages of 0 to 10, respectively. The volume and the light amount are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to “5”, for example. Needless to say, the default value can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the setting of the volume and the light amount by the setting operation on the menu screen, but the player may not be able to change the setting of at least one of the volume and the light amount. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the volume and light amount settings can be changed only on the setting screen of the menu screen, but, for example, the volume and light amount settings can be changed without going through the setting screen. Of course, for example, even during the variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the setting of the volume and the light amount can be changed by operating the operation key unit 137 without displaying the setting screen. Good.

  In this embodiment, the cursor CL can be moved one by one on each operation of the up button 137a or the down button 137b on the menu screen, and on the menu screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function described later is invalid. Therefore, it is impossible to move the cursor CL by two or more by performing a long press operation. The cursor CL may be moved by two or more when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is pressed and held on the menu screen.

  In the case where the effect display in the standby state is being performed, in addition to the effect button 136, one of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, an OK button 137e or the like) is pressed. The menu screen may be displayed even in the case of a failure. Further, when the menu screen is displayed, in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed, the menu screen may be returned to the effect display in the standby state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), when the "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, when the player presses the lower button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, As shown in FIG. 148(d), a display indicating that "member registration" has been selected with the cursor CL is displayed.

  After that, when the player presses the lower button 137b one more time, the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL as shown in FIG. 148(e). The display is done. That is, in this effect example, in the case where "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of "effect customization" operates the lower button 137b twice (or operates the upper button 137a twice). This is a display that can be selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, when "Volume light intensity adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of "production customization" is a display that is not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can be said that there is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the display (an example of the second display) in which “customization” is selected by the cursor CL, the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (for example, twice). It is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation (operation in the first operation mode), and does not indicate that the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) has been pressed for a long time (operation in the second operation mode). It can be said that the display in which "production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is not started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which the “customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the display when one of the plurality of options is selected.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which the “customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, and a display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL (first When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (in the first operation mode) in the case where the third display example) is displayed, the “production customization” is selected by the cursor CL. The display (the example of the second display) may be started, and when the display (the example of the third display) in which the “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is pressed for a long time (operated in the second operation mode), the display of the "production customization" selected by the cursor CL (an example of the second display) is displayed. It can also be said that it will not start.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the lower button 137b (up button when the display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. It can be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N≧2) by 137a).

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "customization" is selected by the cursor CL is a display which is not started during the display of the symbol variable display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 148(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, On the decorative symbol display device 208, a production customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 148(f) is displayed. In the production customization setting screen, "normal mode" is used to set the appearance frequency of productions such as notices to the default, false false big notices are not announced, and big notices are confirmed only when they appear There are three menus that can be selected: "One-shot notification mode" and "Normal mode", which are set to increase the frequency of appearance of premier notices that confirm jackpots that occur less frequently in "normal mode". ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148(g), when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL and the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays As shown in 148 (h), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "Normal mode" and "You can see the usual effect" are displayed to notify that the normal mode has been set, and an announcement such as a notice appears. Frequency is set to default.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 148(e), when “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL. In, even if the OK button 137e is pressed and held by the player for a long time, the “normal mode” is not set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen is changed to the production customization setting screen. "Normal mode" is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148(f), when the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, when the lower button 137b is pressed twice, as shown in FIG. 148(g1). , "Premium up mode" is displayed with the cursor CL. In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, so that when the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, the “premium up mode” menu is It is a display that can be selected by operating the lower button 137b twice, in other words, a display that is not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL can be regarded as an example of the second display, and the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL. It can be said that the display indicating is an example of the third display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (g1), when the "Premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, As shown in FIG. 148(h1), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "Premier productions can be seen a lot" is displayed to notify that the premier up mode has been set, and the frequency of premier notices will increase. Is set to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148(e), when the “production customization” is selected by the cursor CL, if the lower button 137b is pressed once more, as shown in FIG. 149(e2). In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, so that when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the menu for “operation auxiliary setting” is The display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b three times, in other words, the display cannot be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL can be regarded as an example of the second display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149(e2), in the case where “operation assistance setting” is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays An operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 149(f2) is displayed. On the operation assistance setting screen, "no assistance" is not performed to assist the continuous pressing operation of each button forming the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137, and the operation button 136 or each button forming the operation key unit 137 is held down. By doing so, even if the operation of the effect button 136 or the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the “long-press automatic continuous hit” that assists the continuous hit, the effect button 136, or the like. Three menus of "auto button" for pseudo-simulating a single-shot operation, a long-press operation, and a repeated hitting operation are displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149(f2), when "without assistance" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the lower button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays As indicated by 149 (g2), a display indicating that "long press auto continuous hit" is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(h2), when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as shown in FIG. Will be activated.” is displayed to notify that the long press automatic continuous tapping function has been activated, and the long press automatic continuous tapping function is set to be effective. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the continuous press assist function by the long press operation of the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is provided on condition that the long press automatic continuous hit function is set to be effective. Is configured to be activated. In the embodiment described in this specification, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be always enabled.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured such that the long press automatic continuous tapping function is disabled, but it may be configured such that the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled on the menu screen. When the 137a or the down button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which it is possible to easily recognize that the menu item selected by the player has been changed. Further, in this case, for example, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b or the OK button 137e is continuously pressed before the setting screen is switched, such as a transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is After the switching, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed, and after the setting screen has been switched, the pseudo button repeated operation is performed again by pressing the up button 137a, the down button 137b, or the OK button 137e again. May be. Further, the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long-pressing operation may be prevented from being performed at least either one of the movement of the cursor CL and the transition of the setting screen.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect in which the long-press automatic repeated hitting described later functions. For example, it is possible to set the difficulty level of the effect of performing the repeated hit operation on the menu screen, and if the difficulty is high, it is easier for the successful effect to be performed by making the long press auto continuous hit function rather than the continuous hit operation. You can Further, the volume and the light amount set on the volume light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting functions.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 150 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-relation is that the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, but the left symbol display area 208a, in the middle, for the variable display of one special symbol. After the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped in all of the symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, the variation pattern of the decorative symbols is executed once or a plurality of times to re-variably display all the decorative symbols again. Refers to. That is, the pseudo-relation is a pseudo variation in which the decorative design appears to change a plurality of times with respect to one variation display of the special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 150(a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 which is variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the variable display is performed in a mode in which the colors shown in the circles change into a plurality of types. There is. Note that, in FIG. 150 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbol that is stopped and displayed can be recognized for convenience of description, but actually, the stop symbol is displayed. The symbols thus displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 may be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player.

  In addition, in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold display area for displaying the hold number of the special figure 1 by the number of icons is provided. In this hold display area, a first special map 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold of special view 1 and a second special map 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold of special view 1 h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold of special figure 1, and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold of special figure 1 are displayed. Has been done. In FIG. 150(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is one, one of the suspension lamps in the first special chart suspension lamp 218 is lit, and the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special chart 2 is on. Is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h11 corresponding to this. Only the default display mode (default hold icon) is displayed, and the other special figure 1 hold displays are displayed in a non-hold mode (for example, a grayed-out hold icon). Note that the hold icon may be hidden instead of displaying the hold icon.

  Further, in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying a variable icon is provided. The variable icon has, for example, a display mode associated with the special display pending display, and is displayed in the same display mode as the pending display. The variable icon can execute, for example, a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) depending on its display mode. The variable icon is erased after the variable display is started. Note that the timing of erasing the variable icon is not limited to this, and may be erased at the end of the variable display, for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150(b), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation manner in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150(c), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation mode in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150(d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG including the character display of "continuation" is stopped and displayed in the swing pattern in the middle symbol display area 208b. By the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol GG, the player can expect whether or not the pseudo continuous symbol will occur.

  Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 150(e), the character "PUSH" is displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and the remaining of the effect button press acceptance period. A remaining time meter MT indicating time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed so as to be superimposed on the pseudo continuous symbol GG. As a result, the player is informed that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 150(f), as shown in FIG. 150(g), in the decorative pattern display device 208, as a result of the operation of the production button 136, The effect display is performed to the effect that the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started successfully. Specifically, the display of “×2” indicating that the variable display of the second decorative pattern is being executed is displayed above the decorative pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c respectively change again, The first pseudo continuous production is started. That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern for the second time is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. (b) to (c), as shown in FIG. 150(i), The third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation mode in the middle symbol display area 208b. By the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols GG, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the second pseudo continuous symbols will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150(j), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. The meter MT is also displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 150(k), as shown in FIG. 150(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the production button 136, The effect display is performed to the effect that the variable display of the decorative pattern for the third time by the pseudo-relation is started successfully. Specifically, the display of “×3” indicating that the variable display of the decorative design for the third time is being executed is displayed above the decorative design. After that, as shown in FIG. 150(m), the second pseudo continuous effect is started.

  In the effect example described above, the effect button image BT is displayed every time an effect (may be referred to as a pseudo continuous occurrence effect) that fuels whether or not to generate a pseudo continuous effect is displayed, and the pseudo continuous occurrence effect is generated a plurality of times. Since it is executed, the effect button image BT is also displayed a plurality of times, but only one effect button image BT is displayed at a time, and the effect button image BT is displayed intermittently at each occurrence of the pseudo continuous occurrence effect. Indicates that it will be done.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the example in which the effect button 136 is pressed down and the effect is successful is shown. However, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not started, for example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect has failed. The effect display may be executed, and the display may be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of order. Moreover, after performing the effect display to the effect that the effect has failed, it may be stopped and displayed with a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of the multiple times is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long-pressed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even if the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, blue light emission) different from the light emission mode (for example, red light emission) in the state where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the single pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of the first operation mode. In addition, the long-pressing operation by the effect button 136 for a predetermined time or longer is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period than the first operation mode.

  In this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect display by pseudo-repetition executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 occurring after the second time is the first operation. Of the first effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the mode, and can also be started when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be called an example.

  Further, in this example of performance, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the pseudo continuous effect display executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 occurring after the second time is the second operation. An example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation by the operation means be able to. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this example of effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effected display by pseudo continuous executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. ..

  FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance-eye effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 151 shows a state of transition to the super reach after the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Here, the chance eye is a mode in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of different designs having the same color), and is one mode of the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151(a), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern “C” forming a part of the above is stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns that are the chance eyes. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  Further, in FIG. 151(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is one, one of the first special figure reserve lamps 218 is lit, and the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h11 corresponding to this. Only the default display mode is displayed, and other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-hold mode.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151(b), together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The character "PUSH" is displayed, and the remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the acceptance period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 151(c), as shown in FIG. 151(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is made in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance pattern "A" that has been displayed is changed to a lord's design YM1 that imitates the lord's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are still displayed while being superimposed on the hall design YM1, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 151(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 which are displayed in an overlapping manner on the hall symbol YM1 are deleted, and the hall symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. The timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set appropriately, and is, for example, the timing before the timing at which the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the hall symbol YM1. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing of changing the display from the chance symbol “A” to the hall symbol YM1. This also applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is being performed.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 151(e), as shown in FIG. 151(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance pattern “B” that has been done is changed to the lord's pattern YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are still displayed while being overlaid on the hall design YM2, but the character display of "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second. Note that, in FIG. 151(e), a state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted and a state in which the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time, but in reality, in the effect. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. Note that the deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be at the same timing, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be erased. Further, even if the production button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 151(g), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 which are displayed in a manner superimposed on the hall design YM2 are deleted, and the hall design YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-mentioned effect display is being performed.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 151(g), as shown in FIG. 151(h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a stop in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern “C” that has been done is changed to the lord's pattern YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are still displayed while being overlaid on the hall design YM3, but the character display of "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second. In addition, in FIG. 151(g), a state in which the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted and a state in which the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. Note that the deletion of the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be performed at the same timing, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT2 and The remaining time meter MT2 may be deleted. In addition, even if the production button 136 is pressed, the production button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, only the production button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 151(i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 that are displayed in a superimposed manner on the hall symbol YM3 are deleted, and the hall symbol YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and it becomes a mode in which the hall patterns YM1 to YM3 are gathered. Then, as shown in FIG. 151(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen and become super reach. The display of "SP reach" indicating that the shift has been made is displayed. Even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be deleted.

  In the above-described effect example, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative pattern, a plurality of effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and effect button images BT1 to BT1 are operated each time the effect button 136 is operated. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

  Further, in the above-described production example, an example in which the production button 136 is pressed down and the production succeeds, all the chance symbols are changed to the lord's pattern and the process shifts to the super reach, but after the chance eye production is performed. When not moving to the super reach, for example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, Change the design from a chance design to a design different from the lord's design (for example, a bad vice design that imitates the face of a bad vice), notify that it will not move to super reach, and then combine it with a decorative design It may be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the production button 136. However, for example, when the long-press operation is performed by the production button 136, the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of the multiple times is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long-pressed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect in which the chance pattern "B" is changed to the lord's design YM2, and the chance pattern "C" is changed to the lord's design YM3. The effect can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode, and also when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said that this is an example of the first effect that can be started.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect in which the chance symbol “B” is changed to the lord's symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the lord's symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said that this is an example of a second effect that is easily started. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

  In addition, in this production example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous striking function is enabled, the production in which the chance pattern is changed to the hall pattern as a result of the continuous striking operation of the production button 136 is operated in the first operation mode. An example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed the first number of times by the means, and can be started even when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. You can

  FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of the cut-in effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 152 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this effect example, a cut-in effect is displayed in which a cut-in image is displayed each time the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 152(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, on the left side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Further, on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  In addition, in FIG. 152(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are held. All lamps are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

  Then, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 152(c), "PUSH" displayed together with the production button image BT1 displayed on the left side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in a mode in which the character is erased and the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. In addition, you may make it not stop the update display of remaining time meter MT2 and remaining time meter MT3 (reduce the operation reception remaining time of the production button 136).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152(e), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is erased, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is restarted, and the effect button 136 is displayed. The operation acceptance of is restarted.

  After that, for example, at a timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 show a mode in which 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge is The display is further reduced by one second.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 152(h), “PUSH” displayed along with the production button image BT2 displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character is erased, and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the operation reception remaining time of the effect button 136 is reduced).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152(i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152(k), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. Further, the second cut-in image CI2 has a vertically larger display range than the first cut-in image CI1.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is erased, the remaining time meter MT3 is updated and displayed again, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is restarted. To be done.

  After that, for example, at a timing when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 152(m), the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge further decreases by 1 second. It is displayed in the mode.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 152(n), "PUSH" displayed along with the production button image BT3 displayed on the right side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. The character "" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152(o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152(p), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the above-described production example, the example in which the production button 136 is pressed three times and a cut-in image is displayed as successful production every time the production button 136 is pressed is shown. The cut-in image may be displayed only for any one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136, and the cut-in image may be displayed for any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

  Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the operation button 136 is not pressed. At this time, different display modes may be used depending on whether the production button 136 is pressed or not, and the same display mode may be used.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the production button 136. However, for example, when the long-press operation is performed by the production button 136, the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of the multiple times is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. At this time, when the operation of the effect button 136 is ready to be accepted, the pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is immediately performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state where the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. In some cases, the three cut-in images may be displayed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time on the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long-pressed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and the effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed are It can be started when the operation means performs a first number of operations in the first operation mode, and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said as an example of one production.

  Further, in this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect of displaying the second cut-in image CI2 and an effect of displaying the third cut-in image CI3. Is easier to start when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs the operation once in the second operation mode. It can be said as an example of the second production. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

  In addition, in this example of the effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect that the cut-in image is displayed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. ..

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of the cut-in effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 153(a-1) to 153(a-6) show a state in which the effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 153(b-1) to 153(b-). 6) shows a state in which the effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 when the auto button function is in the valid state. Here, the auto button function is a function that pseudo-executes a single shot operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation even when the effect button 136 is not operated during execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect button 136. Further, in a state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of the single shot operation, the long press operation, and the continuous hit operation are enabled depending on the content of the effect using the effect button 136. It may be configured to be.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 153(a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which are combinations of outlying decorative patterns, are definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, by turning off the effect button lamp 138, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. When the operation button 136 is not in the operation accepting state, the effect button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color of light emitted is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in this embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the second state when it is not in the operation reception state.

  Since the number of variable displays held in special figures 1 and 2 is 0, both the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  After that, the character "PUSH" is displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 153(a-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Note that the color of light emitted is not limited to red, and can be set to any appropriate color. In this way, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the first state when it is in the operation acceptance state.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 153(a-4), as shown in FIG. 153(a-5), it is displayed together with the production button image BT. The word "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 153(a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  In the above-described production example, after the production button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 153(a-5), the character "PUSH" displayed along with the production button image BT is erased. Although the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, such a display may not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 153(b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which are combinations of outlying decorative patterns, are definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light indicating that the automatic button function is enabled. It should be noted that the emitted color is not limited to green and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the third state when the auto button function is valid.

  Since the number of variable displays held in special figures 1 and 2 is 0, both the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  After that, the character "PUSH" is displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 153(b-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed.

  After that, when a half of the acceptance period for pressing the effect button 136 has elapsed, the one-off operation by the effect button 136 is artificially performed at the timing shown in FIG. 153(b-4) by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-5), the character "PUSH" displayed along with the effect button image BT is erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is left at 0 seconds. It

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  In the above-described effect example, “PUSH” displayed along with the effect button image BT as shown in FIG. 153 (b-5) after the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function. Although the character is erased and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, such a display may not be performed.

  In the above-described example of the effect, the single-shot operation is performed by the effect button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the cut-in image is displayed as the success of the effect is displayed. The cut-in image may not be displayed because it has failed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but, for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single-shot operation by the effect button 136. The effect content is the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is operated, but the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is the one-shot operation performed by the effect button 136. In some cases, it may be different from the effect contents executed in the case of, and it may be different.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 153, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between the state where the normal operation of the effect button 136 in the single-shot operation effect can be accepted and the state where the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change notice. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. In FIGS. 154(a-1) to (a-7) and 154(b-1) to (b-8), the pending change notice that the display mode of the pending icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136 is performed. It shows the situation.

  As shown in FIG. 154(a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area. The variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in each of the 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above.

  In FIG. 154(a-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is three, the three suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special map 1 hold among the first special map 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special map 1 hold display h14 is correspondingly provided. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. Is displayed. A variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is increased to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp The four hold lamps at 218 are illuminated. Then, in the reserved display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 is displayed in a default display mode corresponding to this. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 154(a-3), animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In FIG. 154(a-3), an animation in which the hold icon displayed in a circle extends in the horizontal direction and changes to an ellipse is displayed. At this time, the effect button image BTH is still displayed, but it may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. After that, as shown in FIG. 154(a-3) to FIG. 154(a-5), the hold icon extends vertically or horizontally for a predetermined performance execution period (for example, 2 seconds). Animation continues.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154(a-6), after an animation that the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 154(a-7), the hold icon Changes to a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord.

  On the other hand, FIG. 154(b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being displayed. At this time, since the variable display holding number of special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display holding number of special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Then, at the timing of the symbol stop display, as shown in FIG. 154(b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols is the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order "decoration 2"-"decoration". 3”-“decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, it is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also fixed and displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been done.

  In this state, for example, even if the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 154(b-3), an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is transformed is Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. The operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbols. Here, the stop display of the symbol may be the stop display of the special symbol or the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-4), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is deleted after moving to the variable icon display area 284 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12. ~ The hold icons displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are moved to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 for animation display.

  After the pattern variation display is started as described above, when the production button 136 is pressed once, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is generated at the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-5). An animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154(b-5) to FIG. 154(b-6), the hold icon extends vertically for a predetermined performance execution period. The animation display that stretches horizontally is continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154(b-7), after an animation that the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 154(b-8), the hold icon is displayed. It changes to a notice display mode that imitates the lord's face.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the example in which the single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the hold icon is changed to indicate that the production is successful, but the single-shot operation is also performed. Alternatively, it is possible not to perform the display for changing the hold icon as the production has failed. For example, if a single operation is performed by the production button 136, the hold icon is deformed, and then the default display is displayed again. You may make it perform the form effect display.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but, for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can In this case, for example, when the variable display of the symbols ends and is stopped and displayed during the long press operation, after the next variable display of the symbols is started, the production button 136 is pushed again to perform the long press operation. May be required, or the long press operation may be continuously effective even while the symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the variable display of the symbol ends and is stopped and displayed during the long-press operation, after the next variable display of the symbol starts, the production button to activate the long-press auto continuous hitting function It may be necessary to re-press 136, or even if the long-press operation is continued while the symbols are stopped and displayed, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be continued and effective. In addition, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In addition, the operation of the effect button 136 may be simulated by enabling the auto button function.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect movable body. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 155 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in super reach. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 155, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are decorative symbols. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 155(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed.

  Since the number of variable displays held in special figures 1 and 2 is 0, both the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off. In addition, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure reserved display h14 are displayed in a mode in which none of them is reserved.

  Further, in this effect example, a state in which the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and in response to this. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  Then, after shifting to the super reach as shown in FIG. 155(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "press the button" that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 155(d). Display is performed.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 155(e), the production movable body 224 is moved to the initial position (first position) indicated by the chain line as shown in FIG. 155(f). Position) to the position indicated by the solid line (second position).

  In addition, in the above-described production example, an example is shown in which the production movable body 224 moves as a successful production when a single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136 and the single-shot operation is performed. It may be configured such that the production movable body 224 does not move because the production has failed. Further, when the single shot operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the move because the effect has failed.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but the result of the operation is effected by, for example, performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be rendered by performing a continuous hit operation with the rendering button 136. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, or the first position may be swung, or the first position to the second position. You may make it move gradually toward. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and for example, a display as shown in FIG. 155(d) is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. If the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from before, the effect movable body 224 is moved as if the effect button 136 was pseudo-pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 became possible. May be configured to do so. After that, in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, when another effect for operating the effect button 136 is generated, the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or rendered (in other words, the result of the operation is displayed or rendered even when the rendering button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation is performed even when the button is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or rendered), and the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be invalidated so that the simulated rendering button 136 may not be pressed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 156 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 156(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure display device 214, for example, the variable display is performed in such a manner that the colors shown in the squares change into a plurality of types. Is. As shown in FIG. 156(a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the outlier, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. Corresponding to, the display result (for example, white square mark) of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 156 and subsequent figures, for the sake of convenience of description, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbol that is stopped and displayed can be recognized, but actually, it is stopped and displayed. The symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player. In addition, in FIG. 156(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  In addition, in FIG. 156(a), since the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display in the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In this production example, the timing at which the variable icon h00 is erased is the timing at which the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, but it can be set at an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. It may be present, or may be a timing before the reach effect is started. When the variable icon h00 is displayed in the default display mode, it is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 156(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

  When the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 156(e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 156(f). It

  In the above-described example of the effect, the single-shot operation is performed by the effect button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the cut-in image is displayed as the success of the effect is displayed. However, even if the single-shot operation is performed, the cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in image may not be displayed because it has failed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but, for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 157 shows the manner in which the reach effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 157(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, the operation accepting state may be basically set when the effect button lamp 138 is lit. In this case, it may be in the operation accepting state even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, or may be in the operation accepting state even when the effect button lamp 138 is lit. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is on, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, the operation is not always in the non-operation accepting state. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 157(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols, but the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 157(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00 which is the advance notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. In addition, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 respectively indicate the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. The animation display that moves to is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 157(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 157(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, at this time, since the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the pressing of the effect button 136 once and then press the effect button 136 again.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 157(e) to 157(f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the effect becomes the timing of FIG. 157(g). When the operation acceptance period of the button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds remaining. Then, as shown in FIG. 157(h), the cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

  In this example of effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, and is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 156(f). The cut-in image in the display mode may be displayed.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 158 shows how in the reach effect, the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 158(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In addition, in FIG. 158(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the automatic button function is in a valid state, and a character display of "auto setting" indicating that is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols, but the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00 which is the advance notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. In addition, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 respectively indicate the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. The animation display that moves to is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 158(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Note that a green light emission mode indicating that the auto button function is enabled may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 158(e) to 158(f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136 is generated at the timing of FIG. 158(g). When 2.5 seconds have passed since the operation was in the operation accepting state), the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 158(h), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

  In this example of effect, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated, a display different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIGS. 156(f) and 157(h) is displayed. The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by repeatedly hitting the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 159 shows how in the reach effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 159(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 159(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 159(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 159(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 159(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 159(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "repeatedly hit" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hit operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This continuous hit meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, and when the gauge is full, it is determined that the effect has been successful and the notice effect is executed. Has been done.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 159(e) to 159(g), when the continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 continues to emit red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 159(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 3/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD was not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that "sorry..." to that effect as the production failed. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which the continuous stroke operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the continuous stroke operation, it is displayed that the production has failed, but the gauge of the continuous stroke meter RD becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful. It should be noted that whether or not the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be filled no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example of effect, when the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is given. Although the notification is performed, for example, even when the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) is repeatedly pressed, a notification display such as a cut-in image or a notification that the jackpot will be a big hit is displayed. It may be performed. At this time, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e is disabled, and even if the long-press operation by the OK button 137e is performed, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification notifying that a big hit will be given is not performed. Good. Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e may be made effective, and even if the long-press operation by the OK button 137e is performed, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying a big hit may be given. In this case, since there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e due to a difference in button size, a difference in stroke, etc., the player can select and operate a favorite button. There is. Further, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and is not provided with the light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the OK button 137e is in the operation valid state, and the OK button 137e is used. It can be said that the operation is for an advanced person who obtains the information from, for example, a strategy magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or below the effect button 136 or the like so that the OK button 137e can be easily operated with the left hand.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example of effect, when the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is given. Although the notification is made, for example, only by operating the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification of a big hit is given. You may do it. In this case, the fact that the effect is performed by one operation of the OK button 137e may not be notified. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a game expert who knows the existence of the back button effect.

  In this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the pattern variation display, and is an example of a third effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode. it can.

  In addition, in this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that an example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

  In this example of effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be in the second state during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. That is, the effect button lamp 138 may be in a state of not emitting light, or may be made to emit blue light.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state in which long press automatic continuous hits are performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 160 shows a manner in which the reach effect is produced by continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 160(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 160(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  In addition, in FIG. 160(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 160(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 160(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 160(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, “ The character "repeatedly hit" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 160(d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 160(e) to 160(g), the continuous pressing operation is artificially performed by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the production button 136 being pressed is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), A pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 continues to emit red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 160(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds remaining. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 160(h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the production has failed, and displays a "sorry..." to that effect. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous stroke operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous stroke function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is displayed. When the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full after 4 seconds, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, assuming that the production is successful. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times (for example, 20 times). It can be said that the production of can be started.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is that the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is started and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result of the operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation (first effect) is displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. It can be said to be displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation) for the advance notice display of the cut-in image or the like that is successfully displayed in the continuous-stroke operation effect, and for the notification that the big hit is predicted. It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated), and when a long press operation of the effect button 136 (operation in the second operation mode), the continuous hit operation effect is successfully displayed. It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying a big hit may be started.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the notice display such as the cut-in image that is successfully displayed in the continuous stroke operation effect, or the notification for notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. It can be said that

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a state in which long press automatic continuous hits are performed in the effect by continuous hit operation of the effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 161 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 161(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 161(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 161(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player has continuously pressed the effect button 136 before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 161(c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 161(d). The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 161(e) to 161(g), the continuous-stroke operation is artificially performed by the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function, and the gauge of the continuous-stroke meter RD increases. In this example of effect, the player has already started the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136, so the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 161(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 5/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 161(h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that "sorry..." to that effect because the effect has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous stroke operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous stroke function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is displayed. When the tank is full, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, as if the production was successful. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect can be started assuming that the operating means has been operated a first number of times in the pseudo first operation mode. It can be said that it is configured.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is that the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is started and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect. it can.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect produced by a continuous hit operation of an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 162 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is produced by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 162(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 162(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  In addition, in FIG. 162(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special diagram 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special diagram suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of the special diagram 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 162(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of the special figure 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 162(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 162(e) to 162(h), when the consecutive hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the consecutive hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is turned off each time the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the pressing operation is released, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light again, so that it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. Sometimes it can be recognized. In addition, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, a different color (for example, blue) may be emitted.

  When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 162(h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 3/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 162(i), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that "sorry..." to that effect, because the production failed. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which the continuous stroke operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the continuous stroke operation, it is displayed that the production has failed, but the gauge of the continuous stroke meter RD becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful. It should be noted that whether or not the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be filled no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and in this case, the effect button lamp 138 is made to blink only once at the timing when the effect button 136 is first pressed. Good.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a state in which the notice of the pending change is given during the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 163 shows that in the reach production, the production is performed by continuously striking the production button 136 and the pending change notice is simultaneously given.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 163(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 163(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 163(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 163(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 163(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. The character "repeatedly hit" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long-press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 163(d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 163(e) to FIG. 163(g), the continuous press operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hit function, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the production button 136 being pressed is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), A pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  In addition, in this effect example, a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the above-described continuous hit effect, and the number of pending variable displays of the special figure 1 is increased to 4 as shown in FIG. 163(f). As shown in, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 is displayed in a default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the notice of pending change is started. However, in this effect example, the continuous hit effect that is being executed is prioritized, the operation of the effect button 136 accepts only the continuous hit operation related to the continuous hit effect, and the operation of the effect button 136 related to the pending change notice is at least the continuous hit effect. It will not be accepted until is completed.

  Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 163 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 160(i), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD was not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the production failed, and displays "sorry..." to that effect. Is done.

  In this effect example, after the continuous hit effect is completed in this way, the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the pending change notice can be accepted. At this time, if the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is continuously enabled and the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the hold change advance notice may be started by a pseudo operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be disabled when the continuous hit effect is finished, and the effect button 136 may be required to be pressed again. It should be noted that while the continuous hit effect is being executed, the continuous hit effect and the pending change notification may be simultaneously executed so that the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the pending change notification can be accepted. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the notice of the pending change may be accepted by the operation of the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, or the operation of pressing the effect button 136 once after the notice of the pending change is started. It may be configured such that the hold change notice can be executed by canceling the operation and pressing the production button 136 again.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous stroke operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous stroke function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is displayed. When the tank is full, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, as if the production was successful.

  Further, in this example of effect, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and in the continuous hit effect, the operations of the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted, and only the operation of the first effect button is held. It may be configured to be able to start a change notice. In this case, for example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled for the second effect button, the second effect button is long pressed to perform continuous hit effect while the first effect button is operated to change the hold. A notice can be started.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 164 shows how in the reach effect, an effect is produced by long-pressing the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 164(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 164(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  In addition, in FIG. 164(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, four reserve lamps in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 164(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 164(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 164(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, “ The character "Press and hold to save the meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284. This long press meter NO is displayed such that the gauge increases in accordance with the cumulative time that the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the gauge is full, the notice effect is executed assuming that the effect is successful. Is configured to be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 164(e) to 164(g), when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136. . It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 continues to emit red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 164 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO was not full and increased to 5/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 164(h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so that the decorative pattern display device 208 determined that the presentation failed, and "sorry..." of that effect. Display is performed.

  In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which the long-press operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the long-press operation, it is displayed that the production has failed, but the gauge of the long-press meter NO is full. In the case of a ton, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image, or to give a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production is successful. Whether or not the gauge of the long press meter NO can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if the gauge of the long press meter NO cannot be filled up, the gauge will not be filled up no matter how long the production button 136 is held down.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be used to perform a pseudo-hit operation.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 165 shows that in the reach production, the production is performed by long-pressing the production button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 165(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 165(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 165(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four reserve lamps of the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 165(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 165(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. The character "Press and hold to save the meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, on the left side of the variable icon display area 284, a long press meter NO is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the depression of the effect button 136 once and then operate (long-press) the effect button 136 again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 165(e), FIG. 165(f),... Then, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the long press meter NO is shown to be zero. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 165(h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so in the decorative pattern display device 208, the production failed, and "sorry..." The display is done.

  In the effect example described above, when the long-press effect is started while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not effectively handled. Even when the long press effect is started while the button is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be effectively handled.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be used to artificially perform the continuous hit operation.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a state in which a continuous hit operation is performed in the effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 166 shows a state in which the production is performed by long-pressing the production button 136 in the reach production.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 166(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 166(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 166(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 166(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 166(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. The character "Press and hold to save the meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 166(e) to 166(g), the player performs a continuous hit operation instead of a long press operation with the effect button 136. Even when such a continuous hit operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the time when the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 164, the amount of time that the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when a long press operation is performed, so the amount of increase in the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 166(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO was not full and increased to 3/6. In addition, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 166(h), since the gauge of the long press meter NO was not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 determined that the production failed, and "sorry..." to that effect. The display is done.

  In the example of the above-mentioned effect, the continuous pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the long press effect, and as a result, the effect is displayed and the display to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the long press meter NO becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 167(a-1) to 167(a-4) show a state in which the conversation notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 136, and FIG. 167(b-1) to (a-4). b-2) shows a state in which a pending change notice is displayed in which the display mode of the pending icon is changed by operating the effect button 136. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect according to the conversation content of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 167(a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area. The variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in each of the 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative design display device 208. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above. Further, below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed, and it is confirmed and displayed with a display result of a deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol display device 214. There is. Further, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a variation icon h00 in the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 284. .

  In FIG. 167(a-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display of the special figure 1 is three, the three holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the change display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 corresponding to this. , The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a non-hold mode. Has been done.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 167(a-1), an effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. Note that the remaining time meter is not displayed in this production example.

  After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 167(a-2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, “A reach is expected to develop. A balloon FD1 including the characters "Yo" is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation announcement is executed. At this time, the confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. Note that the confirmation sound may be output at the same time as the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 (the display timing and the voice output timing are different depending on the display control, the voice output control, the timing of signal transmission/reception, etc.). It may be moved back and forth), and may be output at a timing earlier than the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 or at a timing later than the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1. May be done. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. Further, in this example of performance, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the character image CH of Princess Chibi is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 167(a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the effect is further produced by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, when the production button 136 is further pressed once, as shown in FIG. 167(a-4), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the grandfather character image GY together with the message "Grandpa has an opportunity. The balloon FD2 including the character "" is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation announcement is executed. At this time, the confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. The confirmation sound may be output at the same time as the display of the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a timing later than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. Further, in this effect example, the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the grandpa character image GY is displayed. When the second-stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased.

  Needless to say, the contents of the character image and the balloon appearing in the conversation notice presentation are not limited to those described above, and various types can be adopted. Further, the number of times of the conversation notice executed in one conversation notice production is not limited to two, but may be executed only once, or may be performed three times or more.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, the conversation announcements may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo repeated hitting operations. In addition, the confirmation sound described above may not be output when the conversation announcement is executed by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function. Further, the gap between the timing at which the character image and the balloon are displayed in the conversation notice presentation and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the character image and the balloon are added and displayed every time the conversation announcement is executed, but the character image and the balloon are not added, and only the characters included in the balloon are displayed. May be changed. For example, by the first operation of the effect button 136, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach reach expectations" are displayed, and then the second operation of the effect button 136. Then, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to “I'll have a better chance when the grandpa appears”.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the second-stage conversation announcement is made when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long-pressed.

  Further, in this example of performance, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the second-stage conversation announcement is made more than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this example of performance, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the conversation notice executed as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is made by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed the number of times and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, FIG. 167(b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being displayed. At this time, since the variable display holding number of special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display holding number of special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above. Further, below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed, and the display result of the second special symbol display device 214 is confirmed and displayed as a deviating display result. There is. Further, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a variation icon h00 in the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 284. . In this example of effect, the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is off. The effect button lamp 138 may be lighted in red, for example.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 167(b-1), when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the fourth image at the timing shown in FIG. 167(b-2). The special figure 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode imitating the face of the lord. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. FIG. 168(a-1) to FIG. 168(a-4) and FIG. 168(b-1) to FIG. It shows how multiple events are held at the same time.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 168(a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 168(a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 168(a-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, four reserve lamps in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 168(a-2), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168(a-3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and an effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect are displayed. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Further, in this example of effect, since the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not treated as effective, and As shown in 168(a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any of the production button productions. Note that the first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. However, it may be started at a timing later than the start of the second effect button effect.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 168(b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 168(b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 168(b-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, four reserve lamps in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols. In addition, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 168(b-2), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168(b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. As shown in FIG. 168(b-4), of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the first effect button effect is displayed. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. As for which one of the effect button effects, the result of the operation of the effect button 136 is to be displayed, for example, it may be performed only for the effect which is started earlier, or the effect to be preferentially executed is predetermined. May be.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 169 shows a state in which another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started during execution of an effect of operating the effect button 136.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 169(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 169(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 169(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in a default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols. In addition, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 169(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed in the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

  Then, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation with the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. 169(d), as the first effect button effect, the decorative pattern display is performed. On the device 208, a balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach reach expectations for development" is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation announcement is executed.

  After that, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure holding lamp 218 Four holding lamps light up. Then, in the hold display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, correspondingly, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed as a hold icon in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of the second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, the second effect button effect is an effect that is started after the first effect button effect, and therefore, when the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued, this effect is effected. The result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the button image BTH is not displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon FD2 including a character "Grandpa's chance is up!" is displayed together with the character image GY of the old man at the timing of FIG. 169(f) by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. .. That is, the second stage conversation announcement is executed. When the second-stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased.

  In this example of performance, only the conversation notice effect is executed and the hold change notice is not executed. However, the long press auto continuous hit function allows the hold change notice to be continuously executed after the conversation notice effect is finished. Alternatively, after the conversation notice effect is completed, the hold button change notice may be executed by temporarily releasing the pressing operation of the effect button 136 and then pressing it again.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of operating the effect button in accordance with the rhythm. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 170 shows a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is being executed in the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 170(a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is being executed, and in response to this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Is being done. Note that, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display region 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display region 208c are stopped and displayed as the same symbol "7", In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols is still being performed, and the reach state is reached. FIG. 170(a) shows a state in which the state has reached the reach state and then shifted to the super reach. On the decorative pattern display device 208, "Princess dance SP reach" indicating the type of super reach that has been transferred and "Press the flowing button at a proper timing" for explaining the effect contents are displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, "mode 3" indicating the degree of difficulty of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels, and for example, the difficulty level is configured to be changed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

  In addition, in FIG. 170(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is two, the two suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. It should be noted that in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Then, after the "princess dance SP reach" is started, as shown in FIG. 170(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the princess character image HM dances to the music on the left side of the display screen. The animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. A hit image HT is displayed on. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT in accordance with the music.

  When the player presses the effect button 136 at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT as shown in FIG. 170(c), the timing image TM is changed to the effect button as shown in FIG. 170(d). The result display RS changes according to the timing of the operation of 136. The result display RS is displayed, for example, in a mode including the character display of "PERFECT" when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is received at the timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly shifted. When the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing, the display is made in a mode including the character display of "GOOD", and when the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing greatly shifted, "BAD" The mode including the character display of is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of the operation of pressing the effect button 136, and the notice effect corresponding to the final point is executed. If the effect button 136 is not operated at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT, the result display RS is not changed and the screen is scrolled out downward.

  It should be noted that, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the pseudo-effect button 136 may be repeatedly hit at regular intervals, except for the timing image TM overlapping the hit image HT. When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing of, points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility that the notice effect is executed. This provides an incentive for the player to operate the effect button 136 at his/her own timing without relying on the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect can be improved. Further, by the long-press auto continuous hitting function, only when the timing image TM completely coincides with the hit image HT (timing to become “PERFECT”) or slightly shifted timing (timing to become “GOOD”), The effect button 136 may be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. FIG. 171(a-1) to FIG. 171(a-4) show that the auto button function is released, and FIG. 171(b) shows that the auto button function is set. 171(c) shows a state of notifying the preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136, and in FIG. 171(d-1) to FIG. 171(d-3), the auto button function is valid. The state that the back button effect is being executed is shown. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. It refers to a specific performance. The player may be able to know the existence of such a back button effect on a strategy magazine or on the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly for the notice effect, but is not limited to this. Here, the mode of notifying that the operation is valid is, for example, that the effect button lamp 138 emits light, or that the effect button lamp 138 emits light indicating that the operation mode is effective. One or a combination of two or more of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound "press button") is output and a predetermined image (for example, a character display "press") is displayed. Say that. On the other hand, a mode that does not notify that the operation is valid is, for example, that the effect button lamp 138 emits light or that the effect button lamp 138 emits light indicating that the operation is effective, That is, at least one or all of outputting a sound and displaying a predetermined image is not performed. The mode in which the fact that the operation is valid is not notified may be that at least a predetermined image is not displayed. Further, in the case where the N notifying means notifies that the operation is valid, the mode in which the N notifying means does not notify may be the mode in which the fact that the operation is valid is not notified. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 171(a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the off, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to the display result of (3), the display result (for example, a white circle) of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the number of holdings of the variable display in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, both the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. There is. That is, FIG. 171(a-1) shows the standby state in which the symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, by turning off the effect button lamp 138, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. In this effect example, for example, in addition to performing the auto button setting as described above with reference to FIG. 149, in the standby state, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are simultaneously pressed to activate the auto button function. Can be set to state.

  When the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, as shown in FIG. 171(a-2).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 171(a-3), for example, when a button other than the effect button 136 (for example, the left button 137c) is operated while the auto button function is enabled, As shown in 171(a-4), the auto button function is released. That is, the auto button function is disabled. Note that the auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 while the auto button function is enabled, or the left button 137c and the right button 137d may be pressed simultaneously. By doing so, the auto button function may be released. Further, the auto button function may be canceled even when "no assistance" or "long press auto continuous hit" is set in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 149.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 171(b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "auto button is being set" to notify the player of the auto mode. You may make it easy to recognize that the button function is valid.

  The operation when the auto button function is enabled is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 171(c), when the effect related to the effect button 136 is executed, the auto button Compared to the case where the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the function, an advantageous timing for operating the effect button 136 is notified, and when the effect button 136e is operated at this timing, the automatic button function is used. An effect different from the effect that is executed by operating the effect button 136 in a pseudo manner may be configured to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. However, for example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Without performing, the back production may be executed when the production button 136 is operated.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(d-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. The first special figure display device 212 is definitely displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the outlier. In addition, in FIG. 171(d-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is one, one of the first special figure reserve lamps 218 is lit, and the variation of special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Note that in FIG. 171(d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, which indicates that the auto button function is enabled.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (d-2), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of the special figure 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in this effect example, the display for urging the operation of the effect button 136 is not displayed, but when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect is ready to be executed. It should be noted that the back button effect is executable, for example, based on the result of the variable display of the symbols, whether or not it is determined to be executed, and the back button effect is determined to be executed.

  After that, when it comes to the activation timing of a predetermined auto button function, the one-shot operation by the effect button 136 is pseudoly performed by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (d-3), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as the back button effect.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, it is shown that the display prompting the operation of the production button 136 is performed even when the automatic button function is enabled.

  Although the back button effect is executed by a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 in the above-described effect example, for example, by performing a long press operation by the effect button 136, the back button effect is performed. Good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Further, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect, and In some cases, it may be possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136. On the other hand, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect, in which case In some cases, it may not be possible to see the effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single-shot operation by the effect button 136. The effect content may be the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is operated, or the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single-shot operation by the effect button 136. There may be a case where it is different from the contents of the effect executed when it is broken, or it may be different.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example using two effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 172, a first effect button 136A and a second effect button 136B are provided as effect buttons, and effects related to the effect buttons are executed according to these operations. It is configured. Here, FIGS. 172(a-1) to (a-7), FIG. 172(b-1) to (b-4), and FIGS. 172(c-1) to (c-6). The figure shows a state where the effect is performed by a single operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this example of effect, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B have different button shapes, but they may have the same shape.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172(a-1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. In addition, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In addition, in FIG. 172(a-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the hold lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. Note that neither the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A nor the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is off.

  Then, for example, at the timing when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 172(a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172(a-3), one pressing operation with the first effect button 136A is performed, but as shown in FIG. 172(a-4), the operation result is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in this effect example, the operation related to the effect button is executed by the operation of the first effect button 136A. In addition, in FIG. 172(a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an expectation of whether or not to play, and to improve the effect of production.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 172(a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the result of the operation is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172(a-6), when the second production button 136B is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 172(a-7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may be in the valid state or the invalid state for the long-press automatic continuous hitting function. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is executed. 172(a-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. Also, for example, in the case where the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is executed, in the case of FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

  Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is executed. 172(a-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is executed. 172(a-1), even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(a-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In this case, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172(b-1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. In addition, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In addition, in FIG. 172(b-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the hold lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 172(b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is turned off. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172(b-3), when one pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B in which the effect button lamp does not emit light, as shown in FIG. 172(b-4). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed. In this way, in this example of performance, by turning off the effect button lamp of the effect button that will display the result of the operation, and by causing the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if the operation is performed, to emit light. In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an unexpected effect of the effect and improve the effect of the effect.

  In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may be in the valid state or the invalid state for the long-press automatic continuous hitting function. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is executed. 172(b-1) is started, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. In addition, for example, in the case where the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is executed, in the case of FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

  In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is executed. 172(b-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is executed. 172(b-1), even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(b-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In this case, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172(c-1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. In addition, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In addition, in FIG. 172(c-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the holding lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 172(c-2), the mode in which the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172(c-3), one pressing operation with the first effect button 136A is performed, but as shown in FIG. 172(a-4), the result of the operation is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in this effect example, an operation of the first effect button 136A executes an effect in which an effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 172(c-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an expectation of whether or not to play, and to improve the effect of production.

  As shown in FIG. 172(c-5), in this effect example, thereafter, both effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-5), when one pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may be in the valid state or the invalid state for the long-press automatic continuous hitting function. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is executed. 172(c-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. In addition, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is executed, in the case of FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

  Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is executed. 172(c-1), after the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. Also, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is executed. 172(c-1), even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172(c-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In this case, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 173 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

  As shown in FIG. 173(a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. For example, when the production image 136 is operated when the lord's character image Y is selectable, the character appearing after the jackpot game is determined to be the lord's character, and the princess character image H is selected. When the effect button 136 is operated in a possible state, the character appearing after the jackpot game is determined to be a princess character, and when the grandfather character image G is in a selectable state, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character that appears after the jackpot game is finished is determined as the grandfather character. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

  When the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 173(b), as shown in FIG. 173(c), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the grandfather are displayed. The display in which the character image G rotates counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and the fact that the grandfather character image G is selectable is notified. After that, the rotation display of each character image is performed as shown in FIGS. 173(c) to 173(f), and as shown in FIG. 173(f), the grandfather character image G is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the display screen reaches the center of the display screen, the rotation display ends. The state in which the princess character image H can be selected can be realized by further performing one pressing operation with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 173(f). That is, in this production example, the princess character image H is displayed in the first operation mode more than in the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations are performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is easier to select. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that is not selected by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It should be noted that when the left button 137c is pressed once, a display is displayed in which the lord's character image Y, the princess character image H, and the grandfather character image G rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

  In this effect example, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation is left unchanged and only the character image is displayed. It is possible to perform a character selection cancel display in which the characters are replaced. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Further, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the animation of the rotation display is omitted, and the character image in the selectable state becomes the position in front of the display screen. 173(d) to 173(e) when the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 173(c). The rotation display animation shown in) may be omitted, and the image may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 173(f).

  In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the character selection effect is the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display.

  In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the jackpot game is an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, and even if the long-press operation is performed, only one character image in the selectable state is transferred, so the first selection display is performed. It is said that during the execution of, even if the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the first time or longer, it is considered that the operation means has performed one operation. be able to.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 174 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

  As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the right button 137d before the start of the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a display in which the lord's character image Y, the princess's character image H, and the grandfather's character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is displayed. Be started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandparent character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the grandparent character image G is in a selectable state.

  Further, in this effect example, since the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the continuous pressing operation of the right button 137d is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous pressing function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 174(b) to 174(e), the above-described character selection cancel display is performed each time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, when the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 174(b), while maintaining the respective display positions of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather. As shown in FIG. 174(c), the grandfather character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y was displayed, and the lord's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess character image H was displayed. The princess character image H is displayed at the position where the grandpa character image G was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the old character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is repeatedly hit, and the princess character image H is selected when the right button 137d is long-pressed.

  In this example of effect, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is performed. It is possible not to perform the pseudo continuous hitting operation by, and when performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press auto continuous hitting function, after the character selection effect is started, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is pressed. It may be necessary to push them again. In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be limited. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective not only for the effect button 136 but also for each button constituting the operation key unit 137.

  In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the character selection effect is the second one in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display.

  Then, in this example of performance, the princess character image H can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, It can be said that this is an example of the second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display.

  In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character that appears after the jackpot game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 175 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

  As shown in FIG. 175(a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. In this example of effect, the automatic button function is enabled, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display in which the lord's character image Y, the princess character image H, and the grandfather's character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandparent character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the grandparent character image G is in a selectable state.

  Then, in this effect example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the continuous hitting operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 175(b) to 175(e), the above-described character selection cancel display is performed each time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). It should be noted that when the auto button function is enabled, the continuous pressing operation of the left button 137c may be performed in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 176 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed at the start of the big hit. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display "select character" is displayed, and the explanation display in the character selection effect is performed. Further, the lord's character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, the princess character image H is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and the grandfather character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. .. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in such a manner that a part thereof is covered by the above-mentioned character display. In this effect example, the character in the selectable state can be changed by operating the effect button 136, and the character in the selectable state at the end timing of the character selection effect (the character corresponding to the brightly displayed character image). ) Is determined as a character that appears during the big hit game.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display “START” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 176(c), the character selection effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176(c), the letters "PUSH" are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen below these character images together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button image 136e. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. Further, on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT, a balloon including a character display of "Press button to select character" is displayed.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 176(d), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Is displayed.

  Then, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 176(e), as shown in FIG. 176(f), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the grandfather are displayed. The display in which the character image G is rotated counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and the fact that the grandfather character image G is selectable is notified. After that, the rotation display of each character image is performed as shown in FIGS. 176(f) to (i), and as shown in FIG. 176(i), the old character image G is displayed as the decorative pattern display device 208. When the display screen reaches the center of the display screen, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time a pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136.

  In this example of performance, when the effect button 136 is operated during rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character images are replaced while the position of each character image displayed at the time of operation is unchanged. A cancellation display can be displayed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

  When the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. For example, when the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is performed after the character selection effect is started, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function causes the effect button 136 to be repeatedly hit, and as a result, the pseudo effect button is pressed. The above-described character selection cancel display may be performed for each operation of 136 (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display until the character selection effect ends (does not stop decreasing the remaining time of the character selection effect). However, the update display of the gauge may be stopped (the reduction of the remaining time of the character selection effect is stopped) while the rotation display of the character image is being performed. That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any one of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather is stopped and displayed in front.

  In addition, while the long press operation of the effect button 136 is being performed, the update display of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, it may be possible to suppress the unnecessary operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  Further, in this example of production, it is applied to the one that selects the character that appears during the big hit game, but for example, one that selects the music to be output during the big hit game or the normal game state from a plurality of kinds of music, or a plurality of kinds The present invention can also be applied to a story that selects a story to be executed during a big hit game.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of the selection effect executed during the symbol variation display. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 177 is an example of the selection effect that is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the effect of operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d to select one of the treasure boxes (the treasure box selection effect) is executed. It shows the situation.

  As shown in FIG. 177(a), when the treasure box selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2 are displayed at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. Between the right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed side by side, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below them. The right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2 are, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are, for example, white. Then, on the upper part of the display screen, a character display "Select a treasure box to open with the direction key" is displayed to notify that the treasure box selection effect has started. In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. In this treasure box selection effect, the left treasure box image BG1 or the left treasure box image BG2 is selected by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d before the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure box selected at the time when the operation acceptance period elapses. An effect in which an item may appear from the image is executed.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 177(b), the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode showing that the remaining time meter MT has passed 1 second, that is, a mode in which the gauge is decreased by 1 second. To be done. At this time, the left button 137c and the right button 137d have not been operated.

  When the left button 137c is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 177(c), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c changes from white to red, and The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure box image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button has been operated. Note that the audio output timing may be the same timing as the display changing timing, may be the timing after the display changing timing, or may be the timing before the display changing timing. Good. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 177(c), it is shown that, for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation acceptance period started.

  After that, when the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode in which the gauge is 0 seconds, as shown in FIG. 177(d), and the left treasure box image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed, the lid is opened and the effect display in which the booklet as an example of the item pops out is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 177(e). .. The items appearing in the left treasure chest image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as the princess character HM shown in FIG. 177(e1) can be made to appear. Also, as shown in FIG. 177(e2), although the treasure chest image has been selected, the lid may not open and the item may not appear. In addition, the same item may appear in the case where the left treasure box image BG2 is selected and the case where the right treasure box image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

  In the effect example described above, one of the left treasure box image BG2 and the right treasure box image BG1 can be selected by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d once, but for example, the selection target is a loop. May be. Specifically, for example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 177(c), the right treasure box image is displayed because the selection target is a loop. If the BG1 is selected and the left button 137c is further pressed once in that state, the left treasure box image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the selection target is selected in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. You may make it change the treasure box which is. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure box to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the treasure box to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after the treasure box selection effect is started.

  Further, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 177(c), the selection target is left. The treasure chest image BG2 may be configured not to change. In this case, only the confirmation sound by one pressing operation of the left button 137c may be output. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed, The treasure chest image that is the target of may be configured not to change. Further, in this case, only the confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous tapping operation.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect produced by continuously striking an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the production example shown in FIG. 178, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L and the front of the right edge part of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front of the left edge part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right image display device 209R is arranged at a position overlapping with. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R each function as a fourth effect means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a slide drive motor (not shown) via link members, respectively, and along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, directions close to each other. It is possible to move to. Further, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a rotation driving motor (not shown) via a link member, and when the positions are close to each other, the decorative pattern display device 208 It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Further, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting portion LL in which full color LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer periphery thereof, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting portion LR in which LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer periphery thereof. ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of second rendering means. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting units LL, LR function as an example of third effect means (movable means). In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 138) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmissive region can be made to appear as if it is emitting light in a predetermined pattern. The light-emitting body forming the light-emitting units LL and LR is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp, or another light-emitting device such as EL may be applied. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. In addition, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. That is, the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 178 can be said to be an example of the second effect. In addition, in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 178, the long press automatic continuous hit function may be enabled.

  As shown in FIG. 178(a), variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the lower part of the display screen of the right image display device 209R. Then, continuous hit production by the production button 136 is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 178(a), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Further, in the light emitting units LL and LR, all LEDs are turned off. In the present embodiment, in the normal time, all the light emitting units LL and LR are configured to turn off all the LEDs, but they may be configured to emit light in a predetermined mode. You may make it blink. In the present embodiment, a mode in which all the LEDs in the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off is also included in the one mode of the light emitting mode.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 178(b), the character "repeatedly strike" is displayed on the upper part of the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light, and the operation is performed. It is notified that the valid period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts a continuous hit operation using the effect button 136.

  When the player continuously performs the hitting operation of the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of LEDs to be emitted from the lower portion according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 178(c), it is shown that the LED emits yellow light from the lower ends of the light emitting units LL and LR to a height of about 1/4. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the elapsed time is displayed. In the present embodiment, the same number of LEDs are simultaneously emitted from the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR. However, for example, the light emitting unit LL emits light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL emit light. The light emitting unit LR may be started to emit light later, or the light emitting unit LR may be made to emit light first, and after all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LR emit light, the light emitting unit LL may be started to emit light. You may. Further, the number of LEDs to be emitted by the light emitting units LL and LR may be alternately increased.

  After that, when the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 178(d) is reached, the LED emits green light from the lower ends of the light emitting units LL and LR to a height of about 2/3. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display as if the light from the LED influences the image is performed. As described above, the light emitting units LL and LR change the light emitting color according to the number of emitted light of the LEDs, that is, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. It should be noted that it is also possible to change only the number of LEDs that emit light and not change the emission color. Further, only the emission color of the LED may be changed and the number of emitted lights may not be changed. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR changes, or the color of the LED may change after the effect image is displayed. , The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other.

  After that, when the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 178(e) is reached, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit red light. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting units LL and LR, and an effect display as if the light from the LED influences the image is performed.

  After that, when the player continuously continues the hitting operation of the effect button 136, at the timing shown in FIG. 178(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character and the success of the hitting operation is indicated. A mode in which the emission colors of all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR change so that the light emitting units LL and LR appear to emit light in iridescent colors (hereinafter, referred to as “rainbow color light emitting mode”). It may light up. Further, in response to this, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image in a display mode that is visually recognized in a rainbow color in the regions along the light emitting units LL and LR. The timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image, which is a display mode in which the effect image is visually recognized in rainbow colors, is displayed, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the princess character is displayed may be later.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 178(g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move in a direction in which they are close to each other, and left at a position overlapping substantially in front of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are the positions closest to each other. In the light emitting units LL and LR, all the LEDs are continuously turned on in the iridescent light emitting mode.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (h), after the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrally rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, At the timing shown in FIG. 178(i), the letters “celebration” congratulating the big hit are displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is displayed in the lower left portion of the right image display device 209R according to the orientation of the right image display device 209R.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 178(j), the light-emitting body arranged near the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. As a result, the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transmissive plate member 118 may be able to produce an effect with depth. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transparent area of the transparent plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the repeated hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 178(b) to FIG. You can see the effect and effect image that changes according to, for example, if the player does not perform the continuous hit operation after the effect by the continuous hit operation is started, these effects are not performed, At the timing when the operation valid period elapses, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move as shown in FIG. 178(g). That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 178(g) to 178(j) without performing a continuous hit operation, but the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR change. Since the effect and the effect image cannot be visually recognized, continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may be able to contribute as an incentive to enjoy such effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are turned on in the mode shown in FIGS. It can be said that it is an effect that may be executed as a result, and that it is an effect that is not started by long-pressing the effect button 136.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the continuous hitting operation effects shown in FIGS. 178(c) to (e) are effects that may be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are in close proximity to each other depends on the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. It may or may not be related to the light emission mode (light emission color) of the changed light emitting units LL and LR. Further, when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are close to each other, the light emitting modes (light emitting colors) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the effect is achieved by continuous operation and when the continuous operation is performed. It may be different or the same when it is not performed.

  In addition to the above-described light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting unit whose position changes according to the effect contents may be provided. In this case, the light emission mode may or may not change in relation to the effect by the repeated hit operation shown in FIG. 178, or the light emission mode may be changed in relation to the effect by the other continuous hit operation. The aspect may be changed. Further, in addition to the above-described light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting unit whose position changes according to the content of the effect may not be provided.

  In addition, the light emitting units LL and LR have a predetermined light emitting mode (first light emitting mode) even during execution of effects other than the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. ), the light may be turned on only during execution of the effect by the continuous hitting operation shown in FIG. 178. In the present embodiment, the first light emission mode is different from the second light emission mode, but may be the same light emission mode.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 178, the shielding device 246 (see FIG. 140) that does not include an image display device may be applied instead of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. In this case, The light-emitting units LL and LR may be provided on the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be integrally rotatable, but may be configured not to rotate. Further, although the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, they may be configured not to move.

  Further, although two image display devices (left image display device 209L and right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means in the present embodiment, they may be configured by one image display device. It may be configured by three or more image display devices.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a device other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, it may be provided on the front frame door 106. For example, the effect button lamp 138 may be applied instead of the light emitting units LL and LR. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may have a configuration in which light emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may be changed according to the continuous hitting operation. Further, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed such that the light emission unit provided on the game board 200 and the light emission unit provided on the front frame door 106 emit light in conjunction with each other, the effect may be improved. Further, each of the light emitting units in these aspects may be movable by the movable means or may not be movable. Further, when the movable means is provided with a light emitting portion and a non-movable light emitting portion, the non-movable light emitting portion is first made to emit light, and then the step is stepped up to make the light emitting portion provided in the movable means emit light. The light emission may be controlled to be performed. Further, instead of the light emitting units LL and LR, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 178(j) is applied to emit light in the pattern formed in the transmissive region. You may make it implement|achieve by changing a mode.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back button effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, below the decorative symbol display device 208, effect lamps SL1 to SL4 functioning as second effect means are provided, and are turned on respectively. It is configured so that control can be performed. Each of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 has a built-in full-color LED as a light emitting means and is covered with a lens cover. The character "8" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL1, the character "alternative" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL2, and the character cover is indicated on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL3. The character "General" is drawn, and the character "Army" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL4. In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 138) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmissive region can be made to appear as if it is emitting light in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the light emitting means constituting the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp or another light emitting device such as an EL. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. In addition, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the back button effect can be executed (the operation receiving period for performing the back button effect), it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, For example, a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as "If you operate the button at the time of ...", etc., and this tutorial display happens to be a back button effect. It may be displayed in a feasible period or may be displayed intentionally. The production performed by the operation of the production button 136 or the like while suggesting the back button production by such a tutorial display may be called the back button production, and is not included in the back button production. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 179(a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a reach title TT “Search for a family crest” is displayed in a rectangular frame to notify that the super reach effect is started. In the frame of this reach title TT, for example, a green color scheme is applied. Further, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be extinguished in a normal time, or may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a mode in which the white light is turned on).

  Then, when the player who knows the existence of the back button effect presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 179(b), as shown in FIG. 179(c), the reach title TT frame is displayed. The color scheme inside changes from green to red. That is, although the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) in which the reach title TT is displayed, and during this period, the effect button 136 is activated. A back button effect is produced by operating 136. It should be noted that the change of the color arrangement in the frame of the reach title TT may be performed by one pressing operation of the effect button 136, or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. Alternatively, it may be performed when a long press operation is performed for a predetermined time. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the color arrangement within the frame of the reach title TT is changed as the back button effect. However, for example, the color of the character is changed, the background color and the display mode are changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed every time the effect button 136 is pressed. Further, by operating the effect button 136 while the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may or may not always be performed. For example, the effect button 136 is operated. A lottery may be performed each time the game is played, and the back button effect may be performed when the player wins. In the example shown in FIG. 179(c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in the color arrangement in the frame of the reach title TT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179(c), even when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may change from green to red. Moreover, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, the color may change to a color other than red. In this case, when the production button 136 is further pressed, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may be further changed (for example, green>yellow>red).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the super reach effect is started. When the super reach effect is started, the character display "development due to the family crest falling" is displayed on the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 simulating the family crest is above the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that the development performance with higher reliability of the big hit is started by falling from the bottom.

  After the super reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 179(d), a player who knows the existence of the back button effect (back button continuous hit effect) starts the continuous hit operation with the effect button 136, and the predetermined number of times is started. When the pressing operation is performed, the effect lamp SL1 lights up in green as shown in FIG. 179(e). That is, although the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) during which the super reach effect is performed, and the effect button 136 is activated during this period. By continuously striking 136, a back button consecutive striking effect is produced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the effect lamp SL1 lighting in green, a green effect image is displayed in the region along the lower edge of the display screen, and the light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect display as if it is being displayed. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 is turned on in green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other. Further, the effect image may not be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamp 136 is repeatedly struck and the effect lamp SL1 is turned on, and the effect image is displayed along with it. However, the effect button 136 is continuously struck to display the effect image. Alternatively, the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on in association therewith.

  After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are sequentially lit in green in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. To start. FIG. 179(f) shows that all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. Although the display mode of the effect image does not change, it may be changed. For example, the display area of the effect image may be increased depending on the number of lighting of the effect lamps. Moreover, the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to the above-described order, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the big hit announcement may be given by making the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 different from the normal order.

  After that, when the player further continues the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 179(g) is reached, the effect lamp SL1 changes from green to red in light emission mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area is also enlarged upward.

  After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are sequentially changed from green in accordance with the number of times of operation of the effect button 136. The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 179(h) shows a state in which all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 have changed their light emitting modes from green to red. In this embodiment, since the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in the back button continuous hitting effect, the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 does not start lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4. In this way, in the back button repeated hit effect, the effect in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on and the effect for displaying the effect image can be referred to as an example of the second effect. Further, the effect image in the back button repeated hit effect can be said to be an example of the second display. Further, in the back button repeated hit effect, a mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is turned on can be an example of a second light emission mode.

  After that, when a predetermined effect time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 179(i), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends, and the decorative symbol. The display device 208 is moved to a position overlapping with the center front of the display device 208. At this time, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are in a rainbow color light emission mode. The descending operation of the effect movable body 225 is not an effect by the back button effect, but an effect executed in the super reach effect. Further, the iridescent light emission mode by the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emission mode associated with the movement of the effect movable body 225, and is different from the back button effect. It should be noted that the timing of starting lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the iridescent light emission mode may be the same as the completion of the descending operation of the effect movable body 225, or before the completion of the descending operation of the effect movable body 225. The timing may be, or may be the timing after the completion of the descending operation of the production movable body 225.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 179(j), the light-emitting body arranged near the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is changed, and the pattern formed on the transparent plate member 118 is highlighted. As a result, the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118 may be able to perform an effect with depth. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transparent area of the transparent plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 179(e) to FIG. 179(h), the light emission mode of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is set as the back button continuous hit effect. You can see the effects and effect images that change according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, but if the player does not perform repeated hit operations, these operations are not performed and the operation valid period elapses. 179(i), the effect movable body 225 is lowered at the timing. That is, the player can visually confirm the effects shown in FIGS. 179(i) to 179(j) without performing a continuous hit operation as the back button operation, but visually recognizes the above-described back button effect. Since it is not possible, continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  In addition to the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 described above, a light emitting unit that changes a light emitting mode according to effect contents may be provided. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed or may not be changed in relation to the effect by the repeated hit operation shown in FIG. The aspect may be changed. Further, other than the above-described effect lamps SL1 to SL4, a light emitting unit that changes a light emitting mode according to effect contents may not be provided. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be movable according to the effect contents.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200. However, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be provided in a device other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, it may be provided on the front frame door 106. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the effect lamp provided on the game board 200 and the effect lamp provided on the front frame door 106 emit light in conjunction with each other, the effect may be improved. Further, all of the effect lamps in these modes may be movable by the movable means or may not be movable. Further, when the production lamp provided in the movable means and the production lamp not movable are provided, the production lamp provided in the movable means is made to emit light after the production lamp which is not movable is first made to emit light. The light emission may be controlled to be performed. Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light-emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 179(j) is applied to emit light in the pattern formed in the transmissive region. You may make it implement|achieve by changing a mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button repeated hit effect may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode). It is a certain effect, and it can be said that the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 (operation in the second operation mode) does not start the emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button repeated hit effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode), It can be said that the effect image is not started to be displayed because the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time (operated in the second operation mode).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to say that the effect in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on in the back button repeated hit effect and the effect for displaying the effect image are effects that may be started during the display of the symbol variable display. .

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 180, an effect button unit 1360 is provided in place of the effect button 136. The effect button unit 1360 is configured to include a button portion 136P and a jog dial portion 136J. The button portion 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof is displaced according to the effect contents. The jog dial portion 136J is formed in an annular shape and is arranged so as to surround the outside of the button portion 136P. The jog dial unit 136J can be rotated in the forward and reverse directions along the circumferential direction by the player, and a signal corresponding to the operation amount is output to the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 141). Entered in. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 180, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Corresponding to, the display is stopped with a display result that is off.

  As shown in FIG. 180(a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the reach state is formed by "decoration 3", and the super reach (swordsman reach) is formed. Directing is taking place. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180(a) displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman, and at the timing shown in FIG. 180(a), the game will be decided. Is shown. It should be noted that, in order to easily recognize the contents of the effect, it may be possible to display what the effect result that is a big hit is (for example, a character such as "a big hit if you win the swordsman" is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT simulating the effect button unit 1360, overlaid on the animation of the duel scene, and the effect button image BT is displayed. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification prompting the user to operate the button portion 136P is performed. The effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits red light. Note that FIG. 180(a) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. When the player presses the button portion 136P, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a display showing that the hero has been defeated by the swordsman, as shown in FIG. 180(b).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 180(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the revival effect is started, and the characters "Rotate the jog to rewind time" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the jog dial 136J. Notify to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 180(d), when the player rotates the jog dial 136J according to the display of the decorative pattern display device 208, the animation is rewound until the display of the duel scene in the swordsman reach production. There are cases. Here, a predetermined effect such as an effect image or light emission of a lamp may be performed in accordance with the rotating operation of the jog dial 136J.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 180(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation of the duel scene is started again, and the large button image LBT, which is a large image simulating the effect button unit 1360, is displayed. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the big button image LBT, and a notification prompting the user to press the button portion 136P is performed. In addition, in the effect button unit 1360, the button portion 136P is projected, so that the expectation for a big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. The timing at which the button portion 136P projects may be the same as the timing at which the display of the deca button image LBT is started, may be after the display of the deca button image LBT is started, or the display of the deca button image LBT is started. It may be before. In the present embodiment, when the display of the big button image LBT is started, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is started. However, when the button portion 136P protrudes, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is started. It may be started. In addition, in FIG. 180(e), instead of displaying the large button image LBT, the effect button image BT may be displayed, and in this case, the button portion 136P may not be projected.

  FIG. 180(f) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the big button image LBT was started. When the player presses the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 180(f), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends as shown in FIG. 180(g). Then, the decorative pattern display device 208 is moved to a position overlapping the center front of the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed in order to complement the fact that the effect movable body 225 has descended.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 180(h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R, which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, move to positions close to each other, and the effect movable body 225. The left and right sides will be enclosed. The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate member in an arc shape, and have a shape that substantially follows the outer periphery of the effect production movable body 225. In the present embodiment, it may be possible to notify that a big hit will be caused by the operation of the effect movable body 225, and the player can recognize that it is a big hit by looking at this effect. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 180(g) to 180(h) do not necessarily have to be performed. For example, even if the button portion 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 does not descend and the effect is not removed. The result may be displayed.

  After that, when the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are retracted to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 225 is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 180(i), On the decorative pattern display device 208, a display showing how the hero has won the swordsman is displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the swordsman reach effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, and after the effect shown in FIG. As shown in d′), the effect shown in FIG. 180(e) may also be performed by pressing and holding the button portion 136P as if the jog dial 136J was rotated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing a long-pressing operation on the button portion 136P, it is configured to start a predetermined effect even if the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the predetermined operation by the operation device other than the effect button is replaced by the long-press operation of the effect button. Examples of the operation device other than the effect button include a touch panel and a touch sensor. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, if you perform an effect that requires you to rub your hand over the sensor and repeat the detection/non-detection of the sensor multiple times, press and hold this operation for a long time. You may make it substitute by operation.

  Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, it may be configured to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button, for example, a long press operation on the touch panel or a touch. It may be configured to exhibit a long-press automatic continuous hitting function by long-time detection by the sensor.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 181, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. FIG. 181(a1) to FIG. 181(e1) show how the production of operating the production button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is being executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be invalid.

  As shown in FIG. 181(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the reach state is formed by “decoration 3”, and the super reach (princess dance) is formed. SP reach) production is being performed. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "step 1" indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels, and for example, the difficulty level is configured to be changed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of success of the production in this princess dance SP reach.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181(a1), a timing image TM including the characters "CHANGE" is displayed on the right side of the display screen, moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, The hit image HT is displayed on the moving path of the timing image TM. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT in accordance with the music. Further, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that it is in the operation accepting state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 181(b1), the player starts a long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, and the pseudo effect button 136 is repeatedly hit at regular intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. Note that, during the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the pseudo effect button 136 may be operated only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. On the other hand, a skilled player does not perform a game for beginners, such as long-pressing the effect button 136 to activate the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect button is placed at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. A high score can also be aimed at by playing a game in which 136 is operated. The playing method of this "princess dance SP reach" is the same as that shown in FIG. 170 and described above.

  After that, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach ends, and the result of the game in the first turn is determined. When the determination result is the level-up determination result, the character display of "NICE" is displayed as shown in FIG. 181(c1), and it is notified that the difficulty level shifts to "step 2". . At the timing shown in FIG. 181(c1), the effect button lamp 138 is off because it is outside the operation valid period.

  Then, the game with the difficulty level of "step 2" is started. FIG. 181(d1) shows that a game is being played with the difficulty level being “step 2”. Then, when the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 181(e1), the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated again, and the pseudo continuous effect operation of the effect button 136 is restarted. ..

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid is repeated, but for example, the first period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid (for example, FIG. 181(a1) to FIG. b2)) and a second period (for example, a period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is effective) with an interval period (for example, a period illustrated in FIG. 181(c1)) in which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is disabled. 181(d1) to (e1) of FIG. 181), when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the second operation after the long press automatic continuous hitting function is once disabled. During the period, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is not effective unless the effect button 136 is pressed again. In addition, when the production button 136 is pressed for a long period of time from the first period to the second period while the interval period is sandwiched, the long-press auto operation is performed in the second period without pressing the production button 136 again. The continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  181(a2) to FIG. 181(a2) to (d2) show an example of the operation when the premium up mode is selected on the production customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG. 148.

  FIG. 181(a2) shows a state in which the premium up mode is set as described above with reference to FIG. 148(h1).

  As described above, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started after the premium up mode is set, as shown in FIG. 181(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image for urging the effect button 136 to be pressed. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen together with BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In this continuous stroke operation effect, if the long press automatic continuous stroke function is set, the long press automatic continuous stroke function is validated. When the player recognizes that the continuous hit operation effect has started, he/she starts the continuous hit operation using the effect button 136.

  After that, when a plurality of operations are performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, the cut-in image including the lord's character and the characters "iron plate" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 181(c2). There may be a premier notice that is displayed and informs that the jackpot is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the premier notice is likely to occur because the premier up mode is set, and if the premiere up mode is set to anything other than the premier notice in the performance customization setting screen Is likely to occur.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d2), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative pattern of the big hit, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5". Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mission achievement display showing the achievement of a mission (task) is displayed. The mission achievement display is like a history of the effect generation display that has been displayed so far (in this case, the effect generation display that displays "NO92: I watched the iron plate notice"). The effect generation display corresponding to the effect with higher expectation may be displayed for a longer time. On the other hand, the effect generation display corresponding to the effect with low expectation may disappear immediately, and when the effect is executed one after another, it may be overwritten and displayed one after another. Further, the effect generation display may be provided with a display showing the degree of expectation or appearance frequency of the effect, for example, a rank display of A rank to C rank. Further, the mission achievement display may be a display for opening the hidden effect for membership service. In other words, for example, due to the premiere notice shown in FIG. 181(c2), a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected) becomes executable and this is achieved. It may be displayed as a display.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting the premier up mode, the premier notice is likely to occur. In some cases, the mission may be easier to accomplish.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the menu screens described above with reference to FIGS. 148 to 149, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL and transition the setting screens. And, as a benefit of the effort of setting the premier up mode, it is easy to generate the premier notice (premier production).

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the result set on the menu screen described above is reflected in the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram for describing an example of the chance eye effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 182 shows a state in which the production is switched to the super reach after the production of operating the production button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the opportunity production. It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 181, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. Further, in this chance production, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a1), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern "C" forming a part of is displayed in a stopped state, and is displayed in a stopped state by the combination of decorative patterns which is the chance. Then, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. In this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182(a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the opportunity production is started. In the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation with respect to the effect in which the number of times the operation button 136 should be pressed can be recognized in advance. When the player who visually confirms the effect display shown in FIG. 182(a1) operates the effect button 136 a plurality of times, each time the operation button 136 is operated, the hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbol. There are cases where FIG. 182(b1) illustrates a state in which the three decoration patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a line. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in the mode in which the three hallmarks YM1 to YM3 are arranged in this manner is an example of the second display (second effect). On the other hand, it is displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, for example, a display in the mode of only the hall design YM1, or a display in which the hall design YM1 and the hall design YM2 are displayed together and the hall design YM3 is not displayed. Can be said to be a display other than the second display. That is, some kind of effect (output of a sound effect, etc.) is performed each time the operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and the second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed) after the effect is performed a plurality of times. Can be said.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 182(c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the cut-in effect including the character display “heat” is performed, the super reach effect is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 182(d1). Be started. In addition, in the chance production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182(b1) are arranged Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 182(d1) is started without performing the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 182(c1). Further, in the chance production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182(b1) are arranged 182 (c1), the super-reach effect shown in FIG. 182(d1) may be started after the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 182(c1) is performed.

  In this way, in the chance eye effect shown in FIG. 182(a1) to FIG. 182(d1), by operating the effect button 136 multiple times, the hall symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 182(b1) are obtained. In some cases, it is possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which all three are arranged. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in the manner in which the three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same can be said for the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 182(c1).

  In addition, for example, in the chance eye production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182(b1) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long-press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the advanced player can quickly operate the effect button 136 a plurality of times to see the effect earlier than the beginner. So you may feel more fulfilled.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182(a2), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern "C" forming a part of is displayed in a stopped state, and is displayed in a stopped state by the combination of decorative patterns which is the chance. Then, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. In this way, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182(a2), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the opportunity production is started. In the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation with respect to the effect in which the number of times the operation button 136 should be pressed can be recognized in advance. When the player who visually confirms the effect display shown in FIG. 182(a2) operates the effect button 136 a plurality of times, each time the operation button 136 is operated, the hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbol. There are cases where FIG. 182(b2) illustrates a state in which the three decoration patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in an aligned manner.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182(c2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed once again. A button operation additional effect that encourages such things is being performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 182(c2-1), the characters "Push and push" are displayed above the display in the form in which three hallmark patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. , A predetermined effect image is displayed. Further, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation valid period has started.

  Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 182(c2-2), as shown in FIG. 182(d2), the decorative pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect. However, at this time, the character display of "Gekiatsu", which indicates that the super-reach effect has a high reliability for the big hit, is added. In the chance production, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display is made in a manner in which three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182(b2) are arranged. Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 182(d2) is started without performing the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 182(c2-1) to (c2-2). In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of "super hot".

  In this way, in the chance eye effect shown in FIG. 182(a2) to FIG. 182(d2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the hall patterns YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 182(b2) are obtained. In some cases, it is possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which all three are arranged. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in the manner in which the three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. This can be said to be the same for the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 182(c2-1) to (c2-2).

  In addition, for example, in the chance eye production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182(b2) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long-press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the advanced player can quickly operate the effect button 136 a plurality of times to see the effect earlier than the beginner. So you may feel more fulfilled.

  In addition, in this example of performance, after the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is recognizable in advance so that the effect of additionally operating the effect button 136 is performed, the number of times to operate the effect button 136 is clear from the beginning. In some cases, the expectation for the player may be increased.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 183 shows, for example, how various settings are performed on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 183(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed due to the display result of the off, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to, the display is stopped with a display result that is off. Further, since the number of pending variable displays in the special figure 1 is 0, none of the first special figure 1 pending display h11 to the fourth special figure pending display h14 is displayed in a pending state. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 183(a), a special figure 1 hold number display section 281A that displays the number of variable display hold of special figure 1 by numbers is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The special figure 1 reserved number display portion 281A displays "0" indicating that the reserved number is 0. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183(a), the effect display in the standby state is performed.

  In addition, at the upper part of the display screen, the character "Display menu screen" is displayed together with the icon representing the effect button 136, and informs that the operation can be switched to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  When the production button 136 is pressed once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 183(b). Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light amount, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, and acquisition of the player's game history The three menus of "gaming history" are displayed in a selectable manner. In the lower part of these menus, the characters "Select" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the character "Decision" is displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. Accordingly, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d to move the cursor CL and operating the effect button 136. In this example of performance, the "game history" menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice, and if the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the first During execution of the selective display, a case where the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode, rather than a case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Can be said to be an example of the first image that is easily selected. In addition, in this effect example, the menu screen can be regarded as an example of a first selection display in which one image of a plurality of types of images can be selected in accordance with the operation of the operation unit.

  On this menu screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may make it move. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the menu screen is displayed, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed. The pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the menu screen.

  When the "volume light amount adjustment" is selected as described above, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 183(c). That is, an “adjustment screen” indicating that the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and an 11-level gauge of 0 to 10 indicating the volume is displayed below the display. 11-level gauges 0 to 10 indicating the brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light amounts of the game board lamp 532 and the game underframe lamp 542 are displayed. Then, below the gauges, the characters “change” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the characters “decide” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the setting for the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed, and by operating the effect button 136, the changed volume setting. Also, it is notified that the effect can be determined by the light amount setting and that the adjustment screen can be ended. On this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b. After that, each time the left button 137c is pressed, the setting can be changed to decrease the volume or light amount, and each time the right button 137d is pressed, the setting can be changed to increase the volume or light amount. be able to.

  In this adjustment screen, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the volume and the light amount are adjusted according to the pseudo continuous tapping operation. The setting of may be changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the volume and light amount settings may be changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the adjustment screen. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be in the valid state or the invalid state in the long-press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In this example of performance, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that this is an example of the first selection display. Then, for example, in the case where the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is one time by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed. It can be said that the voice output executed with “10” is an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

  When "member registration" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. 183(d). That is, at the top of the display screen, a message "Enter password" indicating that you can enter a password is displayed, and below that, a four-digit input that displays the entered characters is displayed. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets from A to Z and a cursor UB which is an underlined display mode are displayed. The cursor UB indicates only one of the alphabets A to Z, and indicates "S" on the display screen shown in FIG. 183(d). In this password input screen, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are pressed, the cursor UB moves, and when the effect button 136 is pressed, the cursor UB points. The alphabet is displayed as an input character in the input character display area. When the input password is correct as a result of the alphabets being input in the four-digit input character display area, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. It should be noted that the password input screen can be terminated by, for example, pressing the cancel button 136f.

  In this password input screen, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo The cursor UB may be made to be able to be moved in accordance with such continuous tapping operation. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c and the right button 137d. May be done. In addition, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the password input screen is displayed, , The pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d again after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the password input screen displays the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet “K” is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Is an example of the first image that is more easily selected when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation. You can

  In addition, in this example of performance, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the password input screen displays a first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet “K” is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Is selectable when the operation means performs the third number of operations, and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the second image that can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the button is long pressed.

  When "game history" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issuing screen as shown in FIG. 183(e). That is, at the upper part of the display screen, a "code issuing screen" is displayed to the effect that the game history can be acquired by reading a two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means, and below the display. The two-dimensional code CD in which the game history of the player is coded is displayed on the screen, and the character display "Please read" prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is displayed. In this effect example, the code issuing screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 183(f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear in the big hit or in the normal game state may be displayed. That is, in the favorite selection screen, a "favorite selection screen" indicating that a character can be selected is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and below the "character A" for allowing the character A to appear. , "Character B" for causing the character B to appear, and "Character C" for causing the character C to appear, are displayed in a selectable manner. Below these selection items, the characters "Select" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the characters "Determine" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is informed that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the character indicated by the cursor CL can be made to appear by operating the effect button 136.

  In this favorite selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be moved. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection item to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. In addition, when the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the favorite selection screen displays the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, the selection item of "character C" is the operation means in the first operation mode more than the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. Therefore, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations are performed is an example of the first image that is easier to select. Then, the effect by the character C that appears by selecting the "character C" can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen displays the first image from which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “character C” can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said to be an example of the second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selective display. Then, the effect by the character C that appears by selecting the “character C” can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183(g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during the big hit or in the normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select from three selection items, "song A" for outputting song A, "song B" for outputting song B, and "song C" for outputting song C. Is displayed in. Below these selection items, the characters "Select" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the characters "Determine" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is informed that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by operating the effect button 136.

  In this song selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved according to the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be moved. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection item to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press auto continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the music selection screen is displayed, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed. Alternatively, a pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

  The song selection screen shown in FIG. 183(g) may be, for example, one that is executed in the jackpot start effect.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the music selection screen displays the first image that allows selection of one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, the selection item of “Song C” is the operation means in the first operation mode more than the case where the operation means is operated once in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. Therefore, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations are performed is an example of the first image that is easier to select. Then, the song C that is selected and output as “song C” can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the song selection screen displays the first image from which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “tune C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said to be an example of the second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selective display. Then, the song C that is selected and output as the “song C” can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183(h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, at the top of the display screen, a "customization screen" indicating that various settings in the game can be individually set is displayed, and below the display, there are functions 1, 2 and 3 .. and setting contents for each setting item are displayed. At the bottom of these displays, the characters "Select with" are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and to the right of it is the "Change with" together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Is displayed, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b are pressed to select the function whose setting is to be changed, and the setting for the function selected with the left button 137c and the right button 137d can be changed. It has been informed. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

  In this customization screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is displayed in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may make it move. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping is enabled, if the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed before the shift to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed, It may be configured so that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b again after the transition to the customization screen.

  In addition, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed while the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, the setting can be changed in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only every one pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed, It may be configured that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the customization screen.

  Note that when the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 183(b) to 183(h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, or the effect button 136 is pressed and held. In the state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 described above is started, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the operation is performed. A pseudo continuous tapping operation of the button may be performed, or a pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by the long press automatic continuous tapping function on condition that the button is pressed again after the effect is started. However, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 183(b) to 183(h) are configured to be displayed so as to fill the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, FIGS. The various setting screens shown in FIG. (h) may be made smaller than the entire display screen, and may be displayed so as to overlap the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 183(a).

  Also, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 183(a), when one pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, without going through the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. 183(b), For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 183(c) to 183(h) may be directly displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not it is possible to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function. For example, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 183(b), an ON/OFF setting menu for the long press automatic continuous hitting function is provided, and on the condition that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is turned ON in this setting menu, the effect button When the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled when the long press 136 is performed, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is turned off, the long press auto continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to set ON/OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a predetermined operation with the operation key unit 137.

  Further, in the effect examples described so far, when performing the continuous hitting operation effect, if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the effect button image may display a moving image in which the effect button image is continuously hit accordingly. Further, when the long press operation effect is executed, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, the effect button image may display a moving image as if the long press operation is performed accordingly. In addition, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time to perform a pseudo continuous hitting operation, the effect button image is not hit and long-pressed accordingly. You may make it display the moving image which is doing, and may display the moving image as if pressing and holding. The moving image display according to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136, but may be applied to the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 183, and the up button 137a and the down button 137b. May be applied to the icon.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a state where the initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 184, as shown in FIG. 184(a), the production movable object GM1 is provided on the game board 200, and the position shown by the chain line in the figure (of the decorative pattern display device 208). It is configured to be able to move from the upper position (the position not overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208) to the position indicated by the solid line (the position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208). Further, as shown in FIG. 184(c), the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The production movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the rotation support shaft side of the front frame door 106 as a support shaft, and the production movable member GM3 is supported along the upper edge of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided and is rotatably attached upward with the support shaft as a support shaft. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

  These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 need to perform an initial operation to recognize the initial position in order to operate normally. However, the effect movable members GM2, GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game store clerk by being operated at a timing unintended by the game store clerk performing the opening operation, for example. The effect movable members GM2, GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game store clerk.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 184(a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided on the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the game store clerk. Is done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 184(b), when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed within 1 minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 184(c), The initial operation of the production movable members GM2, GM3 is performed. As a result, it may be possible to reduce the possibility that the game store staff may collide with the effect movable member performing the initial operation during the opening operation of the game store staff.

  Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the production movable members GM2, GM3, long-press operation of the production button 136 is performed, and in the state where the production button 136 is continuously pressed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. However, when the above-mentioned effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled and a pseudo repeated hit operation of the effect button 136 may be performed. A pseudo continuous tapping operation by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be performed on condition that the effect button 136 is pressed again after the effect is started, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. Good.

  Although the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 is started by the long-press operation of the effect button 136, the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 is performed by one pressing operation of the effect button 136 (single-shot operation). May be started, or the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 may be started by continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136.

  FIG. 185 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 185, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejecting means 1001 to the game area 1002 is ejected from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the ejecting means 1001 again. Further, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, lent balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown at 138 are not provided.

  Note that the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 138 described above may be further provided with the above-mentioned display means 1003, and this display means 1003 is further provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 1003 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hit operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, or when the long press automatic continuous hit function is in an effective state, the touch panel. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is not activated. In addition, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press automatic continuous hitting function on the touch panel may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. ..

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 185 encloses spheres and circulates the enclosed spheres in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.

  Note that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled for only some of the selection effects described above, or the long-press automatic repeat hitting function may be enabled for all of them. In addition, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled for only some of the selection effects described above, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled for all of the selected effects.

  Further, when the front button door 106 is opened, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a specific menu for setting by the game shop staff may be configured to be executable. In this case, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled or enabled.

  In addition, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function described above may be enabled over a plurality of symbol variations, or may be disabled when a symbol is stopped and displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. May not function.

  Further, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one of the effect buttons is being continuously struck by a pseudo effect button by the long-press auto continuous hitting function, the operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, the acceptance of the operation for one effect button may be temporarily stopped, the operation for the other effect button may be accepted, and then the operation for the one effect button may be resumed.

  Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, a lever for production, a touch sensor, or the like may be provided, and the long-press automatic continuous hitting function or the automatic button function may be enabled for the lever or touch sensor for production.

  Further, for example, the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid may be made to have regularity, and for example, after the start of the super reach effect, the effect that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective is not performed. You can Further, after the start of the super reach effect, the continuous hit effect may be performed.

  Further, among the executable continuous hit effects, the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled may be set to be more or less than the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled. May be.

  Further, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled than in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

  In addition to the second effect, the Nth effect may be an effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  In addition to the first effect, the Mth effect may be an effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

  Further, the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid may be only the second effect.

  Further, the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is valid may be only the first effect.

  Further, for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be made effective for the object whose display is decided as a result of the operation.

  In addition, in the effect in which the character display of “continuous hit” is displayed, the long press automatic continuous hit function may be enabled.

  Further, in the continuous hitting operation effect (or the plural times operation effect) relating to the success or failure of the big hit, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be made effective.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, effects such as effects may be performed in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. It can be said that the effect is different from the first effect referred to in the invention. In other words, the first effect can be referred to as an effect displayed as a result of a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  Further, in the continuous hitting operation effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, for example, an effect effect may be performed in accordance with the consecutive hitting operation (a plurality of operations) of the effect button 136 by the player. Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect referred to in the present invention. In other words, the second effect can be referred to as an effect that is displayed as a result of the continuous hitting operation (many times of operation) of the effect button 136.

  Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is made effective for the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of times of operation) effect that is mainly executed by the control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the winning or hitting judgment. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, not the control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that performs the hit/fail judgment, but a control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500) different from the main control unit determines the execution. The long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be invalidated for the repeated hitting operation (a plurality of operations) effect.

  In addition, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136 is exemplified as follows.

  (1) When the single-shot operation is performed after the button effect (single-shot operation effect) for executing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is started, the effect related to the operation result is executed. It

  (2) In the case where the single-shot operation effect is continuously executed a plurality of times, if the long-press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

  (3) When a continuous hit operation is performed after the button effect (continuous hit operation effect) that causes the effect button 136 to perform a plurality of pressing operations (continuous hit operation) is started, the effect related to the operation result is executed. It Further, when the long-press operation is performed by the effect button 136 after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the long-press automatic continuous hit function is effective, the effect related to the operation result is executed.

  (4) When the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long-press operation effect has been started, the effect may proceed as it is, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136 is executed. .. Further, when the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect may be advanced as it is by performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation, or the operation is performed assuming that the effect button 136 is long pressed. May be accepted.

  (5) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed (continuously pressed state), the operation by the effect button 136 is accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, a pseudo consecutive hitting operation is performed, so that effect related to the operation result is executed. It In this case, a pseudo continuous stroke operation is performed from the time when the continuous stroke operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the pseudo single shot operation. May be. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained.

  (8) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation for these single-shot operation effects are executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect that was started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (9) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect and effects related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. To be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (10) In the continuously pressed state, when the single-shot operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the single-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long-press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (11) When the continuous-stroke operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, and then the single-shot operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect and effects related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous-shot operation effect are executed. To be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (12) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these continuous hitting operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the continuous hit operation effect that has been started previously is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation of the continuous hit operation effect that is started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the continuous hit operation effect having a high priority set in advance is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (13) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the long-pressing operation effect is started, an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hitting operation effect and an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long-press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (14) When the long-press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result of the long-press operation effect and an effect related to the operation result of the single-shot operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (15) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result of the long press operation effect and an effect related to the operation result of the continuous hit operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the long press operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding these long press operation effects are executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect that is started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

  (17) When the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the single shot operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, Unless the long-press operation is once released, the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single shot operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the single shot operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136. There is a case where the effect proceeds as it is, such as when the effect is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed.

  (18) When the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the operation result of the long press operation effect is executed, Unless the long-press operation is once released, the effect regarding the operation result of the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136. There is a case where the effect proceeds as it is, such as when the effect is performed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed.

  (19) When the long-press operation is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and the long-press operation effect is started in that state, the operation result of the long-press operation effect that was started first is related. As long as the effect is only executed and the long-press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation of the long-press operation that is started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect regarding the result of the operation of any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and the long-press operation effect is started in that state, for the long-press operation effect that was started first, for example, the effect button 136. The effect may proceed as it is, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the button is performed, and for a long press operation effect that is started later, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 is executed. In some cases, the production may proceed as it is.

  (20) When the long-press operation is performed after the continuous-stroke operation effect is started and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function becomes effective and the operation for the continuous-stroke operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once released. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single shot operation effect are executed. In addition, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the continuous hitting operation is performed, and when the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect and the result of the operation on the single-shot operation effect Both of the effects regarding to are performed.

  (21) If the long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function becomes effective and the previously started continuous hit operation is performed. Only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the operation effect is executed, and unless the long-press operation is temporarily released, the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect regarding the result of the operation of any continuous hit operation effect is executed. Further, when the continuous hit operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation for any of the continuous hit operation effects is executed.

  (22) When the long-press operation is performed after the continuous-stroke operation effect is started, and the long-press operation effect is started in that state, the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function becomes effective, and Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and unless the long-press operation is temporarily canceled, the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long-press operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous hit operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. As for, for example, the effect may proceed as it is, such as the effect according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136 is executed.

In the above description,
[Image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area of the image display means [for example, a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a hold icon display area of special figure 2, a variable icon display area 280, etc.],
The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of the operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The notice means is a means that, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, is capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat] of the plurality of types of notice icons has a first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] A second number larger than the first number [e.g., three, etc.] is more likely to be a big hit than a digested case,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase or the digestion of the notice icon.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying an image other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the hold display area of the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be the hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be executable. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is equal to that of the notice icons”]. The notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be exhausted, so that the player should not miss the notice display. It may be possible to

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number according to the number of possibilities of the notice being executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display a number according to the number of the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, the "previous notice means" gives a false notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production which is a failure] in the same manner as the aspect of the previous notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is a big hit]. Is a viable means,
When the one of the notice icons (for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.) displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice means is a type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect that is out of sync],
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may be a means other than a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner. May be. Further, the advance notice means may necessarily execute a fake advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode, or may not execute the fake advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode.

  Even if the notice means is capable of executing only fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may be possible to execute something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. .. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

  In addition, after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be configured to be always off, or after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be a big hit. It may be.

  It should be noted that there may be a case in which after the false notice is executed, the notice in which the jackpot symbol is likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is executed.

In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “holding display means capable of executing display according to the number of holdings [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only a display corresponding to the number of reservations, or may be capable of executing a display other than the display corresponding to the number of reservations. Further, the hold display means may always perform display according to the number of reservations, or may not display according to the number of reservations.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute the pre-reading notice [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19(2), etc.)” The notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 19(4) The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching is displayed during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch is displayed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being displayed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. The notice icon may be used in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the hold display, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, may necessarily inform that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol In the period in which the variable display is executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28C, the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan increase display are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol fluctuation display”) is executed, the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed. The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 28(C) is the symbol variation display. Is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before]],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to display the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured so that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may not start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  The notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of the special figure 1, or at least the same may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 2, at least the same, or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the pending displays of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and at least the same may be the same.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a first advance notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22(49) to FIG. 22(50) or FIG. 34(49)],
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29(Ac) or FIG. 29(Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22(51) to (57) and FIGS. 34(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  The first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 19(1) to FIG. 23(66) or FIG. 31(1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means capable of performing symbol variable display [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) that is held (for example, the holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1). , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a second number [eg, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed than when the notice icon is exhausted by the first number. If it is done, it is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the variation of production.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase or the digestion of the notice icon.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of performing other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holdings only in the holding display area, or may display a display according to the number of holdings other than the holding display area. It may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area. ..

  Further, the symbol variation display may be one that can be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be one that can be started even when the hold is not exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  Also, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. However, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed can also be displayed. Good. In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times the notice display is displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other items may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display, or other than a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display mode. May be displayable. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display, or may not display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display. It may be.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it is possible to display other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. May be In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. There may be cases where, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed. ..

  Further, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be always off, or after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the fake notice display is displayed, there is a case where the notice display in which the jackpot symbol is highly likely to be displayed is displayed on the symbol display means.

In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, "the second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, effect holding lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, turning on a hold lamp of a number corresponding to the hold number, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured by two display means or may be configured by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured by including other than the image display means and the hold display means. In addition, the second display means may necessarily include the image display means and the hold display means, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold only in the hold display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of hold other than the hold display area. Good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holding while visually observing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute the pre-reading notice [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19(2), etc.)” The notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [eg, FIG. 19]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch in the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. The notice icon may be used in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the display according to the number of hold may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be one that always informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28C, the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan increase display are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol fluctuation display”) is executed, the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed. The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 28(C) is the symbol variation display. Is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before]],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to display the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured so that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may not start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the hold number, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the hold number. Good.

  Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays in accordance with the number of reservations of special figure 1 may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 2, or at least the same may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29(Ac) or FIG. 29(Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22(51) to (57) and FIGS. 34(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, or may display a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may necessarily display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. In addition, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 19(1) to FIG. 23(66) or FIG. 31(1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that.

  Although the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice in the above-described embodiment, it may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even while the special background mode for prefetching is being executed. Good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon a is consumed in the notice display a when the notice c is configured to be displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are exhausted, "the pattern in which the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variable display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed rather than the "variable display". Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. It is a display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variation display with the notice display b" is executed than with the "symbol variation display with the notice display c" executed. May be configured. Further, the notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are consumed, and the notice icon C is displayed. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed when the "preview icon A, the notice icon B, or the design variation display in which the notice icon D is consumed" is executed, rather than the "design change display in which the notice icon C is consumed" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be executed when "the symbol variation display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is executed than in the case where the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. It may be configured so that it is easy to confirm and display.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variable display,
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) that is held (for example, the holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1). , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, the second number larger than the first number [than the case where the first number [for example, one, etc.] of the notice icon is consumed [ For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when it is digested,
The second display means is the symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold which is the subject of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2)) which is the subject of prefetching. The display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display prior to the start of the "variable symbol display etc.]".
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, false pseudo notice or reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is configured by a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] Display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, effect holding lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, turning on a hold lamp of a number corresponding to the hold number, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display unit is a display unit capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(9) to 20(20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice). Is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, in the period in which the “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2)] is executed, the notice icon is displayed. May be digested in the fifth number [eg 3],
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [eg, FIG. 19]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed before the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching [for example, FIG. 19(1) As shown in FIG. 23(66) and FIG. 31(1) to FIG. 35(66), the increased notice icon is completely consumed until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28(C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand-box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed, it is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed There is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 28(C) is displayed while the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the "holding display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon shown in FIG. 29(Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29(Ac) or FIG. 29(Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 22(51) to (57) and FIGS. 34(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 or the like],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on the pending held before the third pending which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2)]. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 19(9), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285]. Etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 19(9) to FIG. 20]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19(9), has not been digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20(14). ],
Symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2)) Variable display, etc.]") is configured so that the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variable display may be digested [for example, FIG. 9) to FIG. 20(25), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19(9), is the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching, as shown in FIG. 20(23). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, "the first notice icon started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed may be consumed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, a notice icon for a hat. The notice icon I6 of this hat is consumed in the pattern variation display in which the display of I6 is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may start to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in 20 (25 ), the change in the symbol that is the target of prefetching is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has been displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (23 ). A hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a pre-read notice of the display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “during the display of the one-time symbol variable display, the second number [eg, three, etc.] is more than the case where the first number [eg, one, etc.] of the first notice icon is consumed. ] When the first notice icon of [] is digested, it is more likely to be a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 or the like] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the exhausted pattern variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 23(60) to (66), the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. Then, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern announcement, stage change production, reach transition production, premier announcement production, re-variation production, etc.]. ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon for hat I6, etc.] is consumed, the first notice display [for example, pseudo shown in FIG. 21(28) to FIG. 31(31)] as the notice display. , Etc. may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display [for example, a false continuous production or a reach transition production, which is an outlier],
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is consumed, a first false notice table [for example, a false pseudo-reproduction effect] is displayed as the false notice display. Sometimes,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be shifted in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect that is an effect that shifts to a special stage shown in FIG.
A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on the ribbon] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started [for example, if one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, The effect that the background moves to the prefetch mode is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 19(1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variable display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(9)] The notice icon I6 of the hat which is started to be displayed during the variable display of symbols] is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the display of the second variable display of the symbols [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching] The notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested while the pattern change display based on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 or the like],
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, a gaming table provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), a notice icon I21 for "house", a notice icon I22 for "monkey". , The notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 41(1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variation display. , The notice icon I21 of “Crest” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(23) to 21(32), a hat is displayed). When the notice icon I6 of No. is consumed, pseudo-linking may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 22(46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is consumed, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started],
The first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons (for example, the combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" shown in FIG. 41) is one symbol variation. By being consumed in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image displayed in the crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42(21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notice icon is consumed.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons can be shown in the pattern variation display prior to the start of the pattern variation display which is the object of prefetching, and the expectation for a big hit can be given. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed. When the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed may be displayed. There may be a case where a display other than the effect display corresponding to is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, a display effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed. When the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed may be displayed. There may be a case where the effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. It is possible that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be exhausted in one symbol variable display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

  Further, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons may be configured to display the first effect display as the effect display only by being consumed in the one-time symbol variable display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display, in addition to the fact that the first combination is exhausted in the single symbol variation display. May be done.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of a first number [for example, two, etc.] of the notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first combination icons including the first number of the notification icons is displayed until the first number of the notification icons is consumed. You may be able to continue to have the expectation that your may appear.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a “house” notice icon I21 or the like] and a second notice icon [for example, a “crest” notice icon I22 or the like]”. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 41(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the variable display of symbols ends, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the variable display of symbols to be read ahead is suspended. In the period from the start to the end of the symbol variation display, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monkey" notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "one-time variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is consumed, the effect image shown in FIG. 42(21) is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not consumed in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who has been able to see.

  Here, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. In the symbol variation display, even if only some of the first notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, only in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed, or only once. Even in a symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 20 and the like] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 4), the banchou character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases in which variations in production are increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the third effect display is displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or by the third notice icon being digested, The display other than the effect display may be displayed. Further, the third effect display may be configured to be always displayed when the third notice icon is consumed, or the third effect display may be configured to be displayed without fail. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the third effect display may be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or in addition to the fact that the third notice icon is consumed, It may be configured to display the third effect display.

In addition, "the pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20(21) to FIG. 23(66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20(21) to 23(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended," In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 41. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (the notice icon I21 of “house” or the notice of “crest” shown in FIG. 41]. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, a first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49],
Second display means [for example, the second decorative pattern display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative pattern display device 208D shown in FIG. 49],
A gaming machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 46(10) to 47(13) is exhausted, or FIGS. 47(16) to 47(19). ), the display of the banchou character BC performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or a pseudo continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 49(c1) to (c5). Etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46(2) to 47(13) or the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46(5) to 46(9)). Display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49, or the display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49(c6) is exhausted].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a look-ahead notice display, etc.],
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 49(c1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIG. 49(c1) to FIG. 49(c9), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the pre-reading target variable display until the end of the variable display. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, since the display relating to the notice icon may be displayed on the plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. Sometimes it can entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may consist only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 49(c1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49(c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been consumed in the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "second display means [eg, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 46(5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the display means capable of performing the stock production is determined, it may be possible to prevent the stocked notice icon from being overlooked.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured to always display the advance notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the advance notice icon in some cases.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on the display means other than the second display means. Good.

Further, in the "first display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. A notice may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46(2) to 46(5), a notice indicating that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Dr. Effect) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed in advance, so that it may be possible to keep the player focused on the display means and prevent the player from missing the advance notice icon. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case in which only a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in the first display means, a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed Other displays may be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed is always displayed on the first display means, and a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed on the first display means. It may not be done.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice is given that the notice icon is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon is also displayed on the display means other than the first display means. There may be a case in which a display for announcing is displayed.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4) or FIG. 1 is displayed over the decorative pattern display device 208A and the second decorative pattern display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the entire range.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 18],
When the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed across the first display region and the second display region [eg, FIG. 47(16) to (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 changes from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the length-long character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol. And the like displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Good. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed in the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, even if the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed over the first display area and the second display area, Good.

In addition, "the pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20(21) to FIG. 23(66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of the "variable display, etc.]" until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20(21) to 23(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended," In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 46. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (a notice icon I6 of a hat, etc.) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that the variable display is activated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52(12), a family crest part 224B shown in FIG. 44(d4-2), and the like,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), a notice icon I21 for "house", a notice icon I22 for "monkey". , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19(2)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66) and FIG. 52, in the period from the suspension of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variable display, In the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are displayed, etc.],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [eg, a movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 52(12) to 52(17)]. Is a viable means,
The first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, a game table characterized by the movable means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that variations of the effect can be increased. There are cases.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused on not only the display means but also the movable means, and the staging effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect may be executed. A movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed in some cases when the fourth notice icon is exhausted. Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, it may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the notice icons displayed has been exhausted, or the notice icon displayed may be changed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 19(2)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the variable display of symbols is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66) and FIG. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of the target symbol to the end of the variable display of the symbol, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon I31 of the drink are consumed, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the notice icons displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18, the notice icon I21 of “house”, etc.] is consumed, the first movable icon is displayed. The production is configured not to be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon among the notice icons displayed is consumed, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or among the notice icons displayed. When the fifth notice icon is exhausted, the movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are exhausted.

  Further, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons has been exhausted, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in cases other than the case where the five notice icons are exhausted.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to a mode of the operation means from a first mode [for example, a default position shown in FIG. 52(12)] to a second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 52(17). The projected position, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the change of the operation means may be notified by the notification icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

  Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operating means, or may be movable other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may be one that can always move the operating means, or may not move the operating means.

In addition, “second movable means [for example, a family crest part shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)] is provided,
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest fall effect shown in FIG. 44(d4-2)].
The second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes rich, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon of the above is exhausted. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed has been exhausted, or the notice icon displayed may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, "the pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20(21) to FIG. 23(66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of the "variable display, etc.]" until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20(21) to 23(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended," In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 41. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

Further, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes or a notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.). Is not an icon that indicates the number of operations of the variable display of special figure 1 that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 54(1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, to the termination of the symbol variation display. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 54(2) to 54(6), a notice that a notice icon by a lord's effect is displayed, etc.] ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may display only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may display a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of only indicating that the notice icon may be displayed, or may be other than the notice icon display being sometimes started. It may be suggestable. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that the notice icon may be displayed, or may not indicate that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 54(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, twice as shown in FIGS. 54(2) to 54(5)). The notice that the notice icon by the lord's production will be displayed over the variable display of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestive display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the symbol variation display. It may be that there is a case. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is configured to be terminated during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 54 (2) ~ As shown in (5) of the same figure, the advance notice that the advance notice icon is displayed by the lord's presentation is finished before the start of the variable pattern display, which is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestive display is terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started, so that it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion may be configured to be terminated during the display of the variable display of symbols displayed prior to the display. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be finished during the display of the symbol variable display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestive display may be configured to end only during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variable display that is displayed before is displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may indicate that at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56(a1-4), in the Amida effect, at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand-box notice icon I9 may be displayed. Suggesting that there is such a thing],
The third number is a number greater than or equal to 2,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, at least one of the previously-predicted notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be displayed, or It may also indicate something other than that the display of at least one of the number of notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be started, or the notice icon of the third number may be displayed. It may not indicate that the display of at least one of the may be initiated.

Further, “at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [eg, 56(a1-1) to 56(a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. Further, it may be configured such that the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display, is always started. There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which has been suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display, may not be started.

In addition, "the pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20(21) to FIG. 23(66) is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of the "variable display, etc.]" until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20(21) to 23(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended," In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 54. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 54 (a notice icon I6 of a hat, etc.) It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that the variable display is activated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [eg, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57(2)]) Display) is held after ".") is suspended. (Hereinafter, referred to as "first design variation display [eg, design variation display shown in FIGS. 57(4) to (13)]"). May be started,
In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(4) to 23(66), the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is held pending. From the start of the display of No. until the end of the pattern variation display that is the big hit that is the target of the prefetch, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it starts after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the read-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the read-ahead.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

  Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display is also retained after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only one symbol variable display is started.

  Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, there may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, "in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 19(4) to 23(66), the target of the prefetch is started after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display which is the big hit that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. By the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of the fan are consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed to the end, it is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy digesting the notice icon as a prefetching notice display related to the second symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching from the symbol variation display.

  Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case in which the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Also, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, or the first symbol variable display There may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are not digested during the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, a plurality of the notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 57. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (such as the notice icon I6 of a hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that the variable display is activated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, in the case where the “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 57(2)] is suspended, the second The display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57(2)] is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variable display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variable display is suspended, or in the case other than the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. In addition, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail when the second symbol variable display is held, and the display of the second hold display is displayed when the second symbol variable display is held. It does not have to be started.

Also, as the second prefetching notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetching display mode [for example, the prefetching notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) shown in FIG. 57(2), etc.]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. 57 (2 ), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of read-ahead, is suspended. Display etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases in which variations of the prefetching notice display are increased and interest is improved.

  Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second read-ahead display mode as the second read-ahead notice display, or the second hold display may be displayed as the second read-ahead notice display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the form.

  Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variable display that is displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second suspended display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second symbol variation display. The second variable display may not be displayed in the second read-ahead display mode in the symbol variable display that is displayed when is suspended.

  Also, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetching notice display [for example, the effect display of the prefetching mode shown in FIG. 58 (b2) to FIG. 58 (b3)],
The third look-ahead notice display is a display that may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 58(b1) to 58(b3). As described above, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol variable display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the prefetch target, is suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variation of the prefetching notice display is increased, so that the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than that, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, “a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that becomes a loss based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57(2)] "Display etc.]" is suspended and is referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 57(4) to 57(13)]". ) May be displayed,
The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, the figure As shown in 19(4) to FIG. 23(66), in the target of the prefetching after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display, which is the target of the prefetching, is suspended By the end of the pattern variation display which is a certain loss, the notice icon I6 of two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of a fan, etc. are displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Further, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started.

  Further, it is possible that only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 20(21) to 23(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended," In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19(2) to 23(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Done notice icon is displayed..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 69(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord", etc. displayed in the tutorial display TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a notice icon I62 of a swordsman). And the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the first display may be capable of being displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or may be capable of being displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be able to be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one. Further, when the notice icon is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area. .

Also, “the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, Explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

Further, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69(a7), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When the notice icons are all exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display may be resumed. There may be. Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of “intense heat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68(d), etc.],”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as "Due to notice notice icon..." in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means displays a display matched with the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66(a2) to (a4), and a notice of the swordsman is displayed. A display in which the icon I62 is stocked],
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display matched with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69(a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 63(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 69(a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area as well. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69(a7), the stage name display portion ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-reminder icons I65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “the third display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a7), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name display section ST2 does not display the stage name, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The third display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. The first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 69. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 69(a7), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69. The hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc.] is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area or the like shown in FIG. 69],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Done notice icon is displayed..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 69(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord", etc. displayed in the tutorial display TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in the first display area [eg, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69(a9), the tutorial display section TT4 has a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up. The notice icon I63 of is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch advance notice display, or may be other than displayed as the prefetch advance notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the first display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display other than the display may not be displayed. The first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or the first display may not be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

  The first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon first display area is displayed, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon first display area is displayed, Only the first display may not be displayed.

Also, when the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69(a9), the notice icon may be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When all of the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be cases where Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

  In addition, when the first display is, for example, an explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of “intense heat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68(d), etc.],”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as "Due to notice notice icon..." in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red is hot” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 68(a1), (A6) is a character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon TT2, a character display of "Panda breaks in" in the balloon TT3, etc.].
The third display is an explanation display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 68(a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the second display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

In addition, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a10), Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the text display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon display section TT2 and "Panda breaks in" in the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even when the display is on, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be always displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  Also, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, a notice display different from the first notice display (second notice display) may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69(a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 63(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 69(a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In the state where the first number [for example, three] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when the three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all of the display content may be different.

  The fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

  Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area, or In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, “the fourth display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a9), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name display section ST2 does not display the stage name, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66(a2) to (a4) and a notice icon I62 of a swordsman is displayed. Are stocked, etc.],
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display associated with the display of the second display means, or a display other than the display associated with the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display associated with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. The first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 69. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 69(a9), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

  Note that the number of holdings and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

  Further, the maximum number of holdings and the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 74],
It is configured to be able to display the notice icon in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the swordsman's notification icon I62 displayed in the notification icon display area shown in FIG. 74(l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the second display mode [for example, the display of the enlarged swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 74(i). Aspect etc.],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 74(l). Also, the size of the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 74(i) is larger, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [for example, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked as shown in FIG. 74(i), The swordsman's notice icon I62 is enlarged, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  Further, the size of the notice icon in the second display mode may be larger than that in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon in the second display mode may be larger than that in the first display mode. There may be no cases.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ), and then displayed in a normal display mode as shown in FIG. 74(l)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. In some cases, the display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in this display mode.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode [for example, a normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area as shown in FIG. 74(l). The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are not overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display only in the first display mode, or may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display in display modes other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode. ..

In addition, “the decorative symbol variable display is a display that does not overlap the notice icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 74(l), the decorative pattern in the variable display is the notice icon. It is not overlapped with the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 or the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area],
The decorative pattern variable display is a display that may be overlapped with the notice icon in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 74(i), the decorative pattern in the variable display is a notice. It is overlapped with the pseudo-reminder icon I65 in the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF or the swordsman notice icon I62],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the decorative pattern variable display may not overlap only the notice icon in the first display mode, or may not overlap other than the notice icon in the first display mode. .. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap the notice icon of the first display mode.

  Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be some. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

Further, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when it is consumed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is consumed, or may be displayed in the second display mode when it is not digested. It may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode without fail when it is consumed, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is consumed.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 74(a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 74(l), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in the normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area, or when it is displayed in the hold display area other than the first display mode. The display mode may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed by.

Further, “When the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 74(i) When the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-reminder icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be always displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, “the second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 74(i) is An enlarged display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 74(l)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which any other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. Yes,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of the notice icons [eg, the notice icons shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the notice icons shown in FIG. 72(d), etc.]. And
When the notice icon has been consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(23) to (25). In the case where the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 21(28) to (31) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a substance other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Also, when the notice icon is consumed, only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be consumed. There may be a case where a notice display other than the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon is displayed. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

  In addition, only when the notice icon has been consumed, a notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is not consumed. There may be a case where a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter referred to as the "hold number") [for example, FIG. In the hold icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the variable display of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [eg, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77(a)],
An icon (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) related to the variable display of symbols is configured to be displayed in an area inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “internal area”) of the icon display frame [for example, As shown in FIG. 77(a), the variable icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77(a)],
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77(i)],
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77(i) is shown in FIG. The pending display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.],
The second display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, a variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77(b) and a second ornament on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Variable display of symbols etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, in the default display mode shown in FIG. 77(b). The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. so,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the icon display frame that is preferentially displayed is expanded, and notices are given to the player by performing an effect such as a notice or a prefetch notice in the expanded portion. In some cases it can be done. In recent game consoles, multiple colorful presentations are displayed at the same time, so it tends to be complicated and difficult to see. However, according to this game console, the icon relating to the symbol variation display that the player always pays attention to. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying, it becomes possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include one other than the icon display frame. In addition, the first display may necessarily include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

  Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as a "holding display frame", a "holding frame", a "UI", a "holding icon display area", or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like. Further, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect display. In addition, the “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be a display frame that is overlapped by at least a part of the hold icon or the like. It can also be said that the "icon display frame" is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like and is a background display different from the background display of the decorative pattern.

  In addition, here, the "icon display frame" is a portion where the player can recognize that the icon is displayed without being caught by the word "frame", and the frame image is displayed. This is an example and not a limitation.

  Further, only the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame, or a component other than the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon may be configured to always be displayed in the inner area of the icon display frame, or may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the inner area of the icon display frame. Good.

  Note that, here, the in-frame region constitutes an icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

  Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  Further, the icon display frame may be capable of being displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be one. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Good.

  Further, the second display mode may be an expansion of only a part of the first display mode, or may be an expansion of the entire first display mode.

  Here, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  In addition, the term “expansion” can be said to mean the display of an “icon display frame” in a broader sense, or the area of an image or a region can be increased.

  In addition, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and also in the display modes other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. The first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. It may be.

  Here, the "decorative design variable display" may include a display of a decorative design stopped or a display in a state in which the design is identifiable at the start of the variation, for example, during a high-speed variation, during a stop display. May be included in a display state that is more difficult to identify than the display state of (1) or the display state at the start of the change (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed change), or a decoration with a smaller size displayed during SP reach, etc. A variable display of symbols may be included.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display [for example, a ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 shown in FIGS. 77(g) to (l) to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Performance display, etc.]
A part of the second display mode that is expanded from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expanded part [for example, an expanded part in the reserved display frame FL1 of the expanded display mode shown in FIG. 77(i), etc. ]])), the third display is configured to be overlapped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77(g) to 77(l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of N., the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 and the like],
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is the variable display first portion). No overlap with 1 decorative pattern or 2nd decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, at least the expanded display of the icon display frame is prioritized over the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating the validity of the change, and the effect display such as the advance notice or the prefetch advance notice is displayed in the extended part, so the effect In some cases, the effect can be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

  Here, the “effect display” includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, and the like.

  Further, only the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion, or displays other than the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion. Also, the third display may be configured to be displayed in the expanded portion without fail, or the third display may not be displayed in the expanded portion in some cases. Good.

  Note that, here, the “extended portion” may refer to a difference from the portion before the extension, or, when only a part of the icon display frame before the extension is extended (or enlarged), it may refer to itself. ..

  Further, the expanded portion may not overlap only the second display, or may not overlap any display other than the second display. In addition, the extended portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may sometimes overlap the second display.

In addition, “the effect display is a display of a prefetching notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 77(g) to 77(l)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77(g) to 77(l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display that may overlap with the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed holds the expanded display mode. It is overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be overlapped only with the expanded portion, or may be overlapped with a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the second display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display of a dialog [for example, a display of the dialog by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi in the balloon TT2, a display of the dialog by the grandpa character GY1 in the balloon TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 77(i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that is not overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(d), a hold display of a default display mode]. The frame FL1 does not overlap the balloons TT2 and TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the pending display frame FL1 in the expanded display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the dialogue displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, the "display of the dialogue" may be referred to as "serif notice" or "conversation notice", and may include, for example, notice of the change, prefetch notice, tutorial display, or the like.

  The fourth display may not overlap only the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that don't exist. The fourth display may not necessarily overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode. It may be.

  It should be noted that here, "the fourth display is a display that does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode" does not seem to overlap in display position. It is a concept that also includes things that are configured.

  Further, the fourth display may be overlapped only with the expanded portion, or may be overlapped with a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the fourth display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.

  In addition, the "display of the dialog" includes the display of the first dialog and the display of the second dialog, and the display of the first dialog is a display that may be overlapped with the extension part. The display of the second line may be a display that is not overlapped with the extension portion.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display for changing the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 82(c-1) to (c-6) or FIG. 84(c). -1) to (c-4) in the figure, the effect display for changing the display mode of the variable icon h0, etc.],
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 82(c-1) to (c-6) is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode or the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 84(c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. It overlaps with the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1, etc.],
Part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display [for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 77(g) to (l). The display and the effect display that changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 82(c-1) to (c-6) are also shown in FIGS. 84(c-1) to (c-). In the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the expanded display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the change is due to the decorative pattern, but by displaying both the third display and the fifth display in the expanded icon display frame, the icon display frame is displayed. If you look at it, you may be able to see both displays without missing them. Also, if all of the third display and the fifth display are different modes, it may become clear whether or not to expect the fluctuation or the symbol fluctuation display to be performed after that. By making a part of the display and a part of the fifth display the same, it may be possible to increase the expectation until it is possible to recognize which of the expected symbol variation displays is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be able to overlap and be displayed, or in the expanded portion, displays other than the fifth display may be configured to be able to be overlapped and displayed. It may be one that has been created. Further, in the expanded portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed so as to overlap with each other. In the expanded portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapped manner. It may be configured as.

  Also, the fifth display may be configured to be able to overlap and display only in the expanded portion, or the fifth display may be overlapped and displayed in the portion other than the expanded portion. It may be configured.

  Here, the "notice display" may be a change effect of the variable icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo continuous symbol, or the like.

  In addition, "a part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display" is a concept including, for example, that the animation up to the appearance of the character is the same.

In addition, “the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter, “the area within the frame of the first display area [for example, the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode illustrated in FIG. 77(a)] Etc.]”) is the first area,
The area inside the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second frame area [for example, an area inside the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in Fig. 77(i)]". .) is the second area,
The second area is larger than the first area,
The expanded portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame area and the first in-frame area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second in-frame area is an area configured to include the first in-frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed. The area inside the frame is configured to include the area inside the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. It may be.

Further, "the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 means that "the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. 77. "For example, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the area within the pending display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold, and symbol variation display is not performed. , The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. The display mode may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to always be displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

Further, “The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 and the like displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may display only the hold icon as an icon, or may display something other than the hold icon as the icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as the icon, or may not display the hold icon as the icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being suspended, or corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being suspended. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols may be displayed without fail, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the change display of symbols held May not be displayed.

In addition, “The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, FIG. 77(f) to FIG. The extended display mode of the reserved display frame FL1 shown in) is overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. The first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display mode, or may overlap the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
A production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect button generated after the second time shown in FIG. 150 in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Effect display by pseudo-linking performed as a result of operation 136.
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
In the first effect, the operation means performs a first number of times [for example, 20 times] in a first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation with the effect button 136 (single operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, long-pressing operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
In the second effect, the operation is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. In the case where the effect is more likely to be started, for example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, execution of the effect button 136 operation that occurs after the second time shown in FIG. The effect display by the pseudo-run is not started by a long press operation with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Here, the first effect may be, for example, an effect corresponding to "re" of "Doremi", and the second effect is, for example, "i" of "ayu". In some cases, it can be said that the corresponding production.

  Further, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be one that can be started. Also, the first effect always starts when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Start when the operation means performs the first number of times of operation in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation of the second operation mode. You may not.

Further, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, continuous hit operation effects shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g), effect button images It is a presentation in which the character "repeatedly strike" is displayed together with BT],
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing displays other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the third effect may be able to be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be able to be started other than during the symbol variable display. Further, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, It may be started only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or may be started by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. Even when the operation is performed the number of times, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation may be started other than the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, The operation may be always started when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode may be performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. The operation may not be started when the operation is performed the number of times and when the operation unit performs the operation once in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time period [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed down is operated. Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated in the first number of times in the first number of times. As a matter of fact, the first effect is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times only when the operating state is maintained for the second time. The operation means may be startable, or the operation means may be pseudo-operated the first number of times in the first operation mode except when the operation state is maintained for the second time. It may also be something that can be started. Also, the first effect always starts as if the operating means was operated a first number of times in the pseudo first operating manner when the operating state was maintained for the second time. Alternatively, the operation means may not be started even when the operation state is maintained for the second time.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that is not started by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be one that can be started when the operation means performs the operation two or more times in the second operation mode.

In addition, “a light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting red light] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be accepted.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where light is emitted in blue] in a state in which the operation for starting the second effect by the operation unit can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a color to be emitted, a lighting/extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of an element to emit light, and brightness is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above explanation,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
A production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full].
In the first effect, the operation means performs a first number of times [for example, 20 times] in a first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation with the effect button 136 (single operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, long-pressing operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 173],
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173],
The first image is operated in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. The image is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed by the means [for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the princess character image shown in FIG. 173 is displayed. H is not selected by long-pressing with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of productions.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display unit may be one that always performs a plurality of types of display, or may not perform a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be one that can be started. Also, the first effect always starts when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Start when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode You may not.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the first selection display. Further, the display means may always execute the first selection display, or may not execute the first selection display.

  Further, the first selection display may be one in which only one of the plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operating means, or the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operating means. One of the images may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may be one in which one of the plurality of types of images is always selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means, or the one of the plurality of types of images is selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means. There may be a case where one of the images is not selected.

In addition, “one of the above-mentioned multiple types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game],
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full].
The fourth effect is provided when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 173]. It is a production that can be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be something that can be started other than when it is selected. Further, the fourth effect may be started without fail when the first image is selected in the first selection display, and the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not be started.

Further, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, continuous hit operation effects shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g), effect button images It is a presentation in which the character "repeatedly strike" is displayed together with BT],
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing displays other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the third effect may be able to be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be able to be started other than during the symbol variable display. Further, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, It may be started only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or may be started by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. Even when the operation is performed the number of times, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation may be started other than the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, The operation may be always started when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode may be performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. The operation may not be started when the operation is performed the number of times and when the operation unit performs the operation once in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed down is 0.5 seconds. Operation mode maintained above].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated in the first number of times in the first number of times. As a matter of fact, the first effect is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times only when the operating state is maintained for the second time. The operation means may be startable, or the operation means may be pseudo-operated the first number of times in the first operation mode except when the operation state is maintained for the second time. It may be one that can be started. Also, the first effect always starts as if the operating means was operated a first number of times in the pseudo first operating manner when the operating state was maintained for the second time. The operation means may not be started even when the operation state is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “during the execution of the first selection display, even if the operating state of the operating means is maintained for the first time or more, one operation is performed by the operating means. Configured to be
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first image may be selectable when the operation means performs the operation twice or more in the second operation mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display [for example, the favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 183(f)],
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to an operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of “character C”],
The second image can be selected when the third operation [for example, two times] is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Image,
The second image is an image selectable when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image of the plurality of types of images can be selected in response to the operation of the operating means, or the plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operating means Other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the second selection display may be one in which one of the plurality of types of images is always selected according to the operation of the operating means, or the one of the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operating means. There may be a case where one of the images is not selected.

  In addition, the second image is displayed during execution of the second selection display when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during execution of the second selection display. The operation means may be selectable only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or the operation means may be selected in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected other than when the third operation is performed by, and when the second selection display is being performed, and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. May be Further, the first effect, during the execution of the second selection display, when the operation means is operated a third number of times in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the second selection display. , May be always selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or during execution of the second selection display by the operation means in the first operation mode. Even if the operation is performed a third number of times, or even if the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display, the selection may not be performed. Good.

In addition, "One of the multiple types of effects is the fifth effect,
The fifth effect, in the second selection display, is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fifth effect may be one that can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be one that can be started in a case other than the case where it is selected. In addition, the fifth effect may be started without fail when the second image is selected in the second selection display, and the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not be started.

In addition, “a light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting red light] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be accepted.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where light is emitted in blue] during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a color to be emitted, a lighting/extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of an element to emit light, and brightness is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full. Production performed on the]]).
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, “second display [for example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. The effect display by pseudo-linking performed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs after the second time shown in FIG.
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, "third display [e.g., shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g)]. It is said that the continuous stroke operation effect]].
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) [eg, FIG. d)-(g), as shown in the figure, the effect button image BT and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed].
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is long pressed,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is long-pressed,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”) [eg, FIG. 150]. In the example shown in, the character "repeatedly strike" is not displayed with the effect button image BT],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of performing a display other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may include a first display and a second display. And the third display may be executed, or displays other than the first display, the second display and the third display may be executed. Further, the display means may necessarily execute the first display, the second display and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display and the third display. In some cases, part or all may not be executed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may not be displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  Further, the first display may be one that can be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started or when the operation means is long pressed. It may be one that can be started other than when the key is repeatedly hit and when the operating means is long pressed. Further, the first display may be always started when the operation means is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means is continuously hit and the operation means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not be started.

In addition, “a light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a first light emitting state [for example, a state of emitting red light].
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that becomes a second light emitting state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which blue light is emitted].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

  The light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

  The light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.

In addition, “the first light emitting state is a lighting state,
The second light emitting state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighted state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153(a-3) and 153(a-4). , The effect button lamp 138 is lit in a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted],
When the light emitting means is turned off, the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153(a-1) and 153(a-2). In the state where the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode [for example, light emission in red],
The second light emitting state is a state of emitting light in a second light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in blue],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variable display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the variable display of symbols [for example, as shown in FIGS. 159(d) to 159(g), during the variable display of special symbols 1 and decorative symbols). Is performed repeatedly.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be able to start the display only during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be able to start the display other than during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, the first display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display may be one in which display can be started only while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be able to start display other than during display of the variable display of symbols. Further, the second display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the variable display of the symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of the symbols.

  Further, the third display may be capable of starting the display only while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be able to start the display other than during display of the variable display of symbols. Further, the third display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second display is a display which is not started only by long-pressing the operation means [for example, the display shown in FIG. 150(l) indicates that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. If the effect button 136 is not operated twice, it is not displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display which is not started other than long-pressing the operation means.

Further, "when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display related to the result of the operation (a notice display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or even when the operation means is not long-pressed, It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may always be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit, and when the operation means is long-pressed, the operation means is repeatedly hit. There may be cases where the first display does not start.

In addition, "the long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full. Production performed on the]]).
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display [for example, character selection effect shown in FIG. 173]”).
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a performance display,
The fourth display is a selection display,
The fourth display is a display displayed when selecting one image of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is long pressed,
The first image is an image that is more easily selected when the operating means is operated a plurality of times than when the operating means is long-pressed [for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. 173, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is not selected by the long-press operation with the effect button 136],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of performing a display other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display unit may be one that always performs a plurality of types of display, or may not perform a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may necessarily execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

  Further, the first display may be one that can be started only when repeatedly hit by the operating means or when the operating means is long-pressed, or when continuously hit by the operating means or long-pressing the operating means. It may be something that can be started in addition to the case where it is performed. In addition, the first display may start without fail when the operating means repeatedly hits and when the operating means is long-pressed, or when the operating means repeatedly hits and the operating means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not be started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, an effect by a princess character who appears after the end of the big hit game],
The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, the effect that is executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full].
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173] is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fifth display may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or during execution of the fourth display. It may be one that can be started other than when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may be started without fail when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the first display during the execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter, "third display [for example, FIG. 160(d) to FIG. ), the continuous stroke operation effect]”).
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) [eg, FIG. d)-(g), as shown in the figure, the effect button image BT and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed].
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may not be displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  Further, the first display may be able to be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operating means is repeatedly hit, or may not start when the operating means is repeatedly hit.

In addition, “a light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that is turned on.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

  The light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variable display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of special figure 1 and decorative symbols],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be able to start the display only during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be able to start the display other than during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, the first display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by long-pressing the operation means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 173, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In this case, unless the effect button 136 is operated twice, the princess character image H is not displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected except that the operation unit is long pressed.

Further, "when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display regarding the result of the operation (preliminary display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or even when the operation means is not long-pressed, It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may always be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit, and when the operation means is long-pressed, the operation means is repeatedly hit. There may be cases where the first display does not start.

In addition, "the long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[Symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variation display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
An operation means [for example, an operation unit 136 or the like] operable by a player,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full. Etc.]”)).
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, “second display [for example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. In the production of the chance eye shown in FIG. 3, it is a display in which three lord patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned]”.
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display [e.g., shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g)]. It is referred to as a continuous stroke operation effect, etc.]).
The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started even if the operating means is long-pressed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display [e.g., shown in FIGS. 151(b) to (h)]. , The chance eye production, etc.]”),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, three times] after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display that is not started by only pressing the operating means once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. 151(i). The display in the mode in which the three hall designs YM1 to YM3 shown are not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated three times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states [for example, effect button lamp 138 etc.]
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a first light emitting state [for example, a state of emitting red light, etc.],
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted, etc.],
The first light emitting state is a lighting state,
The second light emitting state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighted state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153(a-3) and 153(a-4). , The production button lamp 138 is lit in a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted, etc.],
When the light emitting means is turned off, the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153(a-1) and 153(a-2). In the state where the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted, etc.],
The first light emitting state is a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in red, etc.],
The second light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in a second light emitting mode [eg, emitting light in blue].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the first display is a notice display [for example, a notice display of a cut-in image or the like, a notice for notifying a big hit, etc.],"
The second display is a notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 151(i), a notice that the three YD1 to YM3 of the lord's designs are ready to be transferred to the super reach] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One display of the plurality of types of display is a display for instructing selection of one option from a plurality of options (hereinafter, “selection display [for example, character selection effect shown in FIG. 173. 183 (c) on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 183(c), or when the cursor CL indicates the volume, or when the cursor CL indicates the light amount, etc.]".
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first option [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173, the volume “10” setting, or the light intensity “10” among the plurality of options. Display, etc., which is displayed when "Setting etc." is selected (hereinafter, "the fifth display [for example, a display in which the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, a volume The setting is "display in the display mode of "10", or the display of the light amount is displayed in the display mode of "10", etc.]"".
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, twice or five times] after the selection display is started. Is a display,
The fifth display is a display that is not started by only pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started [for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. In the case of the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is not selected only by the long-press operation with the effect button 136, and in the case of the long-press automatic continuous hitting function being disabled. The display in the display mode in which the volume setting is “10” shown in FIG. 183(c) is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, or the long press automatic continuous tapping function is disabled. In this case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting is “10” shown in FIG. 183(c) is not selected only by long-pressing with the right button 137d, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the fifth display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a first number [e.g., two or five times] after the display of the selection display is started. Display,
The first number is 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the operation means is repeatedly hit. As a matter of fact, the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is simulated. A display regarding the result of the operation assuming that the operation has been performed 20 times (a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it is a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "long-pressing" means that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is the first state,
One of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 160(d) to 160(g), the characters "repeatedly strike" are displayed together with the effect button image BT. Etc.]
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters "PUSH" are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 151(b) to 151(h)). Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the first display is accepted [in other words, the first state is a state in which an operation of the operating means is accepted. In the first state, the first display may be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state for accepting an operation for starting the display of the second display [in other words, the second state is a state for accepting an operation of the operation means]. In the second state, the display of the second display may be started when the operating means is operated twice or more times. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which it ends when a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds] has elapsed after the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state in which it ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 151] has elapsed after the second state has been reached. Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display indicates that the number of operations of the operation means is a second number after the display of the fourth display is started (for example, 3 times, and the first number ( The number of times different from (2 or 5 times)] is displayed.
The second number is a number of 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the third display is a display including the first image,
The first image is an image including an image [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 160(d), etc.] showing the appearance of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 160(d), The image including the button image "BT" together with the button image BT],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operation means [for example, the effect button images BT1, BT2, BT3, etc. shown in FIG. 151(b)] [for example, shown in FIG. 151(b)]. Image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT1, image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT2, and image including the image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT3] is there,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a first operation means [for example, a production button 136, etc.,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 178(c) to (e), the light emitting parts LL and LR are turned on, etc.]. Yes,
The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the effect button 136 performs a continuous hit operation and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. There are cases where a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it is a big hit is given if the production is successful],
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated a plurality of times], the second effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 178(e). , When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, all the LEDs of the light emitting parts LL and LR may emit red light, etc.],
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous long press operation is performed by the long press auto continuous hit function in a pseudo manner, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full, it is considered that the production is successful and the cut-in image is obtained. Etc., a notice may be given to notify you of a big hit, etc.],
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 178, the long-press automatic continuous hit function is disabled. Therefore, if the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit red light, etc.],
The second effect is an effect executed by a second effect means [for example, the light emitting units LL, LR, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in performance, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in performance.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. It may also be executed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

  Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode. Further, the second effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may perform the second operation. It may also be executed in a case other than the case of being operated in the mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  Further, the second effect may not be started except that the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. It may not necessarily be started by being operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

  The second effect may be executed only by the second effecting means, or may be executed by other than the second effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the second effecting means, or may not be executed by the second effecting means.

  Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed by including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means, or other than the second effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be performed by including effect means other than the second effect means. When the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. Note that the effect is a concept included in the presentation (the same applies hereinafter).

In addition, "the second production means is a light emitting means,
"The effect executed by the second effect means" means that the second effect means is in the second light emission mode [for example, about 1/from the lower end of the light emitting units LL and LR shown in FIG. 178(c). 4 shows a state in which the LED emits yellow light, a state in which the LED emits green light up to a height of about 2/3 from the lower ends of the light emitting parts LL and LR shown in FIG. ), which is performed by all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emitting light in red].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode [for example, a predetermined light emission mode during symbol variation display or big hit game],
The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode [for example, the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR shown in FIGS. It is different from the light emission mode in the display or during the big hit game],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second effect means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emitting mode, or may be capable of emitting light in a mode other than the first light emitting mode. The second effect means may always emit light in the first light emission mode, or may not emit light in the first light emission mode.

  Further, the first light emission mode may be partially different from the second light emission mode or may be entirely different from the second light emission mode.

In addition, “first production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first rendering means is a first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In this case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as a successful production, or a notice that a big hit is given is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effecting device, or may not be executed by the first effecting device.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be performed by including effect means other than the first effect means. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, "equipped with a third production means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering unit is a unit provided in the third rendering unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 178, a left image display device 209L and a right image display unit provided with light emitting units LL and LR are displayed. The device 209R is means for moving by a slide drive motor, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the third effect means may be composed of only the movable means, or may include means other than the movable means. Further, the third effect means may necessarily include the movable means, or may not include the movable means.

  Further, the second effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the second effect means may be necessarily provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, “fourth effect means [for example, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R shown in FIG. 178, etc.] is provided,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth rendering means is means provided in the third rendering means [for example, as shown in FIG. 178, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. Movable means, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth rendering means may consist of only the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. Further, the fourth rendering means may necessarily include the second image display means, or may not include the second image display means.

  Further, the fourth rendering means may be provided only in the third rendering means, or may be provided in addition to the third rendering means. Further, the fourth rendering means may be necessarily provided in the third rendering means, or may not be provided in the third rendering means.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 becomes full. The effect that is performed is started during the pattern variation display, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 178(c) to (e), the light emitting unit LL, The production in which LR is turned on is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the first effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

  The second effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first effect is started as being performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it will be a big hit) is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be necessarily started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, and When the one operation device is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operation device was operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "the first operation mode may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Can be said.

In addition, in other words, in ““When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started”” in “Operation in first operation mode” Is a multiple operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the production mode of the second effect may be partially different from the production mode of the first effect, or may be different from all.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a first operation means [for example, a production button 136, etc.,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 179(e) to (h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red light. And the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208].
The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. A notice display such as a cut-in image and a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit are given if the production is successful],
When the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated a plurality of times], the second effect may be started [for example, FIG. 179(e) to FIG. In the back button repeated hit effect shown in h), when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red, or the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the long press automatic continuous hitting function causes the repeated hitting operation to be performed in a pseudo manner, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full, the production is considered to be successful, and the cut-in image is obtained. Etc., a notice is given to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.],
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIG. 179, the long press automatic continuous hit function is invalid. Since the effect button 136 is long-pressed, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in performance, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in performance.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. It may also be executed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

  Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode. Further, the second effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

  In addition, the production mode of the second effect may be partially different from the production mode of the first effect, or may be different from all.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may perform the second operation. It may also be executed in a case other than the case of being operated in the mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  Further, the second effect may not be started except that the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. It may not necessarily be started by being operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, “first production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In this case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as a successful production, or a notice that a big hit is given is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effecting device, or may not be executed by the first effecting device.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be performed by including effect means other than the first effect means. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. Note that the effect is a concept included in the presentation (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, ““the first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means”” means that “the first effect means a first display by the first effect means [eg, As shown in FIG. 159, when a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full, the notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as a success of the effect, is a big hit. "A notification to notify the user, etc.] is displayed."
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 179(e) to (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Effect image displayed on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the first effecting device, or may not be executed by the first effecting device.

  Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed by including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be performed by including effect means other than the first effect means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, ““the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means”” means that “the second effect means that the first effect means displays a second display [eg, 179(e) to (h) in the back button repeated hit effect shown in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “second production means [for example, production lamps SL1 to SL4, etc.] are provided,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 179(e) to (h), the effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Image is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the second effecting means, or may be executed by an effecting means other than the second effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the second effecting means, or may not be executed by the second effecting means.

  Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed by including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means, or other than the second effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be performed by including effect means other than the second effect means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

Further, ““the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means”” means that “the second effect means that the second effect means uses a second light emission mode [for example, 179(e) to FIG. 179(h), in the back button continuous hit effect, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit light in green or red, etc.]. Is
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “informing means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.] is provided,
The notification means is a notification that prompts an operation for the first operation means (hereinafter, "operation notification [for example, a production button that is used by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159(d) to urge the production button 136 to be pressed. The display of the image BT, the character display of "repeated hitting", the display of the remaining time meter MT, the red light emission by the effect button lamp 138, etc.]".
The back button effect is the second period during which the operation notification is not given [for example, the operation acceptance period related to the back button repeated hit effect shown in FIGS. 179(d) to (h)]. It is an effect that may be started in response to an operation [for example, a continuous hit operation or the like] of the one operation means in the first operation mode.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the notifying unit may only notify that the operation of the first operation unit is requested, or may notify that the operation of other than the operation of the first operation unit is requested. In addition, the notification means may be a device that necessarily issues a notification that prompts an operation on the first operation device, or may not perform a notification that prompts an operation on the first operation device.

  Further, the back button effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the second period when the operation notification is not performed. Alternatively, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation means may be started in response to something other than the operation in the first operation mode. Further, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation means may be always started in response to the operation in the first operation mode, or the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

Further, in the "first period in which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation acceptance period related to the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 159(d) to 159(g)], the first operation means is set to the first period. There is a case where the first effect is started in response to being operated in one operation mode [for example, continuous hit operation, etc.],
In the first period, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operation means may be started in response to something other than the operation in the first operation mode. .. Further, the first effect may be always started in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

  Further, the first effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, or in the first period. In the above, the first operation means may be started in a case other than the case where the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. Further, the first effect may be started without fail when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, and in the first period, There may be a case where the first operation means is not started in response to the operation in the second operation mode.

Further, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [executed, for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full. The effect that is performed is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, effect lamps SL1 to 1 in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 179(e) to (h)). The effect that SL4 emits green or red, the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started during the variable display of symbols, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the first effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

  The second effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first effect is started as being performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image and a notice for notifying that it is a big hit) is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be necessarily started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, and When the one operation device is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operation device was operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "the first operation mode may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Can be said.

In addition, in other words, in ““When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started”” in “Operation in first operation mode” Means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Also, in the above description,
“First operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.],
Second operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, a clear button 137f],
A gaming machine equipped with
It is configured to display multiple types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, the display that is displayed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a display showing that "customization of presentation" is selected by the cursor CL shown in FIG. 148(e), the same display (g1). "Premium up mode" is displayed with the cursor CL, etc.],
The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In this case, if the production is successful, a notice such as a cut-in image is displayed, and a notice is given to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, a repeated hit operation or a plurality of operations], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. )-As shown in (e) of the same figure, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that "production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is as follows. It is displayed by operating the button 137b twice, and as shown in FIG. 148(f) and FIG. 148(g1), when the “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the production customization setting screen, “Premier” The display indicating that the "up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed by operating the down button 137b twice, etc.],
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, When the long-press operation is performed by the production button 136, the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function artificially performs the continuous-stroke operation. A notice display such as an in-image and a notice to announce that it will be a big hit are given, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 148(b) to (e), the menu screen is displayed. In the case where "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the display indicating that "production customization" is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed due to the long press of the lower button 137b, As shown in FIG. 148(f) and FIG. 148(g1), when "notification mode" is selected with the cursor CL on the production customization setting screen, "premium up mode" is selected with the cursor CL. Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is pressed for a long time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in display, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a display characteristic.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means It may be displayed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation by.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the second operation means may be the first operation mode. May be displayed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation by.

  Further, the display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or all of them may be different.

  Further, the first display may start display only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may display the second operation mode. The display may be started in a case other than the case of being operated in the operation mode. Further, the first display may be a display which is always started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The display may not be started when operated.

Further, the second display may not be started even when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second operation means may be the second operation. The display may not necessarily be started by being operated in the mode, or the display may be started when the second operation unit is operated in the second operation mode.
It should be noted that the effect is a concept included in the presentation (the same applies hereinafter).

In addition, “the second display is a display when one of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment” on the menu screen shown in FIG. 148(e), Display when the "Customize" of "Member registration", "Customize effect", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, and "Normal" on the effect customize setting screen shown in FIG. Mode,” “One-shot notification mode”, “Premier up mode” among “Premier up mode”, etc. displayed when the cursor CL is selected],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display displayed on a setting screen [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 148],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed not on the setting screen. The second display may be always displayed on the setting screen, or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

In addition, “the setting screen is a screen including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. Includes a display for instructing you to select one option from "Registration", "Customize production", and "Operation assistance setting". Including a display instructing to select, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “volume adjustment in the menu screen shown in FIG. 148(e), Display when the volume CL is selected from among "Member registration", "Product customization", and "Operation assistance setting" with the cursor CL, or on the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premium up mode", etc. "Display when the normal mode" is selected with the cursor CL],
The second display is a display displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected [eg, “volume light amount adjustment”, “in the menu screen shown in FIG. 148(e), Display when "Production customization" of "Member registration", "Production customization", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, or "Display customization setting screen shown in (g1) of FIG. "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premier up mode" among "Premium up mode" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode while the third display is displayed, the display of the second display may be started [eg, FIG. 148]. As shown in (b) to (e) of the figure, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen and the lower button 137b is operated twice, "production customization" is moved to the cursor. When the display indicating that the CL is selected is started, and as shown in FIG. 148(f) and FIG. 148(g1), the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, When the lower button 137b is operated twice, a display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is started],
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed, the display of the second display is not started [eg, FIG. 148(b) As shown in (e) of the same figure, when the “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen and the down button 137b is pressed and held, the “customize effect” is displayed with the cursor CL The display indicating the selection is not started, and as shown in FIG. 148(f) and FIG. 148(g1), when the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, When the lower button 137b is operated by being pressed and held, the display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is not started.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the setting screen may include only a display for instructing to select one option from the plurality of options, or may instruct to select one option from the plurality of options. It may include a display other than the display. Further, the setting screen may include a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or may instruct to select one option from the plurality of options. The display may not be included in some cases.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the time. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. In some cases, it may not be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the time. Further, the second display may be always displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. In some cases, it may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display may start to be displayed only when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. Alternatively, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started in a case other than when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Further, the second display, when the third display is displayed, may be the display is always started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

  Further, the second display, when the third display is displayed, may not start display other than that the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, When the third display is displayed, the display may not always start when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the third display is displayed. In this case, the display may be started by operating the second operation means in the second operation mode.

In addition, “the second display is N times (N≧2 [for example, twice, etc.]) operated by the second operation means when the third display is displayed. [E.g., in the menu screens shown in FIGS. 148(b) to (e), the display indicating that "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL is "volume". When a display indicating that "light intensity adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when the down button 137b is pressed twice, or in the production customization setting screen, The display indicating that the “premium up mode” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed twice by the down button 137b when the display indicating that the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. Display starts when there is a pressing operation, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may start display only when N operations have been performed by the second operation means when the third display is displayed. However, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the operation of the Nth meeting is not performed by the second operation means. Further, the second display may be the one that is always started when the second display is operated N times when the third display is displayed. The display may not be started when the N operation is performed by the second operation unit when the display of No. is displayed.

In addition, “image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, a notice display such as a cut-in image in a continuous hit operation effect, or a notice notifying a big hit is given. , Displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, when the "customize effect" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 148(b) to (e) is selected by the cursor CL). 148 (f) and FIG. 148 (g1) and the display indicating that the "premium up mode" on the production customization setting screen is selected by the cursor CL is a decorative pattern display device. 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by means other than the image display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by means other than the image display means. The second display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous strike meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full. The effect that is performed is started during the pattern variation display],
The second display is a display that is not started during the display of the variable display [for example, "effect customization" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 148(b) to (e) is selected by the cursor CL. 148 (f) and FIG. 148 (f1) and the display indicating that "premium up mode" on the production customization setting screen is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. It is not started during display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. May be. Further, the first display may be one that is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display may not be started only during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started other than during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, the second display may not necessarily be displayed during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be displayed during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first display is started as being performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image and a notice for notifying that it is a big hit) is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first display may be started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the display other than the first display is started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. There may be cases where Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be always started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, When the first operating device is operated in the second operating mode, the first display may not be started as if the first operating device was operated in the first operating mode.

In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started" in "Operation in the first operation mode" Is a continuous tapping operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Can be said.

In addition, in other words, in the "in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode". "Operation" means multiple operations.
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variable display [for example, change effect of the hold icon shown in FIG. 98(c) to FIG. 98(n), or FIG. 109(g) to FIG. i) button advance notice etc.]
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 98(d) to FIG. 98(k) or the button notice shown in FIG. 108(m) to FIG. 109(f). Production etc.]
The first effect display is a first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button holding icon shown in FIGS. 98(c) to (j) and FIGS. 109(g) to (h). Vibrating and rotating button image 136a and "Push" display, etc.],
The second effect display is the second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 98(e) to FIG. 98(f) or the display of FIG. 108(r) to FIG. 109(b). Button image 136a and a display of "continuous hits", etc.],
The first operation promotion display is a display for urging operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display for prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display are different operation prompting displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter, “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98(k), the hold icon is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (circular blue display mode)). Pre-reading notice due to the above, or notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109(i) and the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 109(i′). It is a certain performance display,
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98(h) to FIG. 98(k), display of “hold 1UP”). Therefore, a notice that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be upgraded by one step, or a display of "Daikichi" as shown in FIG. "Preliminary notice, etc.") is derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, conventionally, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be related to something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

  The first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may necessarily include the first operation prompting display, or may not include the first operation prompting display.

  The second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. The second effect display may necessarily include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

  Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  Further, the second effect display may be one in which only a notice related to the first notice may be derived, or a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be derived. It may be one. Further, in the second effect display, a notice related to the first notice may be always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 98(d) to FIG. , A state in which both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, or a state in which both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(c) to 110(o). Etc.]”).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related to each other.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first state may exist, there may be a case other than the first state, may always be the first state, the first state It may not be the case.

In addition, “When the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 98(f), when the effect button 136 is operated in the state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) to (l) of the same figure, if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in a state where both the button advance notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc.],
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. 98(j ), when the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is changed according to the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in FIG. 110(n), as shown in FIG. 110(n), as shown in FIG. A weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Also, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. The configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice according to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the advance notice other than the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice according to the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may not be executed.

  The first notice may be executed according to the second notice only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started. The configuration may be such that only the first notice according to the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated after the start of.

In addition, it is configured such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed when the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, As shown in FIG. 102(f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the result of the mini game. If the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIG. 105(g), the display mode of the hold icon changes. However, the result of the mini game is not derived.],
After the execution of the second notice, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change [for example, FIG. 102(g) to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 105(h) to 105(m), after the result of the mini game is derived and "Hold 1UP" is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode is changed to the green display mode. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), the notice other than the 1st notice of the 1st notice and the 2nd notice may be executed, or in the 1st state When the operation means is operated, the first notice and the second notice other than the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, the configuration may be such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, The notice other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change. Also, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change without fail, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice may be changed. The first notice executed according to the notice may not change.

  Further, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change only after the second notice is executed, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed according to the second notice may change.

In addition, “In the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 103(e) to FIG. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the first notice by paying attention to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prioritize the mini-game side in time series.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, a notice that affects a notice that may occur in the future is preferentially displayed, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

  Also, the first effect display may overlap the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display in the states other than the first state. May be overlapped.

In addition, the “second effective period [for example, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 98(e) to FIG. 98(f), FIG. 112(e) to FIG. ], the second advance notice is started when the operating means is operated,
The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 98(e) to FIG. 98(f) or FIG. 112(e) to FIG. ] Is included in the performance display,
The second valid period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of the second valid period [for example, FIG. 98(e) to FIG. 98(f) or FIG. 112(e) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6G, etc., the button reception time meter MT changes its display mode in such a manner that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation reception time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effective period, it is possible to prompt the player to derive the result of the mini game, so that the first notice may be noticed in some cases. ..

  Here, when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, only the second advance notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, The configuration may be such that a notice other than the second notice is also started. Further, the second advance notice may be configured to start without fail when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, The second notice may not be started.

  Further, the second advance notice may be started only when the operating means is operated during the second valid period, or in the case other than when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started.

  Further, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display or may include a display other than the second effective period display. Moreover, the second effect display may necessarily include the second effective period display, or may not include the second effective period display.

In addition, "the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [eg, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 110(o), etc.]. And
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the green hold mode hold icon shown in FIG. 98(m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109(i), etc.]. And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the case where the first notice is executed in the second mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first mode. Is configured,
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the first notice by starting the mini game.

  Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than a plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  Further, the first notice may be executable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. Good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

  Further, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice is executed in the second mode. In the case, the jackpot pattern may be finally definitely displayed.

  Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may be configured not to be executed in the second aspect, and when the second effect display is started, the second aspect is not executed. The first notice may be executed without fail.

In addition, "the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 114(l), etc.],
One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 113(l), etc.],
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally configured to be confirmed and displayed,
The second notice is executed in the fourth mode when the first notice is executed in the second mode [for example, the display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 113(n)]. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the big notice is finally confirmed and displayed in the second mode with the first notice, so that the expectation of the derived result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

  Here, the second notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  The second notice may be executable only in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the third aspect and the fourth aspect. Good. Further, the second notice may be always executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

In addition, “The first notice is a prefetch notice [for example, display of a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k) or hold in a green display mode shown in FIG. 98(m). Icon display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 98(a), three start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 are held. Is displayed, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.],
The first notice is a notice given when the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 98(k) or FIG. 98(m), the display mode of the hold icon is blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to display mode or green display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
It is configured to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 122(g) to FIG. 122(l)],
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 122(g′) to FIG. 122(l′)],
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 122(a)],
The second mini game is a mini game displayed by using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, conventionally, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", so that it may be easy for the player to understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. In addition, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the display means may be configured by one display means or may be configured by two or more display means. Further, in the case of being constituted by two or more display means, the decorative symbol variable display may be performed only on some display means, or the decorative symbol variable display may be performed on all the display means. It may be something called.

  Also, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini games.

  Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or mini games other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. In addition, the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed in some cases. ..

  In addition, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. In addition, the first mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

  Further, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. Further, the second mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, “preliminary means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a prefetch notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 122(l) or FIG. 122(l')],
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "first result [e.g., display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 122(k)]"] indicating that the first notice is given. ) Is a mini game that can be derived,
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [eg, display of “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 122(k′)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the relationship such as the notice can be made easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

  Here, the advance notice means may execute only a plurality of advance notices, or may execute other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice.

  In addition, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  Further, the second mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not necessarily derive the first result.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a prefetch notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 123(l) or (l')]. ,
The case where the second notice is given is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the final jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result [e.g., display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 123(k)]"] suggesting that the second notice will be given. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result [for example, the display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 123(k′) and the like can also be derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the result suggesting that the second notice will be given by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the second advance notice.

  Further, the first mini-game may be one that can derive only the second result, or one that can derive results other than the second result. In addition, the first mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

  Further, the second mini game may be one in which only the second result can be derived, or one in which results other than the second result can be derived. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not necessarily derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [eg, a face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g′)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the same notice may be given even if the type of mini game is different, so that it may be possible to give the player various expectations.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. In addition, in the second mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g′)] may be displayed.
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, a character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 126(A1)] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, a princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 126(B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to give the expectation for the second result depending on the type of the character that appears in each mini game.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. In addition, in the second mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may be displayed. In the first mini game, the second character may be always displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

  In the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may be displayed. Further, in the second mini game, the third character may be always displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

  The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  Further, in the first mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result is not derived when the second character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.

  Further, in the second mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result is not derived when the third character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the old mode shown in FIG. 124(A1) to (A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIG. 124(B1) to FIG. 124(B6)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124(A1) to (A6), the old mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the main effect with the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display. May be Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during execution of the decorative pattern variable display, or may be displayed other than during execution of the decorative pattern variable display. It may be. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

  The first mini game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be executed without exception during the display of the first effect display.

  Further, the second mini-game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be executed without exception during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [eg, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.,
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini games is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for execution of the mini-game depending on the game state.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Further, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

  Also, while the special map low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state (including latent probability variation, the same applies below), special figure low probability general figure low probability At least one of the state, special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state , Special figure high probability state Normal figure high probability state may be the second game state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, special figure high probability state The figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the general figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the second gaming state.

In addition, "the probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, "It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.,
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [eg, FIG. 127]. As shown in (A1) to (A6) of the figure, the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the probability variation state],
The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [eg, FIG. 127. As shown in (B1) to (B6) of the same figure, the omikuji game is more likely to be executed in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the gaming state with the type of mini game.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Also, while the special figure low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, special figure high probability general figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second game state, and the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure high The probability state may be the second game state, and the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability general figure high probability state is the second game state. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Further, the first mini game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second mini game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first game state [eg, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) and the like] and the second game state [eg, probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.] ], the probability of executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of mini games is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for execution of the mini-game depending on the game state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. There is a high probability that a player executes a plurality of types of mini games.

In addition, “the first game state is a non-electric power support state [for example, a universal figure low probability state, etc.],
The second game state is a power support state [eg, universal figure high probability state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the non-electric power support state may be a special map high probability state or a special map low probability state.

  In addition, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, "when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 122(a)], a non-mini game effect is produced in the certain display area. A display [for example, a tutorial display "a mini game starts at various timings" shown in FIG. 122(c), a tutorial display "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in FIG. 122(f), etc.] is displayed. May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased [for example, in FIG. 122(f) to FIG. As shown, when the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is deleted.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since a non-minigame effect display can be performed using a certain display area from the normal time, it may be easy for the player to pay attention.

  Here, there may be a case where the non-mini game effect display is displayed only in a certain display area when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area in which none of the minigames is displayed. Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area without fail, and any of a plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display may not be displayed in a certain display area when it is not displayed.

  Further, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. There may be a case where a non-minigame effect display is displayed in a certain display area even when neither of the games is displayed.

  Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any one of a plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. When one of the displays is started, the display other than the non-minigame effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted without fail, and any one of a plurality of types of mini games in a certain display area may be deleted. The non-minigame effect display being displayed may not be erased when one of them is started to be displayed.

  In addition, the non-minigame effect display that is being displayed may be deleted only when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, and any of a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display being displayed may be erased also in the case other than the case where one of the displays is started.

  Further, here, as the display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a parameter display of the original mode (LV display, etc.), a display of remaining time until the start of RTC, etc. is adopted. It is possible.

In addition, “the certain display area is a frame [for example, a liquid crystal frame of the second decorative pattern display device 208M shown in FIG. 98(d), an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 108(m), , An outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 112(a)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than a frame.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 122(a), the multi-function display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed on the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area which is expanded in association with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is a start of the dice game Is displayed in an expanded manner in relation to
The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the second mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can focus on the mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

  Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in association with the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the first mini game.

  Further, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the second mini game. . Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in association with the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the second mini game.

  In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the first mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in association with the start of the second mini game. It may be expanded only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

In addition, "the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the mini game is executed on the display means for executing the decorative symbol variable display, it may be possible to pay more attention to the mini game.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, "a display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like shown in FIG. 98(a)] (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means [for example, FIG. 98(a)] Second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.]") shown in FIG.
The certain display region is a region formed in the display region of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

Also, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 112(i′)],
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 112(i)],
The case where the second notice is given is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where the first notice is given,
The mini game is a game that can derive a plurality of results,
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 112(h′)],
One of the plurality of results is the second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 112(h), etc.],
It is easier to give the second notice when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notice means.

  Further, conventionally, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game in order to derive the second result.

  Here, the advance notice means may execute only a plurality of advance notices, or may execute other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

  Further, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

  In addition, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed, and when the second notice is given, the big hit symbol is always definitely displayed. It may be configured to.

In addition, “at least suggesting that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the derivation of the result of the mini game, so that the second notice is likely to be given. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 112(c), when the mini game is started, the display of "strong cut-in occurred in Daikichi" is displayed in the mini game display area MN1]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game toward the generation of an advantageous notice.

  In addition, by incorporating the so-called mission effect in the mini game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player's sense of accomplishment is obtained.

  Here, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. At least to suggest that the mini game derivation result becomes the second result before the mini game result is derived, so that a notice other than the second notice is likely to be given. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured to at least suggest that the second notice is always given by the derivation result of the mini game becoming the second result before the derivation of the result of the mini game. However, before the derivation of the result of the mini game, the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result, which may at least suggest that the second notice is not given. May be.

  In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, the fact that the second notice is likely to be given may be notified in advance because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result. ..

  In addition, the mode of suggestion is, for example, a mode in which at least an effect of accomplishing the mission is suggested, such as “when succeeding in...”, “put out”, or “when… stops”. Any aspect can be applied.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIG. 113(c) to FIG. 113(n)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 113(c) to 113(n) is a decorative symbol. Is being displayed during the fluctuation display of
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [for example, the display of "Mission failed" shown in FIG. 114(n), etc.],
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, a display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 113(n)],
Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is at least suggested that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, which is likely to result in a big hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 113(c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as "put out a cut-in" and "a big hit if you come out" are displayed, etc.],
The second effect result [e.g., in the first effect display] more than when the second result [e.g., the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 112(h)] is derived in the mini game. When the "display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 113(n)" is derived, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player's sense of accomplishment can be obtained by incorporating so-called mission effects in addition to the mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission effect by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the difference between the main production mission and the mini game mission may be clarified in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display the plurality of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying effect displays other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect display may be one in which only a plurality of effect results can be derived, or one in which results other than the plurality of effect results can also be derived. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive a plurality of effect results, or may not necessarily derive a plurality of effect results.

  Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, and effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result are also derived. It may be possible. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. Good.

  Further, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to be notified in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, which is likely to result in a big hit. May be.

  Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot pattern is finally definitely displayed. In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. In the case of being performed, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

In addition, "when the second effect result is derived, it is configured to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clarify the division of the mission effect.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finally confirmed and displayed, and also in the case other than the case where the second effect result is derived. The final jackpot design may be finally displayed.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 113(g) to 113(l), There is a case where both the effect and the mini game are displayed]”).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display are related.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first state may exist, there may be a case other than the first state, may always be the first state, the first state It may not be the case.

In addition, "the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] is provided,
When the operating means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 113(g) to FIG. 113(l) or FIG. 114(g)]. As shown in (l) of the same figure, when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit in the mini game, "Daikichi" or "Kokichi" is derived, etc.],
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [eg, FIG. 114(m)] is more than the second notice [eg, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 113(m)]. The weak cut-in image CI1b etc.] shown in FIG.
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

  Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. May be configured to be derived. The result of the mini game may be always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

  Further, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, and the mini game is not operated even when the operation means is not operated. The game result may not be derived. The result of the mini game may not always be derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is not obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that it may be derived.

  Further, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, it may be configured so that the first notice is easier than the second notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be more easily given than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, it may be configured such that the first notice is always easier than the second notice, and the result of the mini game is not derived. In this case, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

  In addition, the second notice may not be given if the result of the mini game is not derived, and the first notice must be given if the result of the mini game is not derived. May be configured to be exposed.

  Further, only when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. Also in this case, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, It may be configured so that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

  Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be given, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always given. May be configured as.

In addition, “even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, when the result of the mini game is not derived although it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. 115(m), a strong cut is performed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

  Also, according to this gaming machine, the notice does not affect the success/failure determination. Therefore, even if a notice different from the scheduled one occurs, it does not affect the result of the success/failure determination. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini game in order to give a better notice.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini notice may be given. The first notice may be provided even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first notice may be given whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini game If the result of (1) is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k)]
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 98(m), etc.],
The first notice is a notice given when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98(m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, a button holding icon is displayed and an effect in which the display mode is changed by the operation of the operating means is performed, which is monotonous only in the conventional effect, but according to this game console, the display mode of the holding icon is changed. After that, it may change further, so that it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It can be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  The first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

  Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

  Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed while the first hold icon is being displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

  Also, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display even in a state other than the state in which it is displayed.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, The first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is not derived.

  Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or in the first case, The first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon even when the result of the mini game is not derived. Further, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. Also in the case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is not derived.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to only the second hold icon. In the first case In, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon without fail. In, in the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the first case In, in addition to the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. In the first case In other cases, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k)],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 98(m)],
The first notice is a notice given when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98(k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98(m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol During execution of the symbol variation display started after the variation display, the first suspension icon changes to the second suspension icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a case where the relationship between the advance notice and the reliability can be held even when the mini game is not finally participated.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It can be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  The first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

  Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

  Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed while the first hold icon is being displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

  Also, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display even in a state other than the state in which it is displayed.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon while a certain symbol variation display is being executed. May be configured to do so. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, it seems that the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured as.

  Further, in the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, even when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. Even in cases other than the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variable display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. The icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the variable display which is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the icon may not change to the second hold icon.

  Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during execution of the symbol variable display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first other than during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon without fail during execution of the symbol variable display started later.

  Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation icon is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. Also, it may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variable display that is started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case other than the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, or in the case other than the first case, the result of the mini game If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of certain symbol variation display, and during execution of symbol variation display started after certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,
The derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 113(i) to FIG. When the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 115(i) to 115(l), when the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, “ Kokichi” is derived],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be necessarily different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not. [For example, FIGS. 114(i) to 114(l) are shown. As described above, when it is determined in advance that “Nakichi” is derived, “Kokichi” is derived even if the production button 136 is repeatedly operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. There may be a case where a result other than the same result is derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may be always derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not operated, and in the mini game, the same result is operated when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is operated. In some cases, the same result may not be derived even when there is no such case.

  Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated even in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not.

Further, “the display means is a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N or the like]. ] Is included in the means,
The first display means and the second display means are different display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be configured with. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.

Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 130(g) to (m), the mini game shown in FIGS. 132(j) to 132(o), etc.]. Is a possible means,
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple types of results,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 130(g) to 130(k), a treasure box is opened by the operation key unit 137. When the selected treasure box is selected with the effect button 136, the old-aged character BA appears in the treasure box, and "Kokichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, or FIG. 133(A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, it is shown that the clothes worn by the bancho character are torn, and "bancho awakening" and "today is in good shape" are displayed. ,
It is configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 131(A1) to 131(A6), When the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the key unit 137 and the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, but FIG. 131 (B1). As shown in (B6) of the figure, when the upper right treasure box BX3 is selected by the operation key unit 137 and the decision is made by the effect button 136, the grandmother character BA appears, and as a result of the fortune telling, "Okichi Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 133(A1) to 133(A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the condition of the number of times of operations is satisfied, the clothes of the bancho character are worn. Is displayed, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in good shape" are displayed, and the production button 136 is operated repeatedly, but if the condition of the number of operations is not satisfied, the state shown in FIG. ), the "bancho awakening game" ends without breaking the clothes worn by the bancho character, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the old woman's character BA and “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 130(k), and the bancho length shown in FIG. 134(C7). Indication that the clothes worn by the character are not broken, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit/fail judgment [for example, the hit/no hit judgment of at least one of the special drawing and the hit/miss judgment of the general figure].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, conventionally, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

  Moreover, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player other than the pure game.

  Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  Further, the mini game may be one in which only a plurality of types of results can be derived, or one in which a result other than a plurality of types of results can be derived. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means, or that other than the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. The result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operation means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operation means. May be.

  Further, only one of the plurality of types of results may be derived in accordance with the operation status of the operating means, or one of the plurality of types of results may be derived depending on the operation status of the operating means. It may be configured such that one other than either one is also derived. Further, it may be configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operating means, and any one of the plurality of types of results may be derived depending on the operation status of the operating means. It may be configured such that one of them may not be derived.

  Further, the mini game may be one in which only the third result can be derived, or one in which results other than the third result can be derived. Further, the mini game may always derive the third result, or may not always derive the third result.

  In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the acceptance/rejection determination and does not notify the result.

In addition, “The mini game is a game for deriving a certain result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 131(A1) to 131(A6) is “Daikichi”. The mission is to select the inner treasure box, etc.],
The certain result is configured to be derivable depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, in the case shown in FIGS. 131(A1) to 131(A6), the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is selected by the operation key unit 137, If the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and “Daikichi” is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, a certain result may be only one, or may be two or more.

  Further, only a certain result may be configured to be derivable depending on the operating status of the operating means, or a result other than the certain result may be configured to be derivable depending on the operating status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operating status of the operating means, or that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,
In the case where the mini game is started in the first period [for example, a period of a standby state (including a state where a customer waiting demo display is displayed) where variable display of special maps is not performed, etc.) (hereinafter, "First case".)
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended [for example, a period in which the suspension of both the special diagram 1 and the special diagram 2 is 0, etc.],
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, a period in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain a mini game in the first period.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means during the original game by urging the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

  In addition, the mini game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

  Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variable display. Good.

  Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and other than the decorative symbol variable display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device). 214, etc.) may also be in a non-executed period.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,
In the first case, the mini game is configured such that the automatic operation is not executable [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(g) and FIG. 132(j) to FIG. , Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho awakening game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the first case, since it is a mini game that is not related to the determination of win/fail, it is possible to disable the automatic operation and positively allow the player to operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operating means may not be executed in some cases.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the automatic operation is inexecutable, or an operation other than the automatic operation is inexecutable. In addition, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation is always inexecutable, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be inexecutable.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation is disabled only in the first case, and is configured to be disabled in the non-first case as well. Good.

In addition, “the mini game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [eg, shown in FIGS. 98(d) to (l). The mini-game shown in FIG. 108(m) to FIG. 109(f) and the mini-game shown in FIG. 122(g) to FIG. 122(k) are started during the variable display of decorative symbols. 137(e) to (i) of FIG. 137, the mini-game shown in FIG.
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period,
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variable display and the execution of the big hit game,
In the first case, the third result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain a mini game during a game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. Further, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Good.

In addition, “the types of the mini-games that are started in the first case and the second case are different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 130(g) to (m)] The fortune telling and the guard length awakening games shown in FIGS. 132(j) to 132(o) are mini-games started in the standby state, and the dice games and figures shown in FIGS. 122(g) to 122(l). 122(g') to (l') are fortune-telling games, which are mini-games started during variable display of decorative symbols, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a simple game depending on the type of mini game.

  Here, only the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be different from each other, or in the mini-games started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured such that there are different types other than the types. Further, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be different. May be configured to be different from each other.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first effective period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 132(k)] is displayed. Is configured to
In the mini game started in the second case, a second effective period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 113(i)] is displayed. Is configured,
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of a period in which the operation of the operation means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 132(k) to 132(n). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136, etc.],
The second effective period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIGS. 113(i) to 113(k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136, etc.],
In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the changing speed of the display mode is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to distinguish the type of mini game by looking at the valid period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first valid period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The valid period display other than the valid period display may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be configured to be always displayed, and in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the first valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first valid period display may be displayed.

  Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period is displayed. The valid period display other than the period display may be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, and in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the second valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second effective period display may be displayed.

  Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed during the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may not change accordingly.

  Further, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the second valid period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed during the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may not change accordingly.

  Further, either one of the first valid period display and the second valid period display may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may have a higher change speed in the display mode, or the second effective period display may be the display mode. The changing speed of may be fast.

  Further, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first valid period display and the second valid period display, the first valid period display may be larger in size, or the second valid period display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may have the same size.

In addition, “In the mini game started in the first case, a first operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] is displayed.
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 113(i) and a display of "repeated hits", etc.] is displayed. Is configured to
The first operation promotion display is a display for urging operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display for prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [eg, one, etc.] display pattern [eg, default display mode, etc.],
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two, etc.] display pattern [for example, a default display mode and a display mode that is vibrating and rotating],
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, in the mini game started in the second case, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation prompting display may be displayed.

  In the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation may be performed. An operation prompting display other than the prompting display may be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

  Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means or a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the user to operate the operating means.

  In addition, the second operation promotion display may be a display that prompts only the operation of the operating means or a display that prompts other than the operation of the operating means. The second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first operation prompting display may be one that can be displayed only with the first number of display patterns, or one that can be displayed with a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation prompting display may be always displayed with the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the first number of display patterns.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only in the second number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed in a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may be always displayed in the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed in the second number of display patterns.

  Further, the first number may be 1, or may be 2 or more.

  Further, between the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display, the first operation prompting display may be larger in size, or the second operation prompting display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have the same size.

  Further, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 114(l), etc.],”
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 114(l) indicates the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 114(m). At least suggest the display, etc.],
In the mini game, the first result is more easily derived in the second case than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. The mini game may always derive the first result, or may not always derive the first result.

  In addition, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit determination, or may at least suggest something other than the result of the hit determination. Further, the first result may at least necessarily indicate the result of the hit determination, or may not at least indicate the result of the hit determination.

  Further, the first result may indicate the result of the hit/miss judgment, or may notify the result of the hit/miss judgment.

  Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

In addition, "The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display is a notice or a pre-read notice [for example, Figs. 117(a) to (f). ), in the mini game that is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or a look-ahead notice is given when the character YSM of the hero's lord appears from the treasure box],
The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the mini game may be able to function as a notice.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, button operation effect shown in FIG. 110(c) to FIG. 110(o)] related to the decorative symbol variable display,
In the first effect display, a big hit announcement (hereinafter, referred to as "first announcement [eg, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 110(o)]") may be executed. And
As the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [eg, FIG. 110 ( As shown in (c) to (l) of the figure, the display of "Nakichi" derived in the mini game started during the variable display of the decorative pattern gives advance notice of the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

  The first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be related to something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  Further, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, there may be a case where only the notice related to the first notice is executed, and the decorative symbol As a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display, the notice related to the first notice may be executed without fail, or the decorative pattern variable display is executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started, there may be a case where the notice related to the first notice is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 113(l), etc.],”
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 113(l) indicates the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 113(m). At least suggest the display, etc.],
In the second case, the second result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case,
When the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as the result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Here, the plurality of types of results may include only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  In addition, the second result may be a result that suggests the result of the hit determination, or may be a result that the result of the hit determination is notified in advance.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the second result may be derived in the mini game. Good.

  In addition, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. When the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the case of the first case, only the third result [for example, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 130(k), FIG. 130(k1) to FIG. 130(k4), etc.] It is a game to derive,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of results is the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 130(k1) and FIG. 133(A6). The display of the mode in which the clothes worn by the Bancho character are torn]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit/fail judgment [eg, hit/no hit judgment of at least one of the special drawing and hit/miss judgment of the general figure].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give variations to the result of the mini game.

  Further, the mini game may be one in which only the third result and the fourth result can be derived, or one in which a result other than the third result and the fourth result can be derived. .. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

  In addition, the fourth result does not indicate the result of the judgment of success or failure, and does not inform the result.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One mini-game of the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 122(g) to FIG. 122(l)],
One mini-game of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game shown in FIG. 122(g′) to FIG. 122(l′)],
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 etc. shown in FIG. 122(a)],
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
In the first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.] and a second game state [for example, probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.] The probability that the first mini game is displayed is different,
A game state in which the second game state is more advantageous than the first game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “preliminary means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a prefetch notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 122(l) or FIG. 122(l′)].
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "first result [e.g., display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 122(k)]"] indicating that the first notice is given. ) Is a mini game that can display
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying the first result [for example, the display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 122(k')].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a pre-reading notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 123(l) or (l')]. Yes,
In the case where the second notice is given, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result [e.g., display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 123(k)]"] indicating that the second notice is given. ) Is also a mini game that can be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game that can also display the second result [eg, display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 123(k′)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [eg, the face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g′)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH or the like shown in FIG. 122(g)] may be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, a face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g′)] may be displayed.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 126(A1)] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, a princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 126(B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily displayed when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily displayed when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the auntie mode shown in FIG. 124(A1) to FIG. 124(A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIG. 124(B1) to FIG. 124(B6)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124 (A1) to (A6), the old mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the probability that the first mini-game is displayed is lower in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the probability that the first mini game is displayed in the second gaming state is 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first game state is a non-electric power support state [for example, a universal figure low probability state, etc.],
The second game state is a power support state [eg, universal figure high probability state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 122(a)], the non-mini-display in the certain display area is performed. Game effect display [For example, a tutorial display that "a mini game starts at various timings" shown in FIG. 122(c), a tutorial display that "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in FIG. 122(f), etc.] May be displayed,
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is deleted [for example, FIG. 122(f) to FIG. As shown in, when the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is deleted.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain display area is a frame [for example, a liquid crystal frame of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 98(d) or an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 108(m). Or an outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 112(a)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 122(a), the multi-function display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is formed on the right half of the bottom part of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is a dice game area]. Extended display related to the start, etc.],
The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the second mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122(a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "a display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like shown in FIG. 98(a)] (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means [for example, FIG. 98(a)] The second decorative symbol display device 208M or the like"]" is provided.
The certain display region is a region formed in the display region of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A first notice [for example, a pre-reading notice or the like in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 122(l) or FIG. 122(l')] can be executed as a notice means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, First decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
Display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One mini-game of the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 122(g) to FIG. 122(l)],
One mini-game of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game shown in FIG. 122(g′) to FIG. 122(l′)],
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "first result [e.g., display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 122(k)]"] indicating that the first notice is given. ) Is a mini game that can display
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying the first result [for example, the display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 122(k')].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “a mode of the first result in the first mini-game [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 122(k)] and a mode of the first result in the second mini-game [for example, FIG. 122] The aspect shown in (k′)] is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH or the like shown in FIG. 122(g)] may be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [eg, the face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 122(g′)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "first game state [for example, normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.] and second game state [for example, probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc. ], the probability that the first mini game is displayed is different,
A game state in which the second game state is more advantageous than the first game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the probability that the first mini game is displayed in the second gaming state is 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the probability that the first mini-game is displayed is lower in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first game state is a non-electric power support state [for example, a universal figure low probability state, etc.],
The second game state is a power support state [eg, universal figure high probability state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the auntie mode shown in FIG. 124(A1) to FIG. 124(A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIG. 124(B1) to FIG. 124(B6)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124(A1) to (A6), the old mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice means is a means capable of executing a second notice [for example, a prefetch notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 123(l) or FIG. 123(l')],"
In the case where the second notice is given, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as "second result [e.g., display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 123(k)]"] indicating that the second notice is given. ) Is also a mini game that can be displayed,
The second mini-game is a mini-game that can also display the second result [eg, display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 123(k′)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
A notice means capable of executing a certain notice [for example, a big hit notice by displaying the cut-in image shown in FIG. 109(i) or (i′)],
Display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One type of mini-games among the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the production button 136 shown in FIGS. A mini game etc. whose mission is to derive "Daikichi"],
One type of mini-game among the plurality of types of mini-games is the second mini-game [for example, the production button 136 shown in FIG. 111(f) to FIG. A mini-game whose mission is to derive
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different types of mini-games,
The certain notice is a notice regarding the result of the decorative pattern variable display,
The certain notice is a notice displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One mode of the plurality of modes is a first display mode [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 109(i′)],
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second display aspect [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109(i)],
The first mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying a result suggesting the display mode of the certain notice (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain result”) [eg, as shown in FIG. 113(l). , The results of mini-game missions suggest the display of cut-in images, etc.],
The second mini game is a mini game capable of displaying the certain result [for example, as shown in FIG. 111(h), the display result of the cut-in image is suggested by the result of the mini game mission. etc],
If the first mini-game succeeds (for example, as a result of the mini-game mission, "Daikichi" is displayed as shown in FIG. 113(l), etc.), the certain result is the first one. The result indicating that the certain notice is displayed is displayed in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 113(l), the result of the mini game mission, the display of "Daikichi" and the mission are achieved. It is suggested that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed by displaying the character "Mission achieved" as a result of the above],
When the second mini game is successful, a result indicating that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode is displayed as the certain result [for example, in FIG. 111(h). As shown in the figure, as a result of the mission of the mini game, the display of "Daikichi" and the display of the character "Achievement!" as a result of the achievement of the mission suggest that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Etc.],
Before the first mini game is started, it is notified that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode as the certain result when the first mini game is successful [ For example, as shown in FIG. 113(g), when the mission is accomplished, "Daikichi" is displayed and a strong cut-in image is displayed by displaying "For example, Daikichi hits Daikichi and Daikichi generates a strong cut-in." It is informed that CI1a will be displayed, etc.],
When the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode than when the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode, the result of the final big hit in the decorative pattern variable display Is easy to display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.
In addition, “a mode of displaying the certain result displayed when the first mini game is successful [for example, “Daichi” shown in FIG. Aspect etc.] and the aspect of the display of the certain result displayed when the second mini game is successful [for example, the letters “achievement!” are displayed together with “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 111(h). Etc.]
There is a case where the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode during the display of the first mini game (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the case of the first, if you succeed in the first mini-game, the certain notice changes to the second display mode from the first display mode being displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means,
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
An advance notice means that can execute multiple types of advance notice,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means,
The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”),
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more of the notice icons,
The notice means is a means that, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed,
In a period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a first larger number than the first number of the first number of the plurality of types of the preliminary notice icons, which is larger than the first number, is larger than the first number. It is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when the second number is digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming table according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a false notice in the same manner as the notice.
The notice means is means for executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, executing the fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. ,
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
In the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed, the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number, and is larger than the third number by the fourth number. Is configured to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display means capable of executing a display according to the number of holds,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 5,
The pending display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice,
The pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 7,
In the period in which the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested several times,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 9,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation In some cases, the notice icon that is consumed during the display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
One of the plurality of types of notice is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notice is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first that was not consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon of is configured so that it may be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming table described in Appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to appendix 15 or 16,
As a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During the display of the one-time symbol variable display, a big hit when the second number of the first notice icons is consumed, rather than when the first number of the first notice icons are consumed. Tend to be
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the changed pattern display that has been digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 20,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first false notice display may be displayed as the false notice display,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be shifted in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a look-ahead effect display,
The third notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Equipped with performance control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming table described in Appendix 27,
Main control means,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
A second display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “held number”) in which the operation of the symbol variable display is suspended in the suspended display area,
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the type of the notice display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed once, a big hit when the notice icon is consumed by a second number larger than the first number than when the first number is consumed It is configured to be
The second display means, in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display, before the pattern variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) which is a target of the pre-fetch is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming table described in Appendix 30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming table according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display.
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, can display the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The holding display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The gaming table described in appendix 34,
The pending display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted a fifth number,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested several times,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holding is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetching,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 39,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 40,
The reserved display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of reservations up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a different number than the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 41,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, it is configured to be able to display the first notice icon,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 42,
Main control means,
Production control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons are newly added. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed in some cases.
One of the plurality of notice icons is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In one symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number of notice icons”) are exhausted to display the first effect display as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the second notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display characteristic.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number of icons are consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have expectations for something.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by making the number of the notice icons look like the symbol variation before the hold which is the prefetch target.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  In addition, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be displayed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice icon is displayed. Corresponding effect display B may be performed, or effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. You may go.

  Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be consumed, or only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine described in appendix 45,
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as the "second number of notice icons") are exhausted in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that includes one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that does not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed in one pattern variation display. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, and the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons have been consumed.

  Further, even if the second number of notice icons are exhausted, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the notice icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons may be surely consumed.

  Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not consumed and the second number of notice icons are consumed. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to appendix 45 or 46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is the third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

  The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the multiple notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be read ahead is over.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetching is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetching target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) that is the subject of prefetching. The maximum number of notice icons consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit and when it is lost. It may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (eg, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching is in a state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to appendix 48,
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold that is the prefetch target ends.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With a hold display means,
The pending display means is a means capable of displaying a number of pending displays corresponding to a number (hereinafter, referred to as a "holding number") in which the start of the symbol variable display is pending,
A game table characterized by that.

  Note that the hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
Depending on the number of the notice icon displayed, the hold number is configured not to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display of a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display of a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern is formed by cutting the light guide plate with a lens and irradiating it with a light source from the side. , LED or the like, or 7 segments.

  Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display regarding that the notice icon is stocked, may be a display regarding that the notice icon is consumed, or the notice of stock of the notice icon is announced. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming table according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect|action that a notice icon is consumed by a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the "display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. You may make it perform in the symbol variable display.

(Appendix 57)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
Performance display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is consumed, a production corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as "prediction icon digest production") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  Note that the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, but may be performed by another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means for which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first moving means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first moving means effect may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first movable means must be moved. Means production may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, there may be a case where an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) is performed.

  Further, when the 21st notice icon is exhausted, there may be a case where an effect is produced by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the 21st notice icon is exhausted. Then, the effect may always be performed by the first movable means.

(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to Appendix 59 or 60,
When the twenty-second notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first moving means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the first moving means effect may be performed even if the twenty-second notice icon is consumed, or another effect (or effect display) when the twenty-second notice icon is consumed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means deformation, displacement, movement, and operation.

(Appendix 63)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digesting effect, an effect by the second moving means (hereinafter, referred to as "second moving means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,
A game table characterized by that.

  The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be always displayed in only one symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming table described in appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end,
A game table characterized by that.

  The change in which the display of the advance notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The gaming table according to appendix 64 or 65,
One of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

  The advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that the advance notice icon is increased by one.

  Further, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice increase notice display may not be increased.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasse that the notice icon does not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of the notice icons suggested in the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The gaming table according to appendix 64 or 65,
The 12th number of the notice icons of the 11th number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
Display means,
Hold display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the pending display (hereinafter, referred to as "second pending display") of the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the first From the start of the variable display of symbols to the end of the second variable display of symbols, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming table according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the pending display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth pending display") of the lost symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, From the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when displayed,
The notice icon, when displayed, is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area,
A game table characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  Moreover, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode name of the selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, or a frequency of occurrence of one-shot notification effect There is a mode for making it.

  The display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the animation that appears when the notice icon is displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  Further, here, the “preliminary icon” may be only one preliminary icon, only some of the plural preliminary icons, or all of the plural preliminary icons. It may be a notice icon. In addition, the “trailer icon” may be only the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons, or a part of the trailer icon including the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the notice line of the notice icon is guided. May be easy. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, or the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a variable icon display,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is consumed, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying in the second display area in which the notice icon related to the relevant symbol and the subsequent symbol variation display is explained rather than the change icon, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be able to at least suggest an expectation for the big hit in the symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of the look-ahead.

  Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed only in a single number or may be configured to be able to be displayed in a plurality. Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icon may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the second display is not started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area divided by a line,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
As described in appendix 71, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" means "the notice icon. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The symbol variation display that is a big hit is more frequently consumed by the notice icon than the symbol variation display that is lost.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The big hit variation has a larger number of digesting the notice icon than the loss variation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area in which the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The gaming table according to appendix 81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current performance stage,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area in which the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The gaming table according to Appendix 83,
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the production stage changes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of types of notice icons”) as the notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The gaming table according to Appendix 86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming table according to Appendix 87,
When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may restart.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 88,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a performance display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display matched with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanation display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming table according to Appendix 91,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of probability change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding a reach jackpot expectation degree.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding a character's jackpot expectation.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notification icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification icon”),
The second display is a display including a display in which the first notice icon is displayed in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made,
A game table characterized by that.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged view of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming table according to Appendix 93,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative designs,
The first display is a display showing that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The gaming table according to Appendix 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that may not overlap with the first display,
The third display is a display that may overlap the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 95,
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 93 to 96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired,
(Appendix 98)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 97,
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first notice icon is consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The gaming table according to Appendix 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the notice icons already acquired is enlarged and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 100,
The display of the position of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended portion"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The extension portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 101,
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The gaming table according to Appendix 101 or Appendix 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
Part of the fourth display and the fifth display are the same display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 100 to 103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of the serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may overlap the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to the variable display of symbols,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative pattern variable display,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The gaming table described in Appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "expansion portion"), the fourth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
The extension portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The gaming table described in Appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The gaming table according to Appendix 106 or Appendix 107,
The effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 106 to 108,
The third display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 106 to 109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a line display,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 106 to 110,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to overlap and display,
Part of the fourth display and the sixth display are the same display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 105 to 111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The gaming table according to appendix 112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 105 to 114,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means,
The first area,
A gaming machine equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter,
The number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter, referred to as “acceptance frequency”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
The gaming table described in Appendix a1,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
In the first button presentation, the first display may be displayed when the operating means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
The gaming table described in Appendix a2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
The second display may be displayed even if the number of receptions is 0,
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
The gaming table described in appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The gaming table according to appendix a3 or a4,
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”) in the first button effect,
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”) in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may decrease.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
If a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a7,
The first area is a general winning hole,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may increase,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices a1 to a9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
The gaming table described in Appendix b1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The gaming table described in appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The gaming table described in appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The first display is not started during the execution of the stop display of the decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b6,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The first area is a general winning hole,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
The first display may be displayed when a game ball enters the second area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices b1 to b9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") after the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display"). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first variation icon”) corresponding to the first symbol variation display can be displayed,
The icon that was displayed as the first variable icon is configured to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variable display,
The area in which the notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area in which the first variable icon is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The gaming table described in appendix c1,
In the second symbol variable display, a variable icon corresponding to the second symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable icon") can be displayed,
Both the second variable icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayable,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The gaming table described in Appendix c1 or c2,
It is possible to display the icon that was displayed as a hold icon as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
The gaming table described in appendix c3,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
The gaming table described in appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c5,
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
The display means is configured to include an image display device,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c8,
In the non-electric power support state, the icon displayed as the first variable icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operation unit for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”),
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is long pressed,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is long-pressed,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which an operation of the operation unit for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
The gaming table described in appendix d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that is turned on,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned off.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
The gaming table described in appendix d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is means for emitting light in a first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that emits light in a second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d3,
Equipped with symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The second display is a display that is not started only by long-pressing the operation means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
When the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display is configured to be startable as the operation means is repeatedly hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The long press is that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in a first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
In the second display, the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs the operation once in the second operation mode. The display is easier to start when
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
The second number is a number greater than 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operation unit for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”),
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which an operation of the operation unit for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
The gaming table described in appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a light emitting state in the first state,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a non-light emitting state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
The gaming table described in appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in a first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in a second light emitting mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
The gaming table according to supplementary note d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d8 to d11,
One of the plurality of types of display is a variable display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that is not started by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d8 to d13,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
The gaming table described in appendix d14,
When the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time, the operating means pseudo-operates the first number of times in the first operating mode. Is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d17)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Performance means that can execute multiple types of performance,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in a first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
In the second effect, the operation is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start when
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
The gaming table described in Appendix d18,
Equipped with symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
The gaming table according to supplementary note d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
The gaming table described in Appendix d20,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is obtained assuming that the operating means is operated in the first number of times in the pseudo first operating mode. Is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect which is not started by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted,
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a second state in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
The gaming table described in appendix d23,
The first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
The gaming table described in appendix d23,
The first state is a state of emitting light in the first aspect,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
The gaming table described in appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d23 to d26,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in a first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The first display is a performance display,
The fourth display is a selection display,
The fourth display is a display displayed when selecting one image of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the operation mode in the first operation mode more than when the operation mode is performed once in the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
The gaming table described in Appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
The gaming table described in Appendix d29 or d30,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
The gaming table described in appendix d31,
Equipped with light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a light emitting state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes d29 to d32.
One of the plurality of types of display is a variable display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d29 to d33,
The first image is an image that is not selected by performing only one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d29 to d34,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game table described in appendix d35,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the operating means is assumed to have pseudo the first number of operations in the first operating mode. One display is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Performance means that can execute multiple types of performance,
Display means capable of executing multiple types of display,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in a first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is operated in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. An image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by the means,
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
The gaming table described in Appendix d39,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect, in the first selection display, is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
The gaming table according to appendix d39 or d40,
Equipped with symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d41,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
The gaming table described in appendix d42,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is obtained assuming that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times. Is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The gaming table described in appendix d42 or d43,
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the operating state of the operating means is maintained for the first time or more, it is assumed that the operating means has performed one operation. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d44,
The first image is an image that is not selected by performing only one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d45,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to an operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image, during execution of the second selection display, is an image selectable when a third number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The second image is an image selectable when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
The gaming table described in appendix d46,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect, in the second selection display, is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d47,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted,
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
The gaming table described in appendix d48,
The first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
The gaming table described in appendix d48,
The first state is a state of emitting light in the first aspect,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
The gaming table described in appendix d50,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of display,
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be started during the display of the variable display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started even when the operating means is long-pressed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be started when the operating means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display, after the display of the fourth display is started, is a display that is not started only by a long press of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
The gaming table described in appendix d54,
Equipped with light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of light emission state is a first light emission state,
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d56)
The gaming table described in appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting state is a second light emitting state,
The first light emitting state is a lighting state,
The second light emitting state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted.
By turning off the light emitting means, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is not accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
The gaming table described in appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting state is a second light emitting state,
The first light emitting state is a state of emitting light in a first light emitting mode,
The second light emitting state is a state of emitting light in a second light emitting mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d57,
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d58,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display for instructing selection of one option from a plurality of options (hereinafter referred to as “selection display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that is displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display”),
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display that is not started by only pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
The gaming table described in appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number of times after the selection display is started,
The first number is 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d60,
After the display of the third display is started, when the operation unit is pressed for a long time, the display of the first display may be started as if the operation unit was repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d62)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d61,
Long press is that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d62,
One of a plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
The gaming table described in appendix d63,
The first state is a state of receiving an operation for starting the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
The gaming table described in appendix d63 or d64.
The second state is a state of receiving an operation for starting the display of the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d63 to d65,
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from becoming the first state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d63 to d66,
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from becoming the second state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d67,
The second display is a display started after the display of the fourth display is started, when the number of operations of the operating means is the second number of times,
The second number of times is 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d68,
The third display is a display including the first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operation means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
The gaming table described in Appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operation means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
The gaming table described in appendix d70,
The second image is an image whose display mode is different from that of the first image,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d54 to d71,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
A first operation means,
Second production means,
A gaming machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
Since the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
The gaming table described in appendix d73,
“The effect executed by the second effect means” described in appendix d73 is “the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
The gaming table according to appendix d73 or d74,
Equipped with the first directing means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d73 to d75,
Equipped with a third production means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is means provided in the third rendering means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
The gaming table described in appendix d76,
The third rendering means is an image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
The gaming table according to supplementary notes d73 to d77,
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine equipped with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
Since the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect executed by a second effect means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The gaming table described in Appendix d79,
The “effect produced by the second effect means” described in appendix d79 is an “effect produced by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The gaming table described in Appendix d81,
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
Equipped with the first directing means,
The first rendering means is a first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d82,
Equipped with a third production means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is means provided in the third rendering means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The gaming table described in Appendix d83,
Equipped with a fourth production means,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth rendering means is means provided in the third rendering means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 79 to 84,
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbol fluctuation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d85,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d86,
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in appendix d79 means “operation multiple times”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d87,
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in appendix d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
The gaming table described in Appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine equipped with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
Since the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The gaming table described in Appendix d79,
Equipped with the first directing means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The gaming table described in appendix d80,
The "effect performed by the first effect means" described in appendix d80 is "the effect effected by displaying the first display by the first effect means".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The gaming table according to appendix 82,
"The effect executed by the first effect means" described in appendix 82 is "the effect executed by the second effect display of the first effect means".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
Equipped with a second directing means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
The gaming table described in appendix d84,
“The effect executed by the second effect means” described in appendix d84 is “the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
A first operation means,
A second operation means,
A gaming machine equipped with
It is configured to execute multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display which may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display which may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
The second display is not started by the operation of the second operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The gaming table described in Appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The gaming table described in Appendix d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of the plurality of options is selected.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying mini games,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative pattern variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect display”) includes a display for prompting the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect display”) is a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation promotion display”). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in the first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period,
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part thereof overlaps (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”),
The result of the first effect display is given as a notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice"),
The result of the second effect display is given as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
The gaming table described in appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, the first notice according to the second notice is given after the second notice is given,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
The gaming table described in appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is given,
After the second notice has been given, the first notice may change depending on the second notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e3,
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means relating to the mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e5,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first notice is configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of being performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect,
When the mini game is started, the first notice is more likely to be given in the second aspect than in the first aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The gaming machine described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed,
If the first notice is executed in the second aspect, the second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The gaming machine described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of being executed in the fourth mode than in the third mode,
In the first case than in the second case, it is configured so that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
In the second case than in the third case, it is configured so that the final jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed.
In the case of the third case than the case of the fourth, it is configured so that the jackpot pattern can be finally confirmed and displayed,
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect,
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second mode, and the second notice is executed in the third mode,
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect, and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect,
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first mode, and the second notice is executed in the third mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The gaming machine described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of being executed in the fourth mode than in the third mode,
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the big hit symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the first case, the big hit symbol will be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Has been done,
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the big hit symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the second case, the big hit symbol will be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Has been done,
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally fixed and displayed is the same, or in the third case, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and displayed. Has been done,
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect,
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect,
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect, and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect,
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first mode, and the second notice is executed in the third mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times the operating means is required to perform the result of the first effect display, and the number of times the operating means is required to perform the result of the second effect display. Is different from
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the case where the mini game is played and the first notice is given, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol than when the mini game is given and the first notice is given. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing decorative pattern variable display,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
It is configured to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is the first mini game,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
The gaming table described in appendix e12,
Equipped with a notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is given is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the final jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result (hereinafter, referred to as “second result”) that suggests that the second notice will be given,
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
The gaming table according to supplementary note e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during execution of the decorative symbol variable display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is played, the first effect is configured to be more easily performed than the second effect,
When the second mini game is played, the second effect is configured to be more easily performed than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rate of the plurality of types of mini games is different between the non-electric support state and the electric support state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e15,
The first mini game is a mini game in which a first character appears,
The second mini-game is a mini-game performed by the appearance of the first character,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
The gaming table described in Appendix e13,
The first mini-game is a game in which the first character may appear and be played,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character may be played.
The first mini game is a mini game in which a third character may appear and be played,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a fourth character may be played.
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears,
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “third effect display”) is performed.
When the mini game is started, the third effect display is erased,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The certain display area is divided by a frame,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a preset display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e20,
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in association with the start of the mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
A display unit different from the display unit (hereinafter referred to as “second display unit”);
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
Display means capable of displaying mini games,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is given is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, than when the first notice is given.
The mini game is a game in which multiple results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is the first result,
One of the plurality of results is a second result,
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini game,
It is easier to give the second notice when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
The gaming table described in appendix e24,
It is suggested that the result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived, and the second notice is likely to be given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
The gaming table described in appendix e24 or e25,
Equipped with a production means capable of executing the first production,
The rendering means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect that is performed in association with the decorative symbol variable display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result,
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result,
It is suggested that, before the result of the first effect is derived, the result of the first effect is the second effect result, which is an advantageous development.
The second effect result is more likely to be given a more advantageous privilege to the player than the second result,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
The gaming table described in appendix e26,
When the second effect result is derived, a big hit is given,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The gaming table according to appendix e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be executed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed in the second period,
The first period and the second period are periods at least partially overlapping with each other,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In one decorative symbol variable display, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
It is provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived.
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is more likely to be given than the second notice,
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e24 to e30,
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the first notice is executed if the result of the mini game is not derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
The gaming table described in appendix e31,
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
The gaming table described in appendix e31,
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variable display,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the pattern change display started after the change display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
It is provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e24 to e34,
The mini game is started before the reach,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The result of the mini game changes depending on the operation status of the operation means,
The result of the mini game may include a result unrelated to the result of the success/failure determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first result”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
The gaming table described in Appendix e36,
The mini game is a game aiming to achieve a certain task,
Whether or not the certain object is achieved depends on the operating condition of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The gaming table according to appendix e36 or e37,
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means capable of executing decorative pattern variable display,
The mini game is a game that may be started in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is not executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
The gaming table described in Appendix e38,
It is configured to be able to execute automatic operation of the operating means,
In the mini game in the first case, the automatic operation is configured to be unexecutable.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The gaming table according to appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variable display and the big hit game,
In the first case, the first result is easier to be derived as a result of the mini game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The gaming table described in appendix e40,
The second period is a period that does not include the first period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The gaming table according to supplementary note e40 or e41,
In the second case, as a result of the mini game, a result (hereinafter, referred to as “second result”) related to the result of the decorative symbol variable display is more easily derived than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e43)
The gaming table described in Appendix e42,
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display is a notice or a look-ahead notice,
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The type of mini game is different between the first case and the second case,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e40 to e44,
In the mini game of the first case, the effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first effective period display") is configured to be displayed.
In the mini game of the second case, it is configured to display an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second effective period display"),
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
In the first valid period display and the second valid period display, the decreasing speed of the meter is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game of the first case, a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation promotion display") is displayed.
In the mini game of the second case, a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation promotion display") is displayed.
The first operation prompting display has a first number of display patterns,
The second operation prompting display has a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of effect display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variable display,
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice”) may be executed.
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”) may be derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
The gaming table described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a pseudo-announcement notice,
The pseudo continuous display is a display for displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variable display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative pattern in the pseudo continuous display increases.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
The gaming table described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a pseudo-announcement notice,
The pseudo continuous display is a display for displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variable display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
The gaming table described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a pseudo-announcement notice,
The pseudo continuous display is a display for displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variable display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in the pseudo continuous display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-1)
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern variable display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One mini-game of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game,
One mini game of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the first character may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character may be displayed,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first mini game is a mini game capable of displaying a result (hereinafter, referred to as “first result”) suggesting that the first notice is given,
The second mini game is a mini game capable of displaying the first result,
The probability that the first mini-game is displayed is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game state in which the second game state is more advantageous than the first game state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-2)
The gaming table described in Appendix R1-1,
The aspect of the first result in the first mini game and the aspect of the first result in the second mini game are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-3)
The gaming table according to supplementary note R1-1 or R1-2,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
In the case where the second notice is given, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,
The first mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying a result (hereinafter, referred to as “second result”) suggesting that the second notice is given,
The second mini game is a mini game that can also display the second result,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-3,
The probability that the first mini game is displayed in the second gaming state is 0,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display,
One of the multiple types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display,
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display,
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game is a mini game that is more easily displayed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-6)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-5,
The probability of displaying the first mini-game is lower in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-6,
The first gaming state is a non-electric support state,
The second game state is a power support state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-8)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-7,
When none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the certain display area, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in the certain display area,
The non-minigame effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of minigames,
The non-minigame effect display being displayed is deleted when any one of the plurality of types of minigames is started to be displayed in the certain display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-8,
The certain display area is an area partitioned by a frame,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-9,
The certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-10,
The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the first mini game,
The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the second mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-12)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-11,
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R1-13)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes R1-1 to R1-11,
A display unit different from the display unit (hereinafter referred to as “second display unit”);
The certain display region is a region formed in the display region of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the term of the notice icon explained so far is given for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif). When the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , Notice medal). In addition, the term “preliminary notice” in the notice icons is given only for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

  Further, what has been called a lamp or an illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

  The items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the above-described embodiments, modifications and supplements, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications and supplements.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG. 186.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning lottery) for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning is won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the internally won combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined winning mode, a game medium that pays out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the medium payout processing, in addition to the effect means 1010 for performing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, this effect means creates a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. A launching device 1014 for launching, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detecting means 1018 for detecting a ball entering the winning opening 1016, and a detecting means 1018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 1024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, and operates in a predetermined operation mode. The movable device 1026 which is provided with, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins the prize, the variable display device 1022 causes the variable display device to change the symbol and then stop the display, thereby producing the game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000″.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 187(a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when Cash Out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about a game through a mobile phone line, and data about the acquired game (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data regarding a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data regarding the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is described as an example. However, for example, a game ball is enclosed in the body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine body for use. The present invention can also be applied to an automatic pachinko machine, and this encapsulated pachinko machine may use an encapsulated ball as a launch ball, and payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the above-described embodiments, modifications and supplements, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications and supplements.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Rendering button 137 Operation key unit 137a Up button 137b Down button 137c Left button 137d Right button 137e OK button 138 Rendering button lamp 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 1st special drawing display device 214 2nd special drawing display device 224 Production movable body 230 1st special figure starting opening 232 2nd special drawing starting opening 234 Variable winning a prize mouth 246 Shield device 281 Hold icon display area 285 of special drawing 1 notice icon display area 286 Production hold lamp 300 Main control section 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First Sub Control Unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Gaming board lamp 542 Gaming frame lamp 600 Dispensing control unit 800 First display device 802 Second display device 804 Third display device 806 Performance movable body 808 Performance movable body 810 Performance movable body

Claims (1)

A notice means that can execute a notice,
Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern variable display,
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of mini games,
One type of mini-game among the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game,
One type of mini-game among the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different types of mini-games,
The certain notice is a notice regarding the result of the decorative pattern variable display,
The certain notice is a notice displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first display aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second display aspect,
The first mini-game is a mini-game capable of displaying a result suggesting a display mode of the certain notice (hereinafter, referred to as “some result”),
The second mini game is a mini game capable of displaying the certain result,
When the first mini game is successful, a result indicating that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode is displayed as the certain result,
When the second mini game is successful, a result indicating that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode is displayed as the certain result,
Before the first mini game is started, it is informed that the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode as the certain result when the first mini game is successful ,
The display mode of the certain result displayed when the first mini game is successful is different from the display mode of the certain result displayed when the second mini game is successful,
There is a case where the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode during the display of the first mini game (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, if the first mini-game succeeds, the certain notice displayed is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode,
When the certain notice is displayed in the second display mode than when the certain notice is displayed in the first display mode, the result of the final big hit in the decorative symbol variable display Is easy to display,
A game table characterized by that.

Images